5 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. J 

# , # 

; # • # 

, ?|%< ■■ foprigW fto : J 

1 ^Ag^ ^# 

f UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 






■is 



LATIN COMPOSITION 



AN ELEMENTARY GUIDE 



TO 



Writing in Latin 



PART I. — CONSTRUCTIONS 
PART II. — EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION 






BY 



J. H. ALLEN and J. B. GREENOUGH 



S 



BOSTON 

GINN BROTHERS 

1876 

rr 




7* 



n 



1 %1 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1875, by 

J. H. ALLEN AND J. B. GREENOUGH, 

in the office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



Cambridge : 
Press of John Wilson and Son. 



PREFACE. 



This book completes the series of preparatory text-books 
announced by the present editors. It has been prepared with 
a view to furnish a sufficient amount of study and practice in 
Latin composition, during the last year of preparation for col- 
lege, and the first of a college course. It supposes in the 
learner a fair acquaintance with the language, gained by the 
reading of the usual authors and the careful study of gram- 
mar and notes, with some elementary practice in writing, at 
least as much as that given in the " Method," to which this is 
intended as a sequel. 

"Latin Composition," so called, has often been taught 
solely by the use of detached sentences illustrating the vari- 
ous constructions of syntax, translated out of Roman authors, 
to be re-translated into the original form. We are persuaded 
that, however serviceable this may be to give a certain mechani- 
cal familiarity with the formal rules of Grammar, it is not a 
good preparation for " composition," in the sense that prop- 
erly belongs to that word. The best way to learn intelligently 
the usages of the language is to put real English into real 
Latin. While we seek, therefore, to cover the entire ground 
of syntactical constructions, the suggestions given in this 
book are throughout from the English point of view. The 
question we have attempted to answer is not " How closely 
may this or that phrase in Cicero be imitated by the learner ? " 



iv Preface. 

but, " How may good common English be best represented in 
Latin forms?" We would thus suggest a comparison not 
merely of the words or the constructions, but (so to speak) of 
the genius and spirit of the two tongues, which, we are con- 
vinced, is the true way of appreciating what is most character- 
istic and best worth knowing in the ancient authors. 

With this view, the passages to be rendered into Latin are 
freely selected from the sources which seemed suitable to our 
purpose.* It will be observed that we have very early intro- 
duced continuous paragraphs or narratives ; which, we believe, 
are not only more interesting in themselves, but will be found 
easier in practice than detached sentences, besides the advan- 
tage of exhibiting the rarer constructions in situ, and not as 
mere isolated puzzles. The extracts have been very carefully 
selected, with a view not to anticipate constructions not already 
given ; or, where this is inevitable, it is hoped they are suf- 
ficiently helped by notes and vocabulary, while they are accom- 
panied in every case by full preliminary instruction.! 

The earlier of these extracts are chiefly anecdotes from 
Roman history, or other matter within a range already familiar 
to the pupil. In the later ones we have been obliged to in- 
troduce, here and there, modern material and ideas. These, 
it is likely, will tax more severely the pupil's knowledge and 
capacity; but it seems evident that the more intricate con- 
structions of Latin prose can be best understood when we 
meet them from our own point of view, and find the need of 
them to express our own forms of thought. It should be 
understood that the difficulties they include are those of the 
language itself; and it is best to meet them fairly at the start, 
rather than evade or disguise them. There is no such thing 

* Of these we may specify Smith's " Smaller History of Rome," and Sargent's 
"Easy Passages for Translation into Latin." 

f It may be worth while to suggest that the teacher may at his pleasure select 
single passages or phrases for elementary practice. 



Preface. v 

as making a Ciceronian period or an indirect discourse in 
Caesar or Livy an easy thing to boys ; and the student is not 
fairly master of them until he can to some extent follow and 
reproduce them in his own work. The difficulties may, how- 
ever, be lightened to any extent, at the discretion of the 
teacher, even to the extent of going over in detail the whole 
ground of each exercise in advance. 

It will be observed that a Vocabulary has been prepared 
to Part First only; and that this aims only to give, as a 
simple mechanical convenience, the Latin terms which may 
be used in the passages where the English ones actually 
occur in the book, leaving the mind free to attend wholly to 
the construction. The learner should be impressed from the 
start with the need of habitually consulting his Latin Lexicon, 
to obtain the true meaning and use of the terms he employs. 
Such explanation as could be given in a partial vocabulary 
would be at best of very doubtful service. Even if on some 
grounds desirable, the need of it appears to be removed by 
White's excellent " English Latin Dictionary for the use of 
Junior Students," which within reasonable limits of size and 
price furnishes a guide such as every learner should possess, 
who aims at any thing better than the mere performance of 
the required task of the day; while the more advanced 
student will not be content without something at least as 
complete as the larger work of Kerchever Arnold. The 
design of Part Second obviously excludes the use of any 
partial or special list of words. For this, we trust that the 
suggestions of the Introduction, and the frequent assistance 
given in the notes, — with the faithful consultation of the 
Lexicon, which must always be supposed, — will prove a 
sufficient guide. 



Cambridge, May 10, 1876. 



CONTENTS. 



Part. I. — Constructions. 



PAGE 



Lesson i. The Order of Words i 

2. Rules of Agreement. — i. Apposition . . . . 3 

3. „ „ 2. The Verb .... 4 

4. „ „ 3. Adjectives .... 6 

5. Adjectives : Special Uses 8 

6. Pronouns. — 1. Personal and Reflexive .... 10 

7. „ 2. Demonstrative 12 

8. „ 3. Relative 14 

9. „ 4. Interrogative and Indefinite . . 17 

10. Cases. — 1. As Objects of Verbs 20 

11. „ 2. As Modifying Adjectives .... 23 

12. „ 3. Indirect Relations 25 

13. „ 4. Cause, Means, and Quality ... 28 

14. „ 5. Separation and Comparison ... 32 

15. „ 6. Special Uses of the Genitive ... 34 

16. „ 7. Use of Two Cases ...... 37 

17. „ 8. Time and Place 39 

18. „ 9. Prepositions 42 

19. Verbs. — 1. Narrative Tenses 45 

20. „ 2. The Passive Voice 48 

21. „ 3. Infinitive Constructions 53 

22. „ 4. Participial Constructions . . . . 57 

23. „ 5. Gerundive Constructions .... 60 

24. „ 6. Subjunctive Constructions .... 62 

25. Relations of Time 66 

26. Purpose and Result 69 

27. Conditional Sentences 7 2 

28. Substantive Clauses 74 

29. Intermediate Clauses 77 

30. Indirect Discourse 80 

31. Certain Special Constructions . . 83 



Part Second. 



PAGE 



Introduction : i. Choice of the Word or Phrase . . ,. 119 

2. Structure of the Sentence 126 

Exercises in Translation. 

I. Death of Epaminondas 135 

II. The Ring of Gyges 135 

III. Cyrus the Younger 136 

IV. Xenophon's Sacrifice 136 

V. The Sibylline Books 137 

VI. Hannibal and Antiochus 138 

VII. The Talking Crow 139 

VIII. Hannibal in the Alps. — Arnold 139 

IX. The Embassy of Philip. — Arnold 140 

X. Hannibal near Rome 141 

XI. Young Scipio 142 

XII. Hannibal's Exile 143 

XIII. The Tale of Atalanta. — Bacon 145 

XIV. Assassination of Caesar. — Plutarch 145 

XV. Death of Marcus Antonius 147 

XVI. Destruction of Carthage 148 

XVII. Xenophon at the Sea 149 

XVIII. Vercingetorix 150 

XIX. A Story of Wolves 151 

XX. Death of Socrates. — Plato 152 

XXI. Hannibal in the Apennines 155 

XXII. The Gauls at Rome 156 

XXIII. Murder of Marcellus 157 

XXIV. Story of Cincinnatus. — Arnold 159 

XXV. Princely Generosity. — Feltham 160 

XXVI. Defeat of Varus. — Creasy 161 

XXVII. Siege of Syracuse. — Arnold 162 

XXVIII. Battle of Metzurus.— Arnold 163 

XXIX. Inundations of the Tiber.— Gibbon 165 

XXX. First Acting at Rome. — Livy 167 

XXXI. The Fire of London 169 

XXXII. The Earthquake at Lisbon 171 

XXXIII. Character of Trajan. — Gibbon 174 

XXXIV. Character of Cato. — Middleton 175 

XXXV. Of Studies. — Bacon 176 

XXXVI. Antony in Defeat — North's Plutarch . . . . 178 

XXXVII. Speech of Antony. — Shakespeare 1S0 



COMPOSITION. 



PART FIRST. — CONSTRUCTIONS. 



Lesson i. 

The Order of Words. 

Read carefully the whole of § 76. Learn sub- 
section i, with c f d ; and 2. 

Note. — Though the order of words in a Latin sentence seems 
very arbitrary, yet it will be observed that almost every arrangement 
produces some effect such as must usually be given in English by 
emphasis or stress of voice. In the Exercises to follow, the pupil 
should observe the reason of any change he may make from the 
normal order, and the effect it has in making prominent some par- 
ticular word or words. He should also acquire, as early as possible, 
the habit of regarding his composition as a Latin sentence, and not 
as an English sentence turned into Latin words. And he will be 
aided in this by habitually reading over the sentence as Latin after 
he has written it, to be sure that it has a Latin sound. 

i. The normal or regular form of words in a Latin 
sentence is the following : {a) The Subject, followed 
by its modifiers ; (b) the modifiers of the Predicate, 
the direct object being usually put last ; (c) the Verb, 
preceded by any word or phrase which directly quali- 
fies its action. 

This is the order usually to be followed, where no 
emphasis is thrown on any particular word, as in 
simple narrative of fact : thus, 

Hannibal imperator f actus \ proximo triennio omnes 
gentes Hispaniae \ hello subegit. — Nepos, Hann. 3. 



2 Latin Composition. 

Remark. — In actual practice, the normal order of words 
is rarely found. It is continually altered, either for the sake 
of emphasis, — to throw stress on the more important words ; 
or for the sake of euphony, — to make the sentence more 
agreeable to the ear. 

2. Modifiers of Nouns — as adjectives (not predi- 
cate), appositives, and o*blique cases used as attributes 
— usually follow the noun ; modifiers of Verbs — in- 
cluding adverbs and adverbial phrases — precede the 
verb. Genitives may come indifferently before or after 
the noun which they limit, according to emphasis. 

3. In the arrangement of Clauses, the relative 
clause more often comes first in Latin, and usually 
contains the antecedent noun ; while, in English, the 
demonstrative clause almost always precedes: as, 

Quos amisimus elves , eos Martis vis perculit.— Cic. 

Marc. 6. (" Those citizens whom," &c. See examples in § 48, 3. b.) 

4. In contrasted phrases or clauses, either (1) the 
same order of words is repeated {anaphora) , or (2) the 
order is reversed {chiasmus) : as, 

1. Bellum genere neeessarium magnitudine periculo- 

sum* — id. Manil. 10. 

2. Non terrore belli, sed eonsilii celeritate. — (id. 11.) 

5. Almost universally the main word of the sen- 
tence is put first (rarely last). This may be (1) simply 
the emphatic word, containing the idea most prominent 
in the writer's mind {emphasis) ; or it may be (2) con- 
trasted with some other word preceding or following 
{antithesis) . Compare, for example, the following : — 

1. M. Brutus Ciceronis amicus Caesar em interfeciU 

2. Amicus Ciceronis M. Brutus Caesar em interfecit. 

3. Caesarem interfecit M* Brutus Ciceronis amicus. 

That is, "It was Caesar," &c. 



Apposition. 3 

4. Interfecit Caesarem M. Brutus Ciceronis amicus. 

Here the emphasis is thrown on the fact of killing : compare — 

5. Interfectus est propter quasdam seditionum suspi- 

tiones C. Gracchus. — Cic. Cat. 1. 2 (see the passage). 

6. Moniae summum otium est. 

Here. Rome is contrasted with Syria, which Cicero had just 
spoken of. 



Lesson 2. 

Rules of Agreement. — 1. Apposition. 

Review § 46, 1,2; Learn a, b, c. 

Observe that in Latin simple apposition is often 
used where in English we use as, of, when, or even 
a separate clause : thus, 

1. I come to help you, adjutor tibi venio. 

2. To treat Cicero as a friend, Cicerone amico uti. 

3. To regard the gods as immortal, deos aeternos habere. 

4. The city of Rome, Roma urbs. 

5. I remember seeing "when a boy, ptier memini videre. 

6. Publius and Lucius Scipio, I*. et L. Scipiones. 

7. Cato used to tell in his old age, Cato sen ex narrabat. 

8. Fabius in his second consulship (when he was second time 

consul), Fabius consul iterum. 

N.B. In the following Exercises, words in brackets are to be 
omitted in the Latin. 

Proper Names of the first or second declension are not given in 
the Vocabulary, except where the spelling is different in English. 

Exercise 1. 

I. The consul Caius Flaminius defeated the Insu- 
brians. 1 The next consuls, Scipio and Marcellus, con- 

1 Praenomens (as Caius) are always to be abbreviated (see § 15, 4). 
The name must here precede the title. — Insubrians, Insubres. 



4 Latin Composition. 

tinned the war. Marcellus slew Viridomarus, chief of 
the Insubrians, and Scipio his colleague took Milan, 
their chief town. 2. Give this message 1 to Tai> 
quinius, your king. 3. O father Tiber, take me [into 
thy charge] and bear me up. 4. We have sworn to- 
gether, three hundred noble youths, against Porsena. 
5. Bocchus was gained over to the Roman cause by 
Sulla, the quaestor of Marius. 6. The consul Publius 
Rupilius brought the Servile War to an end by the 
capture of Tauromenium and Enna, the two strong- 
holds of the insurgents. 7. Sempronia, the only sister 
of Tiberius Gracchus, was married to the younger 
Scipio Africanus. 8. The next year, Lucius Cor- 
nelius Scipio, brother of the great Africanus, and 
Caius Laelius, the intimate-friend of the latter, 2 were 
consuls. 9. The Illyrians were a nation of pirates. 
10 The she-wolf acted [as a] mother. 11. The 
Academy introduced a new [branch of] knowledge 
[viz.] to know nothing. 12. Demetrius, an unprin- 
cipled Greek, surrendered to the Romans the impor- 
tant island [of] Corcyra. 13. Marius and Cicero 
were born at Arpinum, a free-town of Latium. 

1 Literally, " Report these [things] ." 2 idem. 



Lessoit 3. 

Rules of Agreement. — 2. The Verb. 

I. Review § 49 (the general rule of agreement). 
Learn the sub-sections i with a, b; 2. a, b. 

Note. — The correspondence of the verb with its subject (called 
agreement) is nearly the same in most languages, though obscured 
in English by the loss of the inflectional endings. The peculiarities 



The Verb. 5 

of Latin use are given in the sub-sections cited above. The most 
important of these is the regular omission of the personal pronoun 
of the first or second person as subject (the pronoun being contained 
in the verb-ending 1 ), also of the third person whenever it is plain 
from the context. Hence the rule — 

2. The personal pronoun is never to be expressed 
in Latin, except when required for emphasis or pre- 
cision. 

3. A single idea is very often expressed in Latin by- 
two nouns connected by a conjunction (hendiadys). 
In this case the singular verb is the usual form : as, 

There is a continued series of events, est continuatio et 
series rerum. 

4. The following examples show the most frequent 
Latin usages : — 

1. Fannius and Mucius came to their father-in-law, Fannius 

et Mucius ad socerum venerunt. 

2. Neither JElius nor Coruncanius thought so, nee Aelius nee 

Coruncanius ita putabat. 

3. Balbus and I held up our hands, ego et JBalbus sustuli- 

mus manus. 

4. If you and Tullia are weU, Cicero and I are well, si tu et 

Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. 

5. "Water and earth remained, aqua restabat et terra (more 

rarely r aqua et terra restabat). 

6. I say, aio ; they say (people say), aiunt. 

7. I strongly approve of Epicurus, for he says, &c, Epicu- 

rum, valde probo 9 dicit enim, etc. 

8. Rational instruction prescribes, ratio et doctrina prae- 

scribit. 

N.B. The periphrastic forms of the verb come properly under 
the treatment of Adjectives, and are included in the next Lesson. 

1 So sometimes in old English or in poetry : as, Dicfst ever see 
the like? (Taming of the Shrew, iv. 1). So the phrases, thank you, 
pray come, &c. 



6 Latin Composition. 

Exercise %. 

i. Catulus in the Senate, and Cato in the forum, 
hailed Cicero [as] the father of his country. 2. Cicero 
calls Athens the inventress of arts. 3. The army 
of Hannibal lived luxuriously at Capua, a beautiful 
city of Campania. 1 4. We avoid death as-if a dis- 
solution of nature. 5. Many ancient peoples wor- 
shipped the dog and cat [as] gods. 6. The swallow, 
harbinger of Spring, had now appeared. 7. Marcus 
Manlius, the preserver of the capitol, came forward 
[as] the patron of the poor. 8. The censors, Crassus 
and Maenius, created two new tribes, the Ufentine and 
Falerian. 9. Quintus and 1 2 shall set sail to-morrow ; 
you and Tiro will wait [for] us in the harbor. 
10. Honor and shame from no condition rise. 11. To 
you, [my] son Marcus, belongs the inheritance of my 
glory and the imitation of my deeds. 12. Never is 
danger overcome without danger, as they say. 13. The 
exigency 3 of the occasion 3 demands severity. 14. The 
mad-scheme of Saturninus and the discredit of Marius 
gave-new-strength 4 to the Senate. 

1 See § 46, 2. b * In Latin, " I and Quintus." 

3 Two words with et. 4 Confirmo. 

Lesson 4. 

Rules of Agreement.— 3. Adjectives. 

i. Learn § 47 (the general rule of agreement) ; 
also sub-sections i and 2, with a, b. 

Note. — As adjectives are not inflected at all in English , the 
beginner is required to pay constant attention to the rule. The 
only special difficulties likely to arise are when the same adjective 
belongs to two nouns, especially when these are of different genders. 
As to these, the principles stated in 2, with a and d 1 will in general 
be a sufficient guide. 



Adjectives. 7 

2. The participial forms in the compound tenses, as 

well as other participles, are treated in construction as 

adjectives : as, 

i. Ccesar and Bibulus were elected consuls, Caesar et JZibu- 
lus consules creati sunt. 

2. Tullia is dead (or died), Tullia mortua est. 

3. Both consuls were slain, uterque consul occisus est. 

4. Virginius and his daughter were left alone before the judg- 

ment-seat, Virginius et filia ejus soli ante tribunal 
relicti sunt. 

5. The wife and little son of Regulus embraced him as he 

departed, JRegulum discedentem uxor et parvus 
filius amplexi sunt. 

Exercise 3. 

I. Brutus, the deliverer of his country, and Colla- 
tinus the husband of Lucretia, were chosen first con- 
suls at Rome. 2. Disunion and distrust were created 
among the allies by the Julian law, 3. Herculaneum 
and Pompeii 1 have been preserved to our times. 
4. The entire Senate and Roman people went out to 
meet 2 Cicero on his return from exile. 5. All sensible 
[people] had become alarmed at the mad-conduct of 
Saturninus. 6. Valerius commanding the foot, and 
Brutus being appointed to head the cavalry, went out 
to meet Tarquin on the Roman borders. 7. My uncle 
and myself, having returned to Misenum, passed an 
anxious and doubtful night. 8. Manlius during-his- 
absence 3 had been elected consul a second time. 

9. Pompey, having marched into Syria, deposed An- 
tiochus, and made the country a Roman province. 

10. The conspiracy against Caesar's life was set-on- 
foot by Caius Cassius Longinus, an enemy [of] his. 



1 Supply urbes in apposition. 
Obviam with dative, following egredu 8 absens. 



5 



8 Latin Composition. 

ii. Mantua, alas! too near unhappy Cremona. 1 
12. You have before your eyes Catiline, the most 
audacious of men. 13. Aurora opens the purple 
doors and the courts full of roses. 14. A boar is often 
held by a small 2 dog. 15. The wall was common 
to 3 both houses, and was cleft by 4 a narrow chink. 
16. Lepidus was defeated near the Mulvian bridge by 
Catulus, and sailed with the remainder of his forces 
to Sardinia. 

1 Dative. 2 non magnus. 3 Genitive. 4 Ablative. 

Lesson 5. 

Adjectives: Special Uses. 

i. Review § 47. Learn 3, 4 (adjectives used as 
nouns), with 6, 8, 9. 

Under these heads occur many common phrases, in 
which the Latin usage must be carefully distinguished 
from the English : as, 

1. I saw Scipio in his lifetime, Scipionem vivum vidu 

2. He came against his wiU, invitus venit, 

3. Every thing was safe, omnia tuta erant. 

4. AU of us are here, omnes adsumus. 

5. He was the first to see (he saw first), primus vidit. 

6. On the top of a tree, in summa arbore. 

7. The inner part of the house, interior domus. 

8. The rest of the crowd remained, reliqua multitudo 

manebaU 

Note. — The use of adjectives as nouns is most common in the 
masculine plural, just as in English the wise, the brave, &c. In 
the singular this use is rare, except with a few words which have 
become practically nouns, such as familiaris, an intimate friend; 
sapiens, .« wise man; avarus, a miser, and with neuters as in 4. a. 
In other cases the noun is generally expressed ; and almost always 
when a feminine or neuter would be used. Hence — 



Adjectives: Special Uses. p 

2. When any ambiguity would arise from the use 
of the adjective alone, a noun must be added : as, 

i. Boni, the good; omnia, every thing. 

2. All [men] must die, omnibus moriendum est. But — 

3. A good man, vir bonus. 

4. Power over every thing, potentia omnium rerum. 

3. When any other case is used than the nominative 
or accusative, the noun is more commonly expressed, 
even when not required for distinctness. 

4. An abstract notion is very often expressed in 
Latin by an adjective in the neuter plural : thus, 

1. All men praise bravery, o nines fortia laudant. 

2. The past at least is secure, praeterita saltern tuta sunt. 

3. Choose the better part, elige meliora. 

4. Fleeting good, bona caduca. 

5. Pleasing ill, mala blanda. 

5. Adjectives are often used in Latin where in 
English we use the possessive, or a noun and preposi- 
tion : as, 

1. The fight at Cannae, pugna Cannensis. 

2. Caius Blossius of Cumae, C. Blossius Cumanus. 

3. Another man's house, aliena domus. 

Note. — These adjectives most commonly represent the geni- 
tive, and will be treated in Lesson 15, b. 

Exercise 4. 

i. Duillius was-the-first 1 of the Romans to 1 conquer 
in a naval battle ; Curius Dentatus first led elephants 
in a triumph. 2. Right and wrong are by nature 
opposed to-each-other. 2 3. After [his] exile Scipio 
passed the-rest-of his life at Liternum, a small town 
of Latium. 4. Demosthenes, the Athenian orator, 
being banished from his country on 3 a false charge 

1 Simple adjective. * Inter se. 8 Ob. 



IO Latin Composition. 

of having received money 1 from Harpalus, was-in- 
exile at Megara. 2 He [was] afterwards recalled [and] 
returned [to] Athens in a ship sent for that [purpose] . 
5. Octavia and Livia, the one the sister of Augustus, 
the other [his] wife, had lost [their] sons, the 3 [famous] 
young Marcellus and Drusus Germanicus. 6. The 
aged senators who-had-been-consuls 4 or censors 4 sat 
in the Forum on [their] curule chairs, awaiting death. 
The Gauls found the city deserted ; but marching on 
they came to the Forum, where they beheld the old 
men sitting immovable like beings 5 of 6 another 6 world. 6 
For some time they stood 7 in-awe-at 8 the strange sight, 
till one of the Gauls ventured to go up to Marcus Papi- 
rius and stroke his white beard. The old man smote 
him on the head with 9 [his] ivory staff; then the bar- 
barian slew him, and all the rest were massacred. 

1 Lit. " of money received." 2 Abl. plural. 3 tile. 

4 Adjectives. 6 forma ac natura. 6 de caelo delapsus. 
1 Obstifiesco. 8 admirans followed by ace. 9 Ablative. 

Lesson 6. 

Pronouns. •— 1. Personal and Reflexive* 

1. Review § 19 (Personal and Reflexive Pro- 
nouns) ; with 3. a (Possessive adjectives), d, e. Ob- 
serve that the pronouns have almost precisely the same 
syntax as nouns. 

2. The Latin never uses the plural of the second 
person (vos) for the singular you; but often the 
plural of the first person (nos) for the singular /. 

3. Of the double forms in the genitive plural, the 
form in urn is partitive, while thatin i is objective : thus, 

1. The elder of us, major nostrum* 

2. Mindful of us, memor nostru 



Pronouns. II 

4. The Reflexive pronoun (se) , with its correspond- 
ing Possessive (suus), is used in some part of the 
predicate, always referring to the subject of the sen- 
tence or clause. 

Note. — In such cases we generally (not always) use self, selves, 
and own. These accordingly are not necessary in Latin, — except 
when they are emphatic, — being expressed by the reflexive or the 
personal pronoun (me, te, &c.) : — 

1. Virtue knows itself, Virtus se novit. 

2. Brutus slew his friend, Brutus amicum [suum] occidit 

(his own friend, suum amicum)* 

3. Philosophy has much pleasure in it, JPhilosophia mul- 

tum habet in se delectationis* 

5. The Possessives (like other adjectives) take the 
gender, number, and case of the noun they are used 
with, not of the one they refer to. They are regularly 
omitted when they are plainly implied in the context. 

Exercise 5. 

i. Bulls defend themselves by [their] horns, boars 
by their tusks, 1 [and] lions by their teeth and claws. 

2. Horatius slew his sister with his own hand. 

3. "Young man," said Sulla, "you have strengthened 
your rival against yourself." 4. "Varus, Varus," 
cried Augustus, " give me 2 back my legions." 5. Cras- 
sus, indeed, has defeated the enemy; but I have ex- 
terminated them root-and-branch. 6. " Who art thou," 
said Brutus, "and for what purpose art-thou-come ?" 3 
"I am thy evil genius, 4 Brutus," replied the spectre; 
" thou shalt see me to-morrow at Philippi." 7. Ci- 
cero was accustomed to write down his orations. 
8. Few men know their own faults and vices. 9. How 
long a letter I have written to you with my own hand ! 

1 ictus dentium. * Dative. 3 Perfect active. 4 Furia. 



1 2 Latin Composition . 

10. Ancus Martius instituted the college of Heralds ; 
he also founded a colony at Ostia, at the mouth of the 
Tiber, and built a fortress on the Janiculum. n. Very 
agreeable to me is your remembrance of me (plur.). 



Lesson 7. 

Pronouns. — 2, Demonstrative. 

1. Review § 20, and learn carefully the sub-sec- 
tions 2. a to e (use of the Demonstratives). 

Note.— -These Demonstratives are used much like the corre- 
sponding words in English, this, that, &c. Observe, however, that 
though they run into one another in meaning, yet regularly hie, 
ille, iste, are true demonstratives, and actually point to something ; 
while is (the pronoun of reference) only refers without pointing 
out. Thus a, a man, the man, one {who), &c., are often rendered 
by is with qui following. 

2. The Possessives his, hers, its, theirs, are ex- 
pressed by the genitive of a demonstrative, and have 
no difference of gender in the singular. 

3. When the word that is used instead of repeating 
a word before expressed, it is regularly omitted in 
Latin. But when a distinct object is referred to, it 
may be expressed by ille, hie, or even is ; or the noun 
itself may be repeated. Thus, — 

1. I prefer the art of memory to that of forgetfulness, memo- 

riae artem quam oblivionis malo. 

2. Virtue seeks no other reward except this [of which I have 

just spoken] of glory, nullam virtus aliam mercedem 
desiderat praeter hanc laudis. — Cic. Arch. 11. 

Note. — In such cases, the Latin often prefers some possessive 
adjective or other construction (see hereafter, Lesson 15) : as, 
The army of Caesar defeated that of Pompey at Pharsalus, 

Caesaris exercitus JPompeianos ad JPJiarsalum vicit. 



Pronouns. 13 

4. Contrary to the English usage, hie is generally- 
used to refer to a preceding statement or example ; 
ille to a following one : as, 

That [which I have just mentioned] is a great argument, but this is 
a greater : [namely] that, etc., hoc magnum est argumen- 
tum, sed illud majus, quod, etc. 

5. Hie often corresponds with our here, the present; 
ille to our there; and iste, yonder {by you) : as, 

1. Caius Caesar here, hie C. Caesar. 

2. Those benches yonder (by you), ista suhsellia. 

3. The present (now living) Mucius Sceevola, hie Mucins 

Scaevola. 

6. The demonstrative pronoun regularly agrees in 
gender and number with a predicate appositive if there 
is one : as, 

This is the toil, this the task, hie labor hoc opus est. 

7. The intensive ipse is usually put in the case of 
the subject, even where the real emphasis appears to 
be on the object: as, % 

1. You praise yourself over much, ipse te nimium laudas. 

2. This thing is sufficient in itself; haee res per se ipsa 

satis est. 

N.B. — The distinction between the intensive ipse and the reflex- 
ive se — both rendered in English by " set/" — requires to be care- 
fully observed (see § 20, 2. e, n.). Ipse often expresses even, very, 
or just : as, 

1. This very thing, hoe ipsum. 

2. It is just three years, tres anni ipsi sunt. 

Exercise 6. 

i. ^Eneas carried with him into Italy his son Asca- 
nius and the sacred Penates of-Troy. 1 He was kindly 
received by Latinus, king of the country, and married 



i 



Adjective. 



14 Latin Composition. 

his daughter Lavinia. 2. All philosophers, and among 
them Epictetus, were banished from Rome by Domi- 
tian. 3. The ancients regard this [as] true riches, 
this [as] a good reputation and great renown. 4. While l 
all arrogance is hateful, at-the-same-time x that of 
genius and eloquence is by-far the most offensive. 
5. Diseases of the mind are more dangerous than 
those of the body. 6. The self-same Cato, the Cen- 
sor, thus discourses in that very book of Cicero on Old 
Age. 7. When I listen-to Cicero, I desire to write 
down his orations, so greatly they delight me. 
8. Romulus killed with his own hand Acron, king of 
Caenina, and dedicated his arms to Jupiter. 9. Upon 2 
the death of Numa an interregnum again followed ; 
but soon after Tullus Hostilius was elected king. His 
reign was as warlike as that of Numa had been peace- 
ful. 10. Servius, the sixth king of Rome, gave his two 
daughters in marriage to the two sons of Tarquinius 
Priscus, Lucius and Aruns. The former was proud and 
haughty; the latter, unambitious and quiet. 11. This 
was the third and last attempt [on the part] of the 
Tarquinii ; for by this victory the Latins were com- 
pletely humbled, and Tarquinius Superbus could apply 
to no other state for assistance. He had already sur- 
vived all his family, 3 and he now fled to-Cumae,* where 
he died a wretched and childless old man. 

1 cum . . . turn. 2 Ablative. 3 Dative. 4 Accusative. 



Lesson 8. 

Pronouns. — 3. Relative* 

I. Review § 48 (rule of Agreement), reading 
carefully the Note ; together with sub-sections, i, 2, 4. 



Relatives. 



is 



Note. — A relative word used as in English, merely to introduce 
a descriptive fact, is as simple in construction as a demonstrative, 
and requires no special rule. Several classes of relative clauses in 
which the mood of the verb is affected (see § 69, 2) will be treated 
hereafter. 

N.B. — Relative words include relative Pronouns, Adjectives, and 
Adverbs ; with the indefinites quisquis and quicumque, whoever. 

2. The relative is never to be omitted in Latin, 
though it often is in English. Thus, — 

1. The book you gave me, liber quern mihi dedisti. 

2. I am the man I always was, is sum qui semper fui* 

3. He is in the place I told you of, eo in loeo est de quo 

tibi locutus sum. 

3. The relative is often used in Latin where other 
constructions are used in English ; particularly where 
we should use a participle, appositive, or noun of 
agency : as, 

1. The book entitled Brutus, liber qui dicitur Brutus* 

2. The existing laws, leges quae nunc sunt* 

3. The men of our day, homines qui nunc sunt. 

4. Caesar the conqueror of Gaul, Caesar qui Galliam vicit. 

5. True glory the fruit of virtue, justa gloria qui est fructus 

virtutis. 

4. In formal or emphatic discourse, it is often better 
to place the relative clause first ; and in such cases it 
usually contains the antecedent noun : as, 

Those evils which we suffer with many seem to us lighter, 
quae mala cum multis patimur ea nobis leviora 
videntur. 

5. When the antecedent noun is in apposition with 
the main clause or some word in it, it is to be put in 
the relative clause : as, 

Steadfast friends, a class of which there is great lack, firmi 
amid, cujus generis est magna penuria. 



1 6 Latin Composition. 

6. A relative is constantly used in Latin when 

English uses a demonstrative with and or but: as, 

i. And since these things are so, quae cum ita sint. 

2. But if they hesitate or are unwilling, qui si dubitabunt 
aut gravabuntur. 

7. When the word as is used in English as a rela- 
tive, it must be rendered in Latin by the relative pro- 
noun, adjective, or adverb which corresponds to its 
demonstrative antecedent : as, 

1. The same thing as, eadem res quae. 

2. Such (men) as, ei qui. 

3. Such a leader as we know Hannibal to have been, talis 

dux qualem Hannibalem novimus. 

4. There were as many opinions as men, quot homines tot 

erant sententiae. 

Exercise 7. 

i. Tiberius Gracchus was by birth * and marriage 2 
connected with the noblest families in the Republic : 
grandson of the conqueror of Hannibal, son-in-law of 
the chief of the Senate, and brother-in-law of the 
destroyer 3 of Carthage. 2. Quintus Silo, a Marsian, 
and Caius Papius Mutilus, a Samnite, who cherished 
an hereditary hatred against the Romans, were chosen 
consuls. 3. Sulla with his army was then besieging 
Nola, a town which was still held by the Samnites. 
4. Rome was now exposed to great danger ; for those 
who had been her most faithful friends now rose against 
her. 5. A day shall come when 4 sacred Troy shall 
perish. 6. The terms which the general proposed 
seemed intolerable to the Carthaginians. 7. Tiberius 
and Caius Gracchus were the sons of Tiberius Sem- 
pronius Gracchus, whose measures gave tranquillity 

1 Propinquitas (plur.). 2 Adfinitas (plur.). 

3 Lit. "of him who destroyed." 4 Repeat the noun. 



Interrogatives. 1 7 

to Spain for 1 so many years. They lost their father 
at 2 an early 3 age. But they were educated with the 
utmost care by their mother Cornelia, the daughter of 
Scipio Africanus the elder, who had inherited from 
[her] father a love 4 of literature, and united 5 in her- 
person 6 the severe virtue of the Roman matron with 
a superior knowledge 7 and refinement, which 8 then 
prevailed 9 in 10 the higher-classes 11 at-Rome. 12 She 
engaged for [her] sons the most eminent Greek 
teachers ; and from the pains she took 13 with u their 
education they surpassed all the Roman youths of 
their age. 

I per. * Ablative. 3 primus. 
4 studium. 5 habeo conjunctam. 6 se. 

7 doctrina. 8 Neuter plural. 9 floreo. 10 apud. 

II nobiles. 12 Adjective. 13 " Take pains," operam dare. 

14 Dative. 



Lesson 9. 

Pronouns : Interrogative and Indefinite. 

Review § 21, i. with a (forms of the Interroga- 
tive Pronoun). These forms, including quisnam, who? 
(emphatic), and uter (see § 16, i. 3), which of two? 
are used much as in English. Thus, — 
i. Who is the man? Quis est homo? 

2. What a man he was! Qui homo eratf 

3. "What do you find fault with? Quid reprehendis ? 

4. What plan of his do you find fault with? Quod consil- 

ium ejus reprehendis? 

5. Which eye aches? Uter oculus dolet? 

6. "Which finger hurts? Qui digitus dolet? 

7. Who is it? (emph.) "^ 

8. Who in the world K Qwisnaniest? Quis tandem est? 

(pray who) is it? j (The latter a little stronger.) 



1 8 Latin Composition. 

2. Review § 21, 2. c y d, e, h (forms and use of the 
Indefinites). 

a. The pronouns which correspond to the English A or some, 
one, or any (indefinite, not emphatic) are quis, quispiam, ali- 
quis, quidam. Of these quis is the least definite, and quidam 
the most. When some is used of objects defined in thought though 
not named, it is regularly quidam. The expressions nonnullus, 
nonnemo, nonnihil are somewhat less definite than quidam. Quis 
is the regular word after si, nisi, ne, num, to signify if any, &c. 
With these particles aliquis is more definite, like our if some one, 
&c. A few or several may be expressed by aliquot, nonnulli, 
plures; pauci (restrictive) means only a few. The English any 
one who is often best rendered by si quis (See Note, Gr. p. 166). 

1. Some one may say, aliquis dicat (dixerit quispiam)* 

2. Some philosophers think so, aliqui (or, if definite persons are 

thought of, quidam) philosophi ita putant. 

3. Some poor -women live here, habitant flic quaedam 

mtllieres pauperculae. [That is, some women he knows ; 
some women or other would be aliquae or nescio 
quae.] 

4. Up runs a man, accurrit quidam. 

5. I -will call in a few friends, aliquot arnicas adhibebo. 

6. In the very senate-house there is more than one enemy, in 

ipsa curia nonnemo hostis est. 

7. Banished not on some other charge but this very one, ex- 

pulsus non alio aliquo sed eo ipso crimine. 

8. He neither denies nor asserts a thing, neque negat ali- 

quid neque ait (any thing whatever would be quidquam). 

h. The pronouns which correspond most nearly with the English 
any (emphatic) are quisquam (substantive), ullus (adjective), 
quivis, and quilibet. The first two are used chiefly with negatives 
(but see § 21, 2. K) ; the other two are universal (any you like). 
When only two are spoken of, either is uter (corresponding to 
quisquam), utervis, uterlibet (corresponding to quivis and qui- 
libet). For the negatives non quisquam, non ullus, non quid- 
quam, non uter, use nemo, nullus, nihil, neuter. 

1. "What can happen to any (one) man can happen to any 
man (whatever), cuivis potest accidere quod cui- 
quam potest* 



Indefinites. 19 

2. I never did any thing worse, numquam quidquam feci 

pejus. 

3. "Why did I send to anybody before you? cnv cuiquam 

misi prins ? 

4. I have less strength than either one of you, minus habeo 

virium quam vestrum utervis. 

5. No one thinking of any thing but flight, nemo ullius rei 

nisi fugae mentor. 

c. The Distributives each, every, are expressed by quisque 
(uterque, if there are only two). Unusquisque is more emphatic 
{every single one). Omnis is sometimes used in the singular in 
nearly the same sense as quisque, but more indefinitely, and is 
almost equivalent to a plural. 

1. Every good book is better the larger it is, bonus liber 

melior est quisque, quo major. 

2. Both armies go away every man to his home, ambo ex- 

ercitus suas quisque abeunt domos. 

3. Each army was in sight of the other, uterque utrique 

erat exercitus in conspectu. 

4. Every system of instruction (=all systems of instruction), 

omnis ratio et doctrina. 

Exercise 8. 

I. Which do you consider the greatest general, 
Csesar, Scipio, or Hannibal ? Which the better orator, 
Cicero or Demosthenes ? 2. " We here bring you war 
and peace," said the Roman ambassadors in the Sen- 
ate of the Carthaginians ; w which pleases you best ? " 
3. Pompey obtained the highest dignity in the State — 
that of the consulship — without any recommendation 
of ancestors. 4. The vices of Alcibiades were re- 
deemed by some brilliant qualities. 5. Most men's 
vices are redeemed by some better qualities, 6. No l 
great man was ever without some divine inspiration. 
7. Horace did not read his poetry to any one except 
friends ; and then 2 under compulsion, not everywhere, 

1 nemo. 2 Lit. " and that." 



20 Latin Composition. 

nor before 1 everybody [indiscriminately]. 8. Some 
skill 2 as an orator 3 is necessary to a commander. 
9. Several of the allies of Sparta were dissatisfied 
with the peace she had concluded ; and soon after 
some of them determined to 4 restore the ancient power 
of Argos. 10. Some slight battles occurred, in which 
the side 5 of-the-Syracusans 6 had the advantage. 7 
11. Since Agamemnon, no Grecian king had led an 
army into Asia. 12. It is contrary-to nature to take 8 
any thing from any other 9 [person]. Does anyone 
deny this ? 13. Whoever had killed a tyrant was 
praised by the Greeks and Romans. Thus Harmo- 
dius, who expelled the sons of Pisistratus, was honored 
at Athens ; Timoleon, who consented-to 10 the death 
of his brother Timophanes, at Corinth ; and Brutus, 
the slayer of Julius Caesar, at Rome. 

1 Coram with abl. 2 Lit. " Something of skill." 3 Adjective. 

4 Infinitive. 5 res. 6 Adjective. 7 Lit. "was superior.'' 

8 deiraho. 9 Dative. 10 $robo. 

Lesson 10. 

Cases. — 1. As Objects of Verbs. 

i. Review §§ 52, 1. with #, b (Accusative as Direct 
Object) ; 51, 1, 2. with a, b, d (Dative as Indirect 
Object) ; 50, 4. a, b, c (Genitive as the object of verbs 
of Memory and Feeling) ; 54, 6. d (Ablative of means, 
with utor, &c). 

2. All of the above cases are used in Latin with 
different classes of verbs to represent the English 
Objective case. Thus : — 

1. I see the man, hominem video (Accusative). 

2. I help the man, Jiomini subvenio (Dative). 

3. I pity the man, Jiominis miser eor (Genitive). 

4. I treat the man as a friend, Tiomine amico utor (Ablative). 



Object- Cases . 2 1 

Remark. — In all the above examples the verb is transi- 
tive in English, but not really so in Latin. In deciding on 
the case to be used as the object of any given verb, the 
following points are to be observed : — 

a. The Accusative, as the case of Direct Object, is far more 
general in its use than either of the others ; and may be assumed 
to represent the English Objective, except as limited by the 
special rules which follow. 

b* The Dative is to be used, along with the Accusative, wher- 
ever in English two object-cases follow, with one of which we may 
use the preposition to or for (except after verbs of Asking and 
Teaching, which take two accusatives) : as, 

i. He gave me the book ( = he gave the book to me), mihi 
librtim dedit. 

2. I promise you a fig, tibi ftcum promitto. But — 

3. He asked me for money, jyecuniam me rogavit. 

4. Plato taught his scholars geometry, Plato discipiilos 

suos geometriani docnit. 

The Dative is also to be used after the verbs (apparently tran- 
sitive) given in the lists in § 51, 2. a, &, d, e. These sub-sections, 
with the accompanying examples and remarks, must be attentively 
studied ; as an accurate knowledge of these classes of verbs is 
absolutely essential to the correct use of the language in one of 
the commonest constructions in Latin. 

c* Verbs governing the Genitive in Latin are few, and belong to 
the strictly limited classes given in the sub-sections under § 50, 4. 
They are chiefly verbs of Memory and Feeling (with egeo, 
indigeo, need). The genitive of Charge and Penalty corresponds 
with the English use of the preposition of. 

d. The only verbs governing the Ablative in Latin, correspond- 
ing to transitives in English, are the few deponents given in § 54, 
6. d. Either of them may easily be represented in English by 
a phrase with a preposition : as, 

1. I use (make use of) a sword, gladio titor. 

2. He eats (feeds on) flesh, came vescittir. 

3. They abuse (take advantage of) my friendship, amicitia 

mea abutuntur. 



22 Latin Composition. 

Exercise 9. 

i. In our own calamity, we remember the calamities 
of others. 2. I shall never forget that day: it re- 
minds me at-once 1 of the greatest delight and 1 greatest 
peril of 2 my life. 3. Pity the sorrows of a poor old 
man. 4. Bocchus, king of Mauretania, had-pity-on 
the condition of his son-in-law, Jugurtha, king of Nu- 
midia, and promised him aid ; but afterwards, calling- 
to-mind 3 the greater power of the Romans, betrayed 
him to Sulla, the quaestor of Caius Marius. 5. The 
Italians loudly demanded the rights which had been 
promised them by Drusus. 6. Caesar forgave all 
those who had fought on the side of Pompey in the 
civil war. 7. Marius commanded a separate army 
in the neighborhood. 8. If a patrician man married 
a plebeian wife, or a patrician woman a plebeian 
husband, the State did not recognize the marriage. 
9. Dentatus had accompanied the triumphs of nine 
generals. As tribune of the people, he most bitterly 
opposed the patricians. 10. The Knights abused 
the judicial power, as the Senate had done before. 
11. He who commands the sea is lord of affairs. 12. 
After the Mithridatic war, Pompey, [though] only a 
private-citizen, performed the part of a commander, 
levied three legions, and having gained 4 a brilliant 
victory 4 was received by Sulla with the greatest dis- 
tinction. 13. Marcus Livius Drusus, like his father, 
favored the side of the nobles. But he had promised 
the Latins and allies the Roman franchise, a measure 
which had always displeased the Roman people, and 
which they violently resisted. Drusus, therefore, had 
recourse to sedition and conspiracy. A secret-society 

1 awl . . . turn. 2 in, 3 tnemor, with gen. 4 Abl. abs. Passive. 



Cases with Adjectives* 23 

was formed, which was bound by oath to obey 1 his 
commands. The ferment increased, and threatened 
the safety of the State ; but at last Drusus was assas- 
sinated in his own house. 2 

1 Ace. and infill. 2 domi suae. 



Lesson 1 1 . 

Cases. — 2. As Modifying Adjectives. 

1. Review § 50, 3. £, c, d (Genitive with Adjec- 
tives) ; 51, 6 (Dative of Fitness, &c.) ; 54, 1. c, 2. a, 
3. #, 6. c, 9. 10. with a (various uses of the Ablative). 

N. B. These rules include many participles, which are used 
like adjectives. 

2. Adjectives in English almost always require 
phrases with prepositions when their meaning is to 
be limited or explained. In Latin this is generally 
done by using after the adjective the Genitive, Dative, 
or Ablative case without a preposition. 

Note. — Some particular adjectives — rather than classes — 
take a preposition, as in English. These will be treated hereafter, 
in the Lesson on Prepositions (see § 51, 6. a, b). 

a. Relative Adjectives — that is, adjectives whose quality natu- 
rally relates to some object, especially one which corresponds to the 
object of a transitive verb — regularly take the Genitive. This 
relation is often expressed in English by the preposition of: as, 

1. Mindful of others, forgetful of himself, mentor alioriim 

ohlitus sui. 

2. Disdaining letters, fastidiosus literarum. 

3. Possessed of reason and judgment, compos rationis et 

jtidicii. 

4. Sharing in the booty, particeps praedae. 
See also examples under § 50, 3. b, c. 



2 4 Latin Composition . 

b. Where the relation between the adjective and noun would be 
expressed in English by the preposition to or for, it is commonly 
expressed in Latin by the Dative. The chief exceptions are given 
in § 51, 6. a, a, c y d. (See constructions given in the Dictionary 
under each word.) 

i. A battle very like a flight, pugna simillima fugae. 

2. A man hateful to many, homo odiosus multis. 

3. Times hostile to virtue, tempora infesta virtnti. 

4. Adjoining the Belgians, finitimi Belgis. 

5. A law advantageous to the state, lew utilis rei pub- 

licae. 

c. When the modifying phrase denotes that in respect to which 
the meaning of the adjective is taken — where the English uses 
in, in regard to, or the like; sometimes of — the Ablative is 
generally used in Latin: as, 

1. Lame of one foot, claudus alter o pede* 

2. A man distinguished in "war, viv bello egregius* 

3. Worthy of praise, dignus laude. 

Note. — In this use the Ablative and Genitive approach each 
other in meaning ; but the Ablative generally expresses a remoter 
and the Genitive a closer relation. The same relation is often 
expressed by the Accusative with ad. 

Exercise 10. 

I. Oil rubbed-upon 1 the body makes it more capa- 
ble of enduring heat, cold, or hardship. 2. Numa 
instituted a college of priests, four in number. 3. The 
fifth king of Rome was an Etruscan by birth, but a 
Greek by descent. 4. The reign of Servius Tullius 
is almost as barren of military exploits as that of 
Numa. 5. Wild beasts are not only devoid of reason 
and speech, but ungovernable 2 in fury, and impatient 
of control. 6. A Roman patrician had a-number-of 3 
clients attached to him, to whom he acted as patron. 

1 inunctus, with the dative. 2 impotens, with genitive. 

3 quidam. 



Cases: Indirect. 25 

7. Mucius, ignorant of the person 1 of Porsena, killed 
his secretary instead-of the king himself. 8. Veii 
was closely allied with Fidenae. 9. The Pentri in- 
habited the Apennines. But, not content with their 
mountain homes, 2 they overran the rich lands of Cam- 
pania. 10. The season of the year was favorable to 
Hasdrubal, and the Gauls were-friendly-to his cause. 
11. The Roman ambassadors, forgetting their sacred 
character, 3 fought in the ranks 4 of Clusium. 12. At 
the beginning of the first Punic war, the Romans had 
no fleet worthy of the name. 5 13. Porsena, alarmed 
for his life, offered terms of peace to the Romans. 
14. Cneius Pompey was extremely ambitious of power 
and glory, and jealous of the superior merit and fame 
of other men. 15. The Romans w r ere like the Spar- 
tans in 6 [their] passion for 7 military glory and empire. 
16. The poet Archias, a man endowed with genius 
and virtue, was regarded by Cicero [as] equal to the 
most learned of the Greeks, and worthy of the high* 
est praise. 8 

1 fades. 2 sedes. 3 officiwn. 4 acies Clusina (sing.). 
5 id nomen. 6 Ablative. 7 Genitive. 8 Plural. 



Lesson 12. 

Cases. — 3. Indirect Relations. 

Review § 51, i. 2. with a, b, d ; 3. 5. 7 (Dative 
of Indirect Object, of Possession, of Service, of 
Reference); also § 50, 4. d (refert and interest). 

a. The most common use of to or for in English is repre- 
sented in Latin by the Dative of Indirect Object : as, 

1. The province fell by lot to Cicero, provincia Ciceroni 
obtigiU 



26 Latin Composition. 

2. I consult for the safety of the state, civitatis saluti 

consulo, 

3. Medicine is sometimes bad for the health, medicina 

valetudini nonnumquam nocet. 

Note. — 1. These should be, distinguished from the cases 
where the direct effect of an action is spoken of: as, 

The dust hurts my eye, pulvis oculum meum laedit. 

2. The dative of indirect object must also be carefully distin- 
guished from the cases — apparently the same in English — where 
to or for expresses the limit of motion. In Latin all relations 
of place, where, whence, or whither, are regularly expressed by 
means of prepositions (see hereafter, Lesson 17). 

b. This construction (dative of indirect object) is used in many 
cases to express with, over, upon, in, before, against, where 
in the Latin expression a verb compounded with a preposition is 
used (see list in § 51, 2. d : ad, ante, con, &c.) : 

1. A rock hung over his head, saxum capiti impendebat. 

2. I agree with Zeno, Zenoni adsentior. 

3. I set myself against all his plans, omnibus ejus consi- 

liis obstiti. 

N. B. — Particular attention must be given to the meaning and 
construction of each of these compounds in the vocabulary, as 
many of them are transitive and take the accusative (See p. 44) : as, 

He besieged the city of Alesia, urbem Alesiam obsidebat. 

c. The English verb to have is often, by a Latin idiom, ex- 
pressed by the Dative with esse (compare Note under § 51, 3) : as, 

1. I have a father at home, est mihi pater domi. 

2. The boy's name is Marcus, puero nomen est JMarcus 

(or Marco). 

d. The phrases it belongs to, it is the part of, and the like, are 
most commonly expressed in Latin by the Genitive with esse : as, 

It is the part of wisdom (of a wise man), or, it is wise, est 
sapientis (compare d, with Remark). 

e. To or for is also expressed by the Dative when the object 
is still more remotely connected with the action, so that the sen- 
tence is complete without it (dative of reference) : as, 



Cases: Indirect. 27 

The good husbandman plants trees for hi3 posterity, paste- 
vis suis serit arbor es bonus agri-cola (compare the 
examples in § 51, 7. and a). 

/. When for or of expresses the purpose or end of an action, 
the Latin idiom has the dative, often with the dative of indirect 
object also : as, 

1. Caesar sent three cohorts for a guard, Caesar tres co- 

hort es praesidio misit. 

2. It was of great service to our men, mag no usni nostris 

fait. 

Note. — In English the same relation is often expressed by- 
simple apposition or by the conjunction as. In Latin this con- 
struction is limited to a few words, which must be learned by 
practice (see examples and Remark under § 51, 5). 

g. For the cases in which to or for is expressed by the geni- 
tive with refert and interest, see § 50, 4. d. The phrase for my 
sake and the republic's is expressed by mea et reipublicae causa. 

Exercise 11. 

I. The troops of Sulla did no injury to the towns 
or fields of the Italians. 2. Tiberius Gracchus relied 
chiefly on the country-people. 3. Both Quintus Ca- 
tulus and Hortensius were-opponents-of 1 the Gabinian 
Law. 4. On 2 the arrival of Pompey, Tigranes was 
obliged to look-to-the-safety-of 3 his own power. 5. 
The great-numbers 4 of the enemy were a hindrance 
rather than a help to them. 6. Caesar's death was 
undoubtedly a loss not only to the Roman people, but 
to "the whole world. 7. To the modern reader the 
elegies of Propertius are not so attractive as those of 
Tibullus. 8. The greatest danger Rome had experi- 
enced since the time of Hannibal was now impending 
over the State. 9. The consulship fell to Cneius 
Octavius, who belonged to the aristocratic-party, 5 and 
Lucius Cinna, a professed champion of the people. 

1 obsisto. 2 Ablative. 3 prospicio. 4 multitude. 5 opti?7iates. 



2 8 Latin Composition . 

To their 1 election 2 Sulla made-no-opposition, 3 for 
it was his own interest to quit Italy immediately. 10. 
The Gauls once attacked the camp of 4 Quintus Cicero, 
brother of the orator, [as he was] wintering in Gaul ; 
but Caesar came to his assistance with two legions, 
and rescued him. n. A servant of the consul 
Opimius, pushing against Gracchus, insolently cried 
out, " Make way for honest men, you rascals ! " 12. 
w Stand aside young man," said Caesar to the tribune 
Metellus, who vainly attempted to defend the treasury ; 
" it is easier for me to do than say." 13. Damophilus, 
a wealthy man-of-Enna, had treated his slaves with- 
excessive-barbarity. 5 They consulted a Syrian slave, 
whose name was Ennus, who belonged-to 6 another 
master. This Ennus pretended-to 7 the gift-of-pro- 
phecy, 8 and appeared to breathe flames-of-fire. He 
not only promised them success, but joined in the 
enterprise himself. 14. " Mother," exclaimed Corio- 
lanus, " thine is the victory, a happy. victory for thee, 
but shame and ruin to thy son." 

1 Relative. 2 petitio, 3 non obsistere. 4 Dative. 

5 Adverb in superlative. 6 servio. 7 sibi adrogare. 

8 vis divina. 

Lesson 13. 

Cases. — 4. Cause, Means, and Quality. 

Review § 54, 4. 6 (ablative of Agent and Means) ; 
7. with § 50, 1. g (ablative and genitive of Quality) ; 
§ 54, 8 with a (Price and Value : compare § 50, I. i) ; 
also 3 (ablative of Cause), with a, b, c. 

a. The means, instrument, or agent by which any thing is done 
we commonly express in English by the preposition by or with. 
In Latin a distinction is made between the voluntary agent 
(expressed by the ablative with ab) ; a person considered as an 



Cases: Cause, &c. 29 

instrument or means (expressed by par with the accusative) ; and 
the means or instrument (expressed by the ablative alone, or 
in special cases by per with the accusative). Thus — 

1. Caesar was informed by the ambassadors, Caesar certior 

/actus est a legatis. 

2. Caesar was informed by ambassadors (i. e. by means of 

ambassadors), Caesar certior f actus est per legatos. 

3. Caesar was informed by letter, Caesar certior f actus 

est Uteris (or per liter as if the letters were official 
documents used expressly as means of information). 

b. The English on account of, for, from, for the sake 
of, through, denoting cause, occasion, or motive, though oftenest 
expressed by the ablative alone, are frequently also rendered by 
prepositions : as, 

1. It happened through my fault, mea culpa accidit. 

2. On account of the pleasure from conversation I delight 

in entertainments, propter sermonis delectationem 
conviviis detector. 

3. We love the good for their virtues, bonos diligimus 

propter virtutes (so pro meritis), 

4. He could not speak for grief, loqui prae maerore non 

potuit. 

So the phrases: — ex quo, on which account; ex eo quod, 
for the reason that j per aetatem, by reason of age ; quam ob 
rem, wherefore. See also Lesson 18. 

C A Quality is very often expressed in English by a noun 
with the preposition of : as, a ?nan of worth, a tale of horror.. 
In Latin an adjective must be used in such cases, except when the 
noun of quality has an adjective connected with it, when it may be 
put either in the genitive or ablative : generally the latter when the 
noun describes a physical trait. Thus — 

1. A man of valor, vir fortis (or fortisshnus). 

2. A man of eminent valor, vir egregiae virtutis* 

3. A man of bodily strength and beauty, homo validus et 

pulcher. 

4. Achilles -was a man of very great strength and remark- 

able beauty, Achilles vir erat summis viribus et 
eximia pulchritudine. 



30 Latin Composition. 

d. Manner — in English with or in — is in Latin usually ex- 
pressed by an Adverb when there is one ; otherwise by the 
ablative, often with cum (see § 54, 7. b) : as, 

1. With care, accurate (or, cum cur a). 

2. In silence, tacite (or, silentio). 

3. In the most friendly manner, amicissime. 

4. With the greatest zeal, summo studio. 

e. The Price of a thing, — usually given in English with the 
preposition for or at, — when a definite sum is stated, is 
expressed in Latin by the Ablative ; but indefinite price or value 
is expressed by the Genitives of Quantity (magni, parvi, &c), 
given in § 54, 8. a. These Genitives often answer to the use of 
an adverb in English, such as highly, slightly, not-at-all, used with 
expressions of value or esteem. Thus — 

1. How much does this house sell for? ten thousand ses- 

terces. Quanti hae aedes veneunt ? decies mille 
nummis. 

2. I esteem Plato very highly, but the truth more, Platonenv 

permagni sed veritatern, pluris aestimo. 

Exercise 12. 

I. The Veneti had much confidence in their forti- 
fied positions. Their coasts were fringed with pro- 
montories and peninsulas, and, relying on their strong 
ships, fully armed and supplied x with leathern sails, 
they were not alarmed even by the greatest tempests 
of the ocean. 2. A liar 2 hath need of a good memory, 
but truth is always consistent with itself. 3. I offer 
myself to thee, O Hercules ! because thou art de- 
scended from the gods, and givest proofs of that descent 
by thy love of virtue. 4. Great things are achieved 
by great exertions, and glory was never the reward of 
sloth. 5. The Sabines, like most other mountaineers, 
were brave, hardy, and frugal ; and even the Romans 
looked-up 3 to them [with admiration] on account of 
their honesty and temperance. 6. Remus leaped in 4 
1 omatus. 2 Dative. 8 admiror. 4 per. 



Cases: Cause, &c. 31 

scorn over his brother's wall. 7. Romulus appeared 
after [his] death to Proculus in more-than-mortal * 
beauty. 8. Augustus lived with republican simplicity 2 
in a plain 3 house on the Palatine [hill], and educated 
his family with great strictness 4 and frugality. 4 9. Vi- 
tellius was remarkable for his gluttony 5 and his coarse 6 
vices. 10. Demosthenes listened awhile to the bland 
professions of Archias, the actor, but at length replied, 
R Archias, you never won me by your acting, nor will 
you now by your promises." 11. Columbus entered 
the hall surrounded by a brilliant crowd of cavaliers, 
among whom he was conspicuous for his stately and 
commanding person. 7 12. To the English it was a 
night of 8 hope, fear, suspense, [and] anxiety. They 
had been wasted by disease, broken with fatigue, and 
weakened by the many privations which are wont to 
attend 9 an army marching through a hostile country. 
But they were supported by the spirit and confidence 
of their gallant leader, and by the recollection of 
victories won by their fathers. 13. The forests have 
given place to cultivated fields, the morass is dried 
up, the land has become solid, and is covered with 
habitations. A countless multitude, living in 10 peace 
and abundance upon the fruits of their labors, has 
succeeded to the tribes of hunters who were always 
contending with war and famine. What has pro- 
duced these wonders? What has renovated the sur- 
face of the earth? The name of this beneficent 
genius n is Security. 

1 divinus. 2 caltus moderatus (abl.). 3 minime sumptuosus. 
4 Adverbs. 6 intemperantia gulae. 6 turpis. 

7 habitus corporis. 8 plena. 9 esse 10 in, ablative. u dea. 



3 2 Latin Composition . 

Lesson 14. 

Cases. — 5. Separation and Comparison. 

Learn § 54, 1. with a, b, c, d (ablative of Separa- 
tion) ; § 51, 2. e (dative with Compounds) ; § 54, 5. 
with a ; 6. e (ablative of Comparison and Degree of 
Difference). 

a. The relations denoted in English by from or of — in such 
phrases as to deprive of to be free from, in want of and the like 
— are in Latin expressed by the ablative : as, 

1. He is free from terror, caret formidine. 

2. To retire from office, abire magistratu. 

3. A city stripped of defence, urbs nuda praesidio. 

4. A man without a country, homo qui caret patria. 

5. You will relieve me of great fear, magno me metu 

liberabis. 
N. B. Motion from a place is regularly expressed by means of 
prepositions (see Lesson 17). 

b. When a thing is said to be taken away from a person, the 
dative is almost always used instead of the ablative : as, 

1. He took a ring from the woman, mulieri anulum 

detraxit. 

2. You have robbed me of my property, bona milii abstu- 

listi* 

c. The uses of the ablative with the Comparative may be seen 
in the following : — 

1. Nothing is dearer to a man than life, nihil homini vita 

est car ins. 

2. Quicker than one would think, opinione celerius. 

3. Much more rich than wise, multo divitior guam sapi- 

entior. 

4. The more dangerous the disease the more praised the 

physician, quo periculosior morbus eo laudatior 
medicus. 

5. The more virtuously one lives, the less he will injure 

others, quanto quis vivit honestius tanto minus 
nocebit aliis* 

6. Not more than two hundred horsemen escaped, haud 

amplius ducenti equites effugerunt. 



Cases: Separation and Comparison. 33 

Exercise 13. 

i. The orator Hortensius was eight years older 
than Cicero. 2. Licinius liberated the plebeians 1 
from an oppressive bondage. 3. Rome was now de- 
prived of almost all her allies. 4. The constitution 2 
of Lucius Cornelius took from the knights the judicial- 
power 3 which they had exercised since the times of 
the Gracchi. 5. Men are much less in bulk than 
very many animals. 6. Grief and indignation de- 
prived Marius of utterance. 4 7. Antisthenes, the 
Cynic, was once very sick, 5 and cried out, " Who will 
deliver me from these torments?" 6 Then said Dio- 
genes, who by chance was by, "This knife, if you 
will." w I do not say from my life," he 7 replied, " but 
from my disease." 8. The archbishop tore the diadem 
from the head of the statue, and the image, thus 
despoiled of its honors, was thrown upon the ground. 
9. The aged Nestor boasts his virtues, nor seems to 
be too loquacious ; for his speech, says Homer, flowed 
from his tongue sweeter than honey. 10. Hesiod was 
robbed of a fair share of his heritage by the un- 
righteous decision of judges who had been bribed by 
his brother Perses. The latter was afterwards de- 
prived of his property, and asked relief of 8 his 
brother. 11. Alcaeus, for instance, cheered by his 
songs the nobles who had been driven into-exile. 9 
12. After the expulsion of the kings, 10 a new office 
was created at Rome, called the dictatorship, greater 
than the consulship. This dignity, however, was dis- 
continued after the second Punic war. The stronger 

1 plebs (sing.). 2 instituta (plur.). 3 judicium. 4 vox. 
5 graviter aegrotare. 6 malum. 7 ille. 8 a. 

e e p atria (abl.) . 10 post reges exact os. 

3 



34 Latin Composition. 

the Republic became, the less it needed this extraor- 
dinary power. But in l the civil war it was revived 
by order of the people, and conferred upon Sulla, 
who afterwards resigned it and became a private 

citizen, 

1 Ablative. 

Lesson 15. 

Cases. — 6. Special Uses of the Genitive, 

Learn § 50, 2. with Remarks 1. 2. 3 (Partitive 
genitive) ; 3. a (Objective genitive with nouns). 

a. When in English one noun is closely connected with another 
by a preposition, the genitive is* commonly used in Latin, no matter 
what the preposition is in English (objective Genitive : see exam- 
ples under § 50, 3. a) : as, 

1. Prayer to the gods, precatio deornm. 

2. Escape from danger, fag a periculi. 

3. Power over every thing, potestas omnium rerum. 

4. Pain in the head, dolor capitis. 

5. Confidence in one's strength, fiducia virium. 

6. Departure from life, excessns vitae. 

7. Subject for jests, materia jocorum. 

8. Struggle for office, contentio honor um. 

9. Relief from duty, vacatio winner is. 

10. Difference in politics, rei publicae dissensio. 

11. Reputation for valor, opinio virtutis. 

12. Union with Caesar, conjnnctio Caesaris. 

13. Victory in war, victoria belli. 

14. Devotion to us, stndinm nostri. 

15. Grief for his son, luctns filii. 

16. A means of guarding against troubles, cautio incom- 

modorum. 
Note. — Nouns which denote feeling often take the accusative 
with in, erga, adversus, ad, instead of an objective genitive. 
Prepositions are also used when the relation is very remote. (See 
examples under § 50, 3. d). 



Cases: The Genitive. 35 

b. Wherever the relation expressed by a noun with a preposi- 
tion (especially of) can be viewed as a quality of the modified 
noun, the Latin prefers to use an adjective : just as in English we 
say, the Boston massacre; the Jackson administration; the 
Socratic philosophy ; the touch of the royal hand, &c. (compare 
examples in Lesson 5). Thus — 

1. The shout of the enemy, clamor hostilis. 

2. Jealousy of the Senate, invidia senatoria. 

3. Confidence in you, flducia tua (more commonly tui). 

4. The Cyrus of Xenophon, Cyrus JEenopJionteus. 

c. Where a word denoting a whole is used with another 
denoting a part (English OF, in, among), it is regularly put in 
the genitive. (But notice carefully the Remarks on page 116 of 
the Grammar.) The peculiarities of the construction are seen 
in the following idiomatic phrases : — 

1. Enough money, satis pecuniae. 

2. More learning than wisdom, plus doctrinae quam pru- 

dentiae. 

3. One of a thousand, unus de multis. 

4. Alone of all, solus ex, omnibus (or omnium). 

5. At that age, id aetatis. 

6. Nowhere in the world, nusquam gentium. 

7. Of the two consuls one was killed and the other 

wounded, duo consules alter est interfectus alter 
vulneratus. 

Exercise 14. 

i. On his way 1 to prison Phocion suffered some 2 
gross 3 insults from the populace with-meekness 4 and 
dignity. 5 2. Two wives of the German king, Ariovis- 
tus, perished; of their daughters, one was slain, 
another captured. 3. We have not yet discussed 6 
the principal wages of virtue and the greatest of the 
prizes that are held out to it. 4. From his boyhood 7 
the Roman soldier was schooled to 8 habitual 9 indifFer- 

1 ctim duceretur. 2 guidaz^. 8 gravis. 4 submisse. 

5 CU771 (with abl.). 6 disse?'ere de. 7 a puero. 

8 Ablative. 9 perpetuus. 



36 Latin Composition. 

ence to [his own] life. 5. During 1 the holidays in 
summer 2 the young men exercise themselves with 3 
sports. 6. To what a degree of brutality will excess 
of misery debase human nature ! 7. Cneius Lentu- 
lus, a military tribune, said to the wounded consul, 
ff Lucius ^Emilius, whom the gods ought to favor as 
the only [person] free-from 4 the blame of this day's 
disaster, take this horse while you have any remains 
of strength. 5 Do-not 6 add to the horror of this day 7 
by the death of a consul. Even without that, there is 
abundant [cause for] tears and mourning." 8. I will 
recount the delights and pleasures in this age of 
eighty-three, which I now take, and on account of 
which men generally account me happy. 9. Many 
inventions greatly facilitate success in the chase. The 
most singular of these is a poison in which they dip 
their arrows. The slightest wound with these en- 
venomed shafts is mortal. 10. Hannibal, after his defeat 
at Zama, served his country in peace. 11. Many men 
expose themselves to death for the sake of power; 
but this king resigned his crown because his love for 
his dominion, his affection for his subjects, and his re- 
gard for their interests were greater than his desire for 
power. 12. The conspirators divided into three parties. 
One was posted near the governor's house, a second 
secured the approaches to the market-place, a third 
hastened to the quarter of the tombs, and awaited 
the signal for the fight. 13. Not only was Brutus's 
life saved at the battle of Pharsalus, but, restored to 
the state after the death of Pompey, along with many 
of his friends, he had also great influence with 8 Caesar. 

1 Ablative. 2 Adjective.- 8 in. 4 insons. 

5 dum aliquid super est virium. 6 ne (perf. subj.). 

7 Lit. "make this day one-of-horror " (funestus). 8 apud. 



Use of Two Cases. 37 



Lesson 16. 

Cases. — 7. Use of Two Cases. 

i. Review § 51, 1. with d ; 2. with e (Accusative 
and Dative) ; § 52, 2. with a, <5, c, d (two Accusa- 
tives). Learn § 50, 4. a, b, c (Verbs of Reminding, 
Accusing, &c, with the Impersonals miseret, &c). 

2. A verb in English, besides its object, has often 
another modifying noun with a preposition. Such 
nouns are in Latin usually put in the case correspond- 
ing to the English preposition, though sometimes a 
preposition is expressed. 

a. The Accusative and Dative (compare Lesson 10, b\ in such 
phrases as — 

1. He laid the burden on my shoulders, humeris meis 

onus imposuit. 

2. I do not envy Crassus for his "wealth (I do not grudge 

-wealth to Crassus), Crasso divitias non invideo. 

3. Caesar required ten hostages of the Helvetians, Caesar 

Helvetlis decern obsides imperavit. 

Note. — In these cases notice the Latin idiom, as it often 
differs from the English ; and observe carefully the construction 
of each verb as given in the Vocabulary. 

b. Accusative and Genitive, in such phrases as — 

1. You remind me of my duty, me niones officii* 

2. He accuses me of theft, arguit me furti. 

3. I repent of my folly, meae me stultitiae paenitet. 

4. I am weary of life, me vitae taedet (weary with toil, 

fessus labor e). 

c. Two . Accusatives : 1. One in Apposition (see Lesson 2) ; 
2. With verbs of Asking and Teaching : 

Pansetius taught Scipio the Greek philosophy, JPanaetitis 
Scipionem Graecam docuit philosophiam. 



38 Latin Composition. 

Exercise 15. 

1. The men-of-Minturnse * repented of their un- 
grateful conduct towards 2 a man who had been the 
safety of Italy. 2. The younger Marius put an end 
to his own life. 3 3. In the proscriptions of Sulla, to 
many a man who belonged to no party an estate or a 
house was his destruction. For although the property 
of the proscribed belonged to the state, yet the friends 
of Sulla purchased it at-a-nominal-price. 4 4. Marius 
upbraided the nobles 5 [with] their effeminacy and 
idleness, and proudly compared his own words and 
exploits with their indolence and ignorance. His 
election was a great victory for the common-people, 
and a great humiliation to the aristocracy. 5. The 
great numbers of the enemy were a hindrance rather 
than a help to them. 6. Polybius taught the noble- 
men of Rome their own municipal law. 7. O 
Jupiter ! give us those things that are-good-for 6 us ! 
8. Praise is to an old man an empty sound. I have 
outlived my friends and my rivals. Nothing is now 
of much account to me. 9. An exile and a menial 
muttered the last farewell to Pompey, the mighty 
victor of the East, the powerful lord of the Roman 
Senate. 10. The Senate distributed provinces and 
suitable honors among the partisans of Brutus. 11. 
The noblest of the Romans were ashamed of the 
victory by which they had avenged the disgrace of 
the Caudine Forks. 12. Old age is 7 most irksome 7 
to the poor. 8 13. Publius Autronius and Servius Cor- 
nelius Sulla had been elected consuls, but were con- 
victed of bribery. Catiline also, who wished to 

1 Minturnensis. 2 erga. 3 mortem sibi consciscere. 

5 Dative. 6 convenire. 7 ftiget. 8 Accusative. 



Cases: Time and Place. 39 

become a candidate, had been impeached l for oppres- 
sion in his province by Publius Clodius. 14. Caius 
Mucius was seized by the guards and brought before 
the king, who threatened him with cruel tortures. 
But he said, " See now how little your torments terrify 2 
me." Then he plunged his right hand into the 
fire of an altar that burned near by, and held it in 
the flames, by which it was wholly consumed. From 
this act the name Sccevola was given him, which 
signifies He that uses the left hand. 15. The second 
secession extorted from the patricians again a second 3 
great charter 4 of liberty. The people had become 
tired of the decemvirs, and were dissatisfied 5 with 
their measures ; for which reason they retired from 
[their] office, and the people elected ten tribunes. 
The decemvirs were then accused of treason, and 
some were condemned to death, others committed 
suicide. Two consuls were elected, and the Valerian 
and Horatian laws were passed. The plebeians were 
still, however, debarred from marriage with the patri- 
cians. 

1 reus fieri. 2 Subjunctive. 3 alter. 4 pignus. b paenitet. 

Lesson 17. 

Cases. — 8. Time and Place. 

Learn § 55, 1. with a; 2. and b; 3 (reading Note), 

with #, 3, c y d,f, 2. and 4; also Remark under § 56, 

1. c. 

a. Many expressions have in Latin the construction of time 
when, where in English time is not the main idea : as, 

1. In the fight at Cannae, pugna Cannensi (or apud 

C annas). 

2. At the Roman games, ludis Homanis* 

<3- In aU the wars of Gaul, omnibus Gallicis bellis. 



40 Latin Composition. 

b. In many expressions of time the accusative with ad, in, or 
sub, is used. Such are the following : — 

i. A thanksgiving -was voted for the 1st of January, suppli- 
catio deer eta est in JLalendas Januarias. 

2. They assembled at the [appointed] day, convener lint ad 

diem* 

3. T evening, m I ad vesperum. 

Towards (about) evening, > 

4. About the same time, sub idem tempus. 

c. Time either during or within which may be expressed by 
a noun in the singular, with an ordinal numeral : as, 

1. "Within (just) four days, quinto die. 

2. He has reigned going on sis: years, regnat jam sextum 

annum. But also — 

3. He has already reigned for six years, regnavit jam sex 

annos. 

d. Distance of time before or after any thing is variously ex- 
pressed : as, 

1. Three years after, post (or before, ante) tres annos. 

post tertium annum, tres post annos. tertium 
X>ost annum, tribus post annis. tertio post anno. 

2. Three years after his banishment, tribus annis (tertio 

anno) post exsilium (post quam ejectus est). 

3. Within the last three years, his tribus proximis annis. 

4. A few years hence, paucis annis* 

5. Three years ago, abhinc annos tres (tribus annis) ; 

ante hos tres annos. 

6. It is three years since, triennium est cum (tres anni 

sunt cum). 

e. The time of day is only counted by hours, beginning at 
sunrise (prima, secunda hora) ; the time of night by watches, 
(vigiliae), of which there were four from sunset to sunrise. 

/. The names of the Months are adjectives, and agree either 
with mensis or with the parts into which the month was divided 
in the complicated Roman system, for which see Grammar, § 84. 

g. The year is expressed by the names of the consuls in the 
Ablative Absolute. Modern dates may be expressed by the year 
after the birth of Christ {post Christum natum) . 



Cases: Time and Place. 41 

h. With names of places (except Towns, &c., see § 55, 3), to 
is expressed by in or ad with the accusative ; in by in or ab, with 
the ablative ; from by ab, de, ex, with the ablative. But at, 
meaning near (not **), is expressed with all names of place by ad 
or apud, with the accusative. 

Remark. — Notice that, when several names of place follow a 
verb of motion, all must be under the same construction. Thus — 

Within four days after this -was done the matter was 
reported to Chrysogonus in Sulla's camp at Volaterrae, 
quadriduo quo haec gesta sunt res ad Chryso- 
gonum in castra L* StUlae Volaterras defertur. 

Notice also that the meaning of the Latin verb must be con- 
sidered in relations of place : as, 

1. He arrived in Spain, pervenit in Hispaniam. 

2. He arrived at Rome, pervenit Homam. 

3. They assembled in the Senate-house, convenerunt in 

curiam. 

4. He brought his army together in one place, coegit exer- 

citum in unum locum* 

Exercise 16. 

I. After the death of Lucretia, Brutus threw off his 
assumed stupidity, and placed himself at the head 1 of 
her friends. They carried the body into the market- 
place [of ]Collatia. 2 There 3 the people took up arms 
and renounced the Tarquins. A number-of 4 young 
men attended the funeral-procession 5 to Rome. Bru- 
tus summoned the people 6 [and] related 7 the deed-of- 
shame. 8 All classes were influenced with the same 
indignation. 9 By order of the people Tarquin was 
deposed, 10 and, along with his family, was banished 
from the city. Brutus now set out for the army at 
Ardea. 11 Tarquin in the meantime had hastened to 

1 Lit. " added himself as leader." 2 Accusative. 3 Relative. 
4 plures. 5 exsequiae funeris. 6 convocato populo. 

7 narrare de. 8 f acinus flagitiosurn. 9 dolor et i?tdignatio. 
10 regnum abrogari (with dat). " Accusative. 



42 Latin Composition. 

Rome, but found the gates closed against him. 
Brutus was received with joy at Ardea, and the army 
renounced [their] allegiance 1 to the tyrant. Tar- 
quin, with his two sons, Titus and Aruns, took refuge 
at Caere, in Etruria. Sextus fled to Gabii, where he 
was shortly after murdered by the friends of those 
whom he had put to death. Tarquin had reigned 
twenty-two years when he was driven from Rome. In 
memory of this event an annual festival was celebrated 
on the 24th of February, called the Regifugium. 

2. Jugurtha was taken prisoner. The 2 great traitor 
fell by the treachery of his nearest relatives. Lucius 
Sulla brought the crafty and restless Numidian in 
chains, 3 along with his children, to the Roman head- 
quarters ; and the war, which had lasted for seven 
years, was at an end. The glory of this victory was 
given to Marius. King Jugurtha, in 4 royal robes and 
in chains, along with his two sons, preceded the tri- 
umphal chariot of the victor, when-he-entered 5 Rome 
two years afterwards, on January 1st, b. c. 104. By 
order of Marius, the son 6 of the desert perished a few 
days afterwards in the subterranean city prison. 

1 obedientiam abicio. 2 tile. 3 vinctus catenis. 

4 regie vestitus. 5 Participle. 6 alumnus. 



Lesson 18. 

Cases. — 9. Prepositions. 

1. Learn § 56, 1. with a,b, c\ 2. comparing § 42, 
±. a, b, c, and 3 (Use of Prepositions) ; also § 52, 1. 
d; 2. b (compounds of circum and trans). 

2. In general, the use of prepositions in Latin is 
the same as in English. They are always followed 



Cases: Prepositions. 43 

either by the Accusative or Ablative : those implying 
motion towards an object for the most part taking the 
accusative, and those implying rest in, or motion 
from an object, the ablative. 

Note. — There are very many idiomatic uses of prepositions, 
for which see the Examples in § 42, 2. and consult the Lexicon. 

a. Position is frequently expressed in Latin with ab (rarely 
ex), properly meaning fro?n : as, 

1. In the rear, a terga. 

2. On the side of Pompey, a parte T*ampeiana. 

3. On the left hand, a sinistra (compare nine, on this side). 

4. On the other side, eoc altera parte. 

5. In a great degree, magna eoc parte* 

h. In the choice of prepositions the Latin point of view must 
be carefully observed, as in many cases it differs from our own 
(see Remark under § 56, 1. c). Thus — 

1. To put clothes into a chest, panere vestes in area. 

2. To choose in one's place, in alien jus loeum deligere. 

3. To fight on horseback, eoc eqna pxignare. 

4. It was reported in camp, in eastra nuntiatnm est. 

5. To go on board ship, eonscendere in naveni (more com- 

monly without the preposition). 

6. To send a man a letter, mittere (dare) literas ad 

aliquem. But — 

7. To give one a letter (to carry), dare literas alieui. 

e. In many cases where a preposition is used in English, Latin 
has the preposition compounded with a verb or implied in it. In 
such cases the construction of the Latin verb must be observed 
(see Dictionary) : as, 

1. To go over a river, flumen transire. 

2. To take one's forces across a river, capias flumen 

transducere. 

3. To go beyond the boundaries, egredi fines (or out of 

the city, ex nrbe). 

4. To fly from the enemy, fugere hastes. 

5. To get into one's favor, inire alicujus gratiam. 



44 Latin Composition. 

Note. — When a verb with a Preposition in English is repre- 
sented in Latin by one of the compounds of § 51, 2. d (ad, ante, 
con, &c.), it is commonly followed by the dative. If, however, 
the compound represents a verb qualified by an Adverb, it retains 
its original construction : as, insidet equo, he sits upon a horse ; 
but, convocat suos, he calls his men together. 

Exercise 17. 

i. Without intelligence and goodness bodily gifts 
are l of little 2 worth. 1 

2. Besides life and sense (which he has in common 
with 3 the brutes), there is in man 4 something more 
exalted, more pure, and that more nearly approaches 5 
to divinity. 

3. It was an arduous [undertaking] to conduct such* 6 
a body of men through hostile nations, across swamps 
and rivers which had never been passed by any one 
except roving barbarians. But they penetrated a good 
way into the mountains. Then, however, a chief 
appeared, with a numerous body, in a narrow-pass. 
But men who had surmounted so many obstacles 
despised the opposition of such feeble enemies. 12 

4. As I was hurrying through the town a group of 
boys ran before me, crying out, Agamemnon ! Agamem- 
non! I went on behind them, and they led me to the 
tomb of the king of kings, a* gigantic structure, 7 for 
the most part in-good-preservation, 8 of a conical form, 
and covered with turf. The stone over the door is 
twenty-seven feet long 9 and seventeen wide ; larger 
than any hewn 10 stone in the world, except Pompey's 
pillar. The royal sepulchre was forsaken and empty ; 
the shepherd shelters his flock within it ; the traveller 
sits under its shade, and at-that-moment n a goat was 

1 valere. 2 Superlative. 3 commune esse \alicui\ cum. 4 Plural. 

5 ftrope abesse. 6 tantum agmen. 7 moles. H incolumis. 

9 in longitudinem. 10 quadratus. n turn maxime. 

12 tarn exiguam vim hostium. 



Verbs: Narrative Tenses. 



45 



dozing 1 quietly in [one] corner. I turned-away 2 
[and] left him 3 in quiet possession. The boys were 
waiting outside the door, and crying, Mycence! My- 
celial led me away from the place. 

5. I have at length arrived at Cadiz. I came 
across the bay yesterday morning, and have estab- 
lished myself in very pleasant rooms which look out 
upon the public square of the city. The morning sun 
awakes me, and the sea-breeze comes in at my 
window. At night the square is lighted by lamps 
suspended from the trees, and thronged with a brilliant 
crowd of the young and gay. Cadiz is beautiful 
almost beyond-imagination. 4 

1 dormito (imperfect). 2 Participle. 3 Relative. 

4 supra qiiam quis animo concipere possit. 



Lesson 19. 

Verbs. — 1, Narrative Tenses. 

1. Learn § 58, 1. 2. with a, d; 3. with #, c; 
5, 6 (Present and Past Tenses of the Indicative); 
§ 57, 8. h (Historical Infinitive). Also, review § 27, 3 
(use of the Perfect and Imperfect). 

2. The narrative tenses in Latin are used nearly as 
in English. But — 

a. The Present is used much oftener than in English to express 
a past action more vividly. 

&. The ordinary English past tense is represented in Latin 
sometimes by the Perfect (historical), and sometimes by the Im- 
perfect. (For the distinction see § 27, 3.) But the use of 
the Imperfect depends not so much on the actual duration 
of the action as upon the way in which the writer wishes to 
represent it. Thus — 



46 Latin Composition. 

i. Cicero lived sixty-three years, Cicero viacit LXIII 
annos. [Here the action, though of long duration, is stated 
as a simple fact.] 

2. Bibulus -watched the heavens, while Caesar held the elec- 

tion, JMhulus de caelo servabat, cum Caesar 
comitia hah eh at 9 or hahuit. [Here the action, though 
brief, is represented as continuing.] 

3. Homer flourished before the founding of Rome, Moments 

fait ante Momam conditam. 

4. Homer was more skilled than Hesiod, Moments doctior 

erat Hesiodo. 

c. In rapid narrative, the English past tense is often rendered 
by the simple (historical) Infinitive, with its subject in the nomina- 
tive. This construction also often corresponds with the English 
"began to." (For examples, see Grammar, p. 156.) 

d. Customary action is represented in general by the Present, 
and in past tense by the Imperfect; though soleo, and similar 
words, are often used (but much less commonly than in English) 
to give emphasis to the fact of custom. Thus — 

1. He was always praising Milo, laudahat semper Milo- 

nem. 

2. He would often play -with his children, saepe cum 

pueris ludehat. 

3. It was a habit of Quintus Mucins to tell, Q. Hucius 

narrare solehat. 

e. The beginning of an action is often expressed by the Present 
or Imperfect, especially with jam: as, 

1. I begin to feel like dancing, jam luhet saltare. 

2. They stood up and began to applaud, stantes plaiide- 

hant. 

f. The English compound perfect is often expressed in Latin 
(when the action still continues) by the present, with some word 
denoting duration of time. The same usage with the imperfect is 
more rare. 

1. We have suffered many years, multos annos patimur. 

2. "We have long been involved in dangers, jam diu in 

periculis versamur. 

3. The forces which they had long been getting ready, 

copiae quas diu comparahanU 



Ve?'bs : JVarrative Tenses. 47 



Exercise 18. 

1. The Tiber had overflowed its banks far and 
wide. 1 The cradle in which the babes were placed 
was stranded at the foot of the Palatine, and over- 
turned on the root of a wild fig-tree. A she-wolf, 
which had come to drink 2 of 3 the stream, came to 
them from time to time, and suckled them. When 4 
they wanted other food, the woodpecker, a bird sacred 
to Mars, brought it to them. At length this marvellous 
spectacle was seen 5 by Faustulus the king's shepherd, 
who took the children home to his wife Acca La- 
rentia. They were called Romulus and Remus,, and 
grew up with the sons of their foster-parents 6 on the 
Palatine Hill. 

2. Then Nasica rushed out of the Senate-house, 
followed " by many of the Senators. The people made 8 
way for them, broke up 8 the benches, and armed 8 them- 
selves with sticks, and rushed 8 upon Tiberius and his 
friends. The tribune 9 fled to the temple of Jupiter ; 
but the door had been barred by the priests, and in 
his flight he fell over a prostrate body. As 10 he was 
rising, he received the first blow from one of his 
colleagues, and was quickly despatched. 

3. Pyrrhus was at first victorious ; for his own 
talents were superior to those of the captains who 
were opposed to him, and the Romans were not pre- 
pared for the onset of the elephants of the East, which 
were then for the first time seen in Italy — as it were 
moving mountains, with long snakes for hands. But 
the victories of the Epirots w T ere fiercely disputed, 

1 late. 2 ftotum (supine). 3 ad (ace). 4 cum (with indie). 

5 conspicere. 6 altores. 7 comitatus. 8 Hist. Inf. 

9 ille. 10 cum (with imperf. subj.). 



48 Latin Composition. 

dearly purchased, and altogether unprofitable. At 
length Manius Curius Dentatus, who had in his first 
consulship won two triumphs, was again placed at 
the head of the Roman commonwealth, and sent to 
encounter the invaders. A great battle was fought 
near Beneventum, in which Pyrrhus was completely 
defeated. 

4. Cato was an unfeeling and cruel master. His 
conduct towards his slaves was detestable. After 
dinner he would often severely chastise them, thong 
in hand, for some trifling act of negligence, and some- 
times condemned them to death. When they were 
worn out or useless, he sold them or turned them out 
of doors. He treated the lower animals no better. 
His war-horse., which had borne him through his 
campaign in Spain, he sold in-that-country. 1 In his 
old age he sought gain with increasing eagerness, but 
never attempted to profit by the misuse of his public 
functions. He accepted no bribes, he reserved no 
booty to his own use ; but he became a speculator, not 
only in slaves, but in buildings, artificial waters, and 
pleasure-grounds. In this, as in other points, 2 he 
was a representative of the old Romans, who were a 
money-getting 3 and money-loving 4 people. 

1 ibu s res* 3 quaestuosus. 4 avarus. 

Lesson 20. 

Verbs. — 3. The Passive Voice. 

I. Learn § 23, 3 (use of the Passive) ; § 35, 1. b 
(gerundive of Deponents) ; § 40, b (second Peri- 
phrastic Conjugation). 

Review § 51, 4. a, b (dative of Agent) ; § 54, 4 
(ablative of Agent). 



Verbs: The Passive Voice. 49 

2. The Passive in Latin is often employed where in 
English we prefer the Active. The principal cases 
are the following : — 

a. The Impersonal use of neuter verbs in the passive (compare 
§ 39, c; and Method, Lesson 20, Obs. 3) : as, 

1. They live on plunder, eoG rapto vivitur. 

2. They fought fiercely on both sides, acriter utrimque 

pugnatum est. 

b. This impersonal use is the regular way of representing the 
English passive, where the corresponding Latin verb does not 
govern the accusative (see § 51, 2. f) : as, 

1. The commander is relieved (by the appointment of a successor), 

imperatori sneceditur. 

2. I am persuaded that this is true, mihi persiiasnm est 

hoc esse verwm. 

3. These things are done more easily than they are resisted, 

facilius haec flnnt quam his resistitur. 

4. This subject was much discussed, de hue re multum 

dispntatnm est. 

5. Let the influence of friends be employed, and when em- 

ployed obeyed, amicoram auctoritas adhibeatur 
et adhibitae pareatiir. 

c. The most common way of expressing the English ought, 
must, and the like, is by some form of esse with the Gerundive, 
which in this construction is always passive, no matter which 
voice is used in English (compare § 73, 2. Note) : as, 

1. Nobody is to be blamed, nemo culpandiis est. 

2. We must do every thing, omnia nobis sunt facienda. 

3. All must die, omnibus moriendiim est. 

4. We must resist old age (or old age must be resisted), 

senectuti vesistendum est. 

d. When the Subject of the action is indefinite, the Latin 
generally prefers the passive construction (compare a, above) : as, 

1. Men do not gather grapes from thorns, ex sentibus uvae 

non percipinntnr. 

2. We do ill whatever we do from confidence in fortune, 

male geritur quicquid geritur fortunae fide. 

4 



50 Latin Composition. 

e. Many neuter verbs in English are rendered in Latin by 
reflexives or by the passive : as, 

i. Hens roll in the dirt, gallinae in pulvere volntantnr. 

2. He rides on the Appian "Way, in via Appia vehitur. 

3. Codrus is bursting with envy, invidia vumpitur Codrtis. 

4. He turns to his lieutenant, ad legatnm se vertit (or, 

vertitur). 

3. On the other hand, an active construction is 
often preferred in Latin, where the passive is used in 
English. This happens — 

a. In cases where the emphasis is on the Object of an action, 
or the action itself, rather than on the Agent ; because the empha- 
sis can be given in Latin (though not in English) by position. 
Thus — 

1. Socrates was put to death by his fellow-citizens, Socra- 

tem cives sai inter feeerunt. 

2. Egypt is watered by the Nile, and Mesopotamia made 

fertile by the Euphrates, Aegyptum Nilus irrigat, 
Mesopotamiam fertilem ejjieit Euphrates. 

b. As most deponent verbs have no passive, the active con- 
struction must frequently be used for the English passive : as, 

1. He is most admired who is not influenced by money, 

quern pecunia non movet eum homines maxime 
admirantur. 

2. We should not mourn a death which is succeeded by 

immortality, non lugenda est mors quam immorta- 
litas conseqnatar. 

c. In a few cases, instead of the regular passive in Latin, a 
neuter verb of kindred meaning is employed : as, 

1. To add, adder e ; to be added, aecedere* 

2. To destroy, perdere ; to be destroyed, perire. 

3. To sell, vender e ; to be sold, venire (veneo). 

4. To flog, verberare ; to be flogged, vapnlare. 

4. When the present passive in English denotes 
a completed action , it is generally represented by the 
perfect in Latin ; but when it denotes an action in 



Verbs: The Passive Voice. 51 

progress , or a general fact, we must use the present. 
Thus — 

1. The enemy are beaten, liostes victl sunt* 

2. He is loved by his friends, diligitiir ah amicis. 

3. Among the Parthians the signal is given by a drum, apiul 

JPartJios signum datuv tympana. 

Remark. — Care must be taken in rendering the confused or 
disguised forms of the passive in English : as, 

1. The house is building, domus aediflcatur (but, he is 

building a house, domum aedificat). 

2. "While these things are being done, dum Jiaec geruntur. 

5. When a verb in the active voice is followed by 
two cases (with or without a preposition), the accusa- 
tive of the direct object becomes the subject of the 
passive, the other case being retained as in the active 
construction. Thus (compare examples on p. 37) — 

1. Crassus is not envied for his wealth, Crasso dlvitiae 

non invidenttir. 

2. Verres is charged with extortion, Verves vepetundarniYi 

reus fit. 

3. Cato is asked his opinion, Cato rogatur sententiam. 

Remark. — The use of a second accusative in this construc- 
tion is found chiefly with rogo, posco, and celo. 

Exercise 19. 

i. We must resist old age, my friends, — says 
Cicero in the book entitled x Cato Major, — and its 
failings must be made good by pains-taking. We 
must fight against old age as against disease. Re- 
gard must be paid to health. Moderate exercise 
should be employed, a sufficiency of food and drink 
must be taken. 2 Not only the body needs to be 
bolstered-up, but the mind and soul much more; for 
these too die out through old age. 

1 See Lesson 8. 3. 2 adhibere. 



5 2 Latin Composition . 

2. "Even now," said Caesar, "we may 1 return; if 
we cross the bridge, arms must decide the contest," 
At that moment of suspense 2 [there] appeared sud- 
denly the figure of a youth, remarkable for comeliness 
and stature, playing on a pipe, the emblem of peace 
and security. The shepherds who were about the 
spot began to mingle with the soldiers and straggle 
towards him, captivated by his simple airs; when with 
a violent movement he snatched a trumpet from one 
of the military band, 3 rushed with it to the bank of the 
river, and blowing a furious blast of martial music, 
leaped into the water, and disappeared on the opposite 
side. "Let us advance," 4 exclaimed Caesar, " where 5 
the gods direct, and our enemies invite us. Be the 
die cast ! " 

3. A conspiracy 7 against the life of Caesar had-been- 
formed 7 in-the-beginning-of-the-year. 8 Many of the 
conspirators had fought in the war against Caesar ; 
and had not only been pardoned 6 by him, but raised 
to offices of rank and honor. Among others was 
Marcus Junius Brutus, whom Caesar had pardoned 
after the battle of Pharsalia, and had since treated 
almost as a son. He was now persuaded by Cassius 
to-join 9 the conspiracy, and imitate his ancestor Lucius 
Junius Brutus, the liberator 10 of Rome from the 
tyranny of the Tarquins. They now resolved 11 to 
assassinate 9 the Dictator in the Senate-house on the 
Ides of March. Rumors of the plot got abroad, and 
Qesar was strongly urged not to attend the session of 

1 posse, impersonal. 2 in ea sollicitudine. 

3 uni ex cornicinibus. 4 Present Subjunctive. 5 qua. 

6 Change the voice. 7 Impersonal. 8 inennte anno. 

9 ut, with imper. subj. 10 Lit. "who," &c. n Impers. passive. 



Verbs: Infinitive Constructions. 53 

the Senate. But he disregarded the warnings which 
had been given him. 

4. The ten ambassadors, of whom Cato was chief, 
offered their arbitration, which was accepted by Masi- 
nissa, but rejected by the Carthaginians, who had no 
confidence in Roman justice. This refusal Cato never 
forgave them. In traversing their country, he had 
remarked the increasing wealth and population. 
After his return to Rome, he let fall from the fold of 
his robe some early-ripe Libyan figs; and as 1 their 2 
beauty was admired, 1 "Those figs," quoth he, "were 
gathered three days ago at Carthage. So close is our 
enemy to our walls." From that time forth, whenever 
he was called upon for his vote in the Senate, though 3 
the subject of debate bore no relation to Carthage, he 
added these words, w Carthage must be destroyed." 

1 Active (cum, with imperf. subj.). 2 Relative. 

8 quamquam, with imperf. 



Lesson 21. 

Verbs. — 3. Infinitive Constructions. 

1. Learn § 57, 8. with a, b, c (uses of the Infini- 
tive) ; also § 58, n. with a, b (use of the Present and 
Perfect infinitive) ; also §§ 57, 8. e; 67, I (Indirect 
Discourse). 

2. The English infinitive is rendered by the Latin 
infinitive in many constructions : — 

a. When it is equivalent to an abstract noun : as, 
To err is human, human um est err are. 

Note. — An abstract noun is also sometimes equivalent to an 
infinitive, and is to be rendered in the same way in Latin : as, 

i. What is creation? Quid est creare? 

2. "Writing with a stile is easy, est facile stilo scrihere. 



54 Latin Composition* 

b. When a second action of the same subject is indicated : as, 

I begin to grow old, senescere incipio. 

Note. — This principle includes many classes of words where 
the connection is very close between the infinitive and the verb on 
which it depends ; and also many where it is more remote, so 
that a subjunctive clause might also be used. 

3. The English that with a verb, when it denotes 
a statement or thought, is always to be rendered by 
an Infinitive with an Accusative for its subject. This 
construction (called the Indirect Discourse) is a very 
common one in Latin, and is used after all words 
of knowing, -perceiving, thinking, and telling. In 
English we often use the infinitive in such sentences 
as the preceding : as, w I think it to be right ; " w He is 
said to be rich ; " and so on. 

a* The English simple infinitive, with expressions of hoping, 
promising, threatening, and the like, is rendered by the same 
construction, of the infinitive with subject-accusative : as, 

I hope to come, spero me venturum [esse]* 

b. The English infinitive may be used after any verb of com- 
7iianding or forbidding. In Latin it is regularly used only after 
jubeo and veto (see hereafter, Lesson 28). 

c. In using the Indirect Discourse in Latin, observe what tense 
would be used in the direct discourse, and make the tense of the 
infinitive correspond to that. Thus — 

1. He says that his father is here, dicit pair em adesse. 

2. He said that his father was here, divert pair em adesse* 

3. He will say that his father is here, dicet patrem adesse* 

In all these three cases the same tense is used in Latin, because 
the same tense would be used in the direct : viz. " My father is 
here." 

4. He says his father was here, dicit patrem adfuisse, 

5. He said his father had been (or was formerly) here, dixit 

patrem adfuisse. 

6. He will say that his father was here, dicet patrem 

adfuisse. 



Ve?'bs: Infinitive Construct ions. 55 

These three cases take the perfect infinitive, because the words 
in direct discourse would be, " My father was here." 

7. He says that his father will be here, dicit pair em ad- 

futurum [esse]* 

8. He said that his father would be here, dixit patrem 

adfwturum. 

9. He will say that his father will be here, dieet patrem 

adfuturiim. 

In these cases, the words in direct discourse would be, " My 
father will be here." (In this tense, the esse is usually omitted.) 
In like manner, with verbs of promising, expecting, and the like — 

10. .He hopes to come (direct, "I shall come"), sperat se 
venturum. 

11. He hopes that you are well, sperat te valere. 

12. He hopes that you were there, sperat te adfuisse. 

13. He threatened to destroy the city, minatus est se 

urbem deleturum. 

d. When the verb of knowing, &c., is in the Passive, the 
impersonal construction is more common in English ; but in Latin 
the personal is regular with the simple tenses, the impersonal with 
the compound (see § 70, 2. a) : as, 

1. It seems to me that you are wrong, videris mihi err are. 

2. It was reported that Caesar's house had been attacked, 

oppugnata domns Caesaris ntintiabattir. 

3. There is a tradition that Homer was blind, traditum est 

Homerum caecum fuisse. 

4. The subject of the Infinitive is regularly in the 
Accusative. But if the subject of the infinitive is not 
expressed) then any predicate word will agree with 
the subject of the main clause if there be a personal 
subject (see § 57, 8. £, with Remarks) : as, 

1. It is advantageous to be honest, utile est probum esse* 

2. I am anxious to be merciful, cupio me esse clementem 

(or cupio esse Clemens). 

N. B. Never translate the infinitive of Purpose by the infinitive 
in Latin (see hereafter, Lesson 25). 



56 Latin Composition. 

The English Infinitive and the clause with that are also often 
to be rendered by other constructions than the above (for which 
see hereafter, Lesson 28). 

Exercise 20. 

i. "You," said Scipio yEmilianus, " to whom Italy 
is not mother, but step-mother, ought to keep silence. 
Surely you do not think that I shall fear those let 8 loose 
whom I sent in chains to the slave-market." 

2. The king of Syria, Antiochus, had nearly con- 
quered Egypt. Popilius Laena ordered him, in the 
name of the Senate, to abandon the country. Antio- 
chus wished to deliberate ; but Popilius, having traced l 
a circle 1 about the king with a staff which he held 
in his hand, "Before 2 leaving this circle," said he, 
" answer the Senate." Antiochus promised to obey, 
and went out of Egypt. Popilius then divided the 
kingdom between the two brothers Philometor and 
Physcon. 

3. I purpose 3 to write the history of a memorable 
revolution which has agitated men deeply, and which 
divides them even to-day. I do not conceal from my- 
self the-difBculties-of-the-undertaking ; 4 for passions 
which it was thought were stifled under [the influence 
of] a military despotism have just been reawakened. 
Suddenly men overwhelmed with years and toil have 
felt revive 5 in them resentments which seemed to be 
appeased, and have communicated them to us their 
children and heirs. But if we have-to-maintain 6 the 
same cause, we-have-not 7 to defend their conduct; 

1 Participle passive, ablative absolute (see next Lesson). 

2 ante quam, with pres. indie. 3 in animo habere. 

4 Lit. " how difficult are (subj.) those things which I undertake." 

5 Infinitive. 6 Part in dus, agreeing with causa. 

7 nihil opus est. 8 Lit. " those will alarm me." 



Verbs: Participial Constructions. 57 

and we can separate liberty itself from those who 
have well or ill served it, while x we still have the* 
advantage of-having-heard 2 and watched these old 
men, who, filled as-they-are 3 with their memories 
still excited by their impressions, teach us to under- 
stand them. 

4. The king entered the ship in a violent storm, 
which the mariners beholding-with-astonishment, 4 at 
length with great humility gave him warning of the 
danger. But he commanded them instantly to put 
off, and not be afraid, for he had never in his life 
heard that any king was drowned. 

1 cwn, with subj. 8 quod, with indie. 3 qutdem. 

4 ad7nirari. 



Lesson 22. 

Verbs. — 4, Participial Constructions. 

i. Learn § 72, with 1. and c; 2, 3. with Remark 
and a (uses of Participles). Also, 4. with a; with 
§ 40, a, b (Periphrastic Conjugations) ; § 72, 5. with 
#, b, c; and § 54, 10. b (Ablative Absolute). 

2. The English participle is often expressed not by 
a participle in Latin, but by a relative clause, or 
one with cum or dum (see § 72, 1. c) : as, 

1. In the foUowing -winter, ea quae secuta est hieme. 

2. Caesar, seeing this, gave the signal for battle, Caesar cum 

7wc vidisset signum dedit proelii. 

3. While humoring the young, I have forgotten that I am 

old, dmw obseqtior adulescentibus, me senem esse 
oblitus sum. 

3. On the other hand, almost any simple modifying 
clause can be rendered in Latin in a participial form. 
This principle includes, among others, relative clauses, 



58 Latin Composition. 

and those introduced by when, if, because, although, 
together with many adverbial phrases. 

a. If there is any word in the main clause to which the 
participle can be attached as a modifier, it usually agrees with it. 
This corresponds to the English use of participles, except that 
it is much more common. 

i. Any evil is easily crushed at its birth, omne malum 

nascens facile opprimitur. 
2. The enemy slay Valerius while fighting bravely, Valerium, 

hastes acerrime pugnantem occidunt. 

b. If there is no word to which the participle can be attached, 
the participle is put in the ablative, with some word in agreement, 
which serves as a kind of Subject (Ablative Absolute : see exam- 
ples in " Method," p. 51). 

c. Even what in English seems a separate clause is in Latin 
often crowded into the main clause in a participial form : as, 

1. Cur men followed them close — encumbered as they 

were — and cut them down, quos impeditos nosiri 
consecuti occiderunt. 

2. It is a wretched thing to fret yourself when it does no 

good, miserum est nihil proficientem angi. 

d. The perfect active participle, which is missing in Latin, is 
supplied either (1) by a change of voice with the Ablative Abso- 
lute ; or (2) by a clause with cum or dum. The difficulty is, 
however, often avoided by the use of Deponents, whose perfect 
participle usually has an active signification. Thus — 

1. Having delayed a little, and set fire to all the villages, 

they pushed forward, paulisper morati, omnibus 
vieis incensis, contender f unt. 

2. Having observed this, he sent the third line as a relief 

to our men who were in difficulty, id cum anim- 
advertisset 9 tertiam aciem laborantibus nostris 
snbsidio misit. 

Exercise 21. 

I. Veii was not succored by the other Etruscan 
cities then threatened with an invasion of the Gauls. 
Besides, the Veians had given themselves a king 



Verbs: Participial Constructions. 59 

instead of the annual magistrate, and a king odious 
to the other cities. This lucumo, irritated at 1 not 
having been named chief of the confederation, had 
stirred up the artisans, and violently interrupted the 
sacred games of Volsinii. On leaving for the siege 
of'Veii, the Roman knights swore never to return, 
unless [they were] conquerors. This was also the vow 
of the Spartans on leaving for Ithome. On 2 the 
approach of the Roman army, the Veians left their 
city, clothed in funeral apparel, and bearing lighted 
torches. The city was taken by a mine. The 
besiegers, [who were] concealed in it 3 near the temple 
of Juno, overheard the reply of an oracle, which the 
Etruscans had consulted. w Victory," said the priest, 
w shall be with 4 him who shall sacrifice this heifer on 
the altar." Then the Roman soldiers burst into the 
temple, seized the axe from the priest's hand, and 
struck down the heifer; and the town, thus betrayed 
by its own gods, fell into the hands of the Romans. 

2. The deputation arrived at Epidaurus the pecu- 
liar seat of ./Esculapius, and invited the god to make 
his abode at Rome. Nor did he refuse ; for one of 
the snakes sacred to yEsculapius crawled from his 
temple to the city of Epidaurus, and thence proceeded 
to the sea-shore, and climbed up into the ship of the 
Roman ambassadors [which was] drawn up on the 
beach. They now, instructed by the Epidaurians 
that the god willingly accompanied them, sailed away 
with the sacred snake to Italy. But when 5 the ship 
stopped 5 at Antium — so goes the story — the snake 
left 6 [it and] crawled to the temple of ./Esculapius 

1 Accusative with Infinitive. 2 Ablative. 3 Relative. 

4 Dative. 5 Lit. " the ship (ace.) stopping." 6 Participle. 



60 Latin Composition. 

in that city ; where he coiled himself round a tall palm- 
tree, and remained for three days. The Romans 
meanwhile anxiously awaited his return to the ship. 
At last he went l back [and] did not move again till the 
ship entered the Tiber. Then, when she came 2 to 
Rome, he again crawled forth, swam to the island in 
the middle of the Tiber, and there went on shore and 
remained quiet. A temple was built, therefore, to the 
god on the spot which he had himself chosen. 

1 Participle. 2 Pluperf. subj. (impers.). 

Lesson 23. 

Verbs. — 5. Gerundive Constructions. 

i. Learn § 73, i, 2, 3. with #, 6, c, d (use of the 
Gerund and Gerundive). 

2. The English participial noun, or verbal in -ing, 
is represented in Latin in several different ways. 

a. When it is subject or object, by the Infinitive (see Lesson 
21), or quod with the Indicative ; rarely by a verbal noun : as, 

1. Your being here is agreeable, quod ades (or te adesse) 

gratum, est. 

2. I prefer writing to speaking, malo scribere quam 

loqui. 

b. In the other cases, most commonly by the Gerund or 
Gerundive ; less commonly by an Adverbial or Substantive 
Clause (see Lessons 25, 27) : as, 

1. The labor of writing is irksome, labor scribendi moles- 

tnm est. 

2. A plan was formed for firing the city, consilium in- 

flaminandae urbis inittim est. 

3. I dissuaded him from going, ne iret dissuasi. 

Note. — The Gerund and Gerundive are precisely equivalent in 
meaning. But the Gerundive, being in its origin a passive con- 
struction, can be used only of verbs which govern the accusative 
(except utor, &c). When it can be used, it is generally to be 
preferred. 



Vc7'bs : Gerundive Constructions. 61 

c. The phrase " without doing any thing," or the like, has no 
corresponding expression in Latin ; but must be analyzed and 
rendered by some other form of words, chiefly a participle or the 
ablative absolute : as, 

i. Without accomplishing his purpose, re infecta. 

2. Without being compelled, non coactus. 

3. He went away without doing this, ahiit neque hoc fecit* 

4. You shall not go without doing this, non abibis nisi 

hoc feceris. 

5. I trod on a snake -without knowing it, angtiem calcavi 

insciens (or inscienter). 

d. Purpose is often expressed in Latin by the accusative of 
the Gerund or Gerundive with ad, or by the Genitive followed by 
causa or gratia (see hereafter, Lesson 26, and examples, Gram- 
mar, page 183). 

Exercise 22. 

1. When polished nations have obtained the glory 
of victory, or have enriched themselves by the addi- 
tion-of 1 territory, they may 2 end the war with honor. 
But savages are not satisfied until they extirpate 3 the 
community which is the object of their rage. They 
fight not to 4 conquer,* but to 4 destroy. If they engage 
in hostilities, it is with a resolution never to-see 5 the 
face of the enemy in peace, but to prosecute the war 
with immortal enmity. The desire of vengeance [is] 
the first and almost the only [principle which] a 
savage instils into the minds of [his] children. 

2. Cato's opinion prevailed, and the Senate only 
waited for a favorable opportunity to-destroy 5 the city. 
The Romans had resolved' on war; 6 and when the 
Carthaginian ambassadors arrived at Rome, to 4 offer 
to the Senate the submission of Carthage, the two 
consuls were already levying troops. The ambassa- 

1 Gerundive. 2 licet. 3 Perfect. 4 ad, with gerund. 

5 Gen. of gerund. 6 bello decertare statuerant. 



62 Lathi Composition. 

dorsj knowing that resistance was hopeless, sought 1 to 
appease the anger of the Senate by unconditional obe- 
dience. They were ordered to send three hundred of 
the noblest families to [meet] the consuls atLilybaeum, 
and were told that the consuls would inform them of 
the further orders of the Senate. 

3. Sulla, [when] quaestor in the war against-Jugur- 
tha, 2 by his zeal and energy soon gained the full 
approval of [his] commander. He was equally suc- 
cessful in gaining the affections of the soldiers. He 
always addressed them with the greatest kindness, 
seized every opportunity of conferring favors upon 
them, was ever ready to 3 take-part-in all the jests of 
the camp, and [at the same time] never shrank from 
sharing in all their labors and dangers. It is a 
curious circumstance that Marius gave to his future 
enemy and the destroyer of his family and party the 
first opportunity of distinguishing himself. The ene- 
mies of Marius claimed for Sulla the glory of the 
betrayal-of 4 Jugurtha ; and Sulla himself took the 
credit of it by always wearing a signet ring represent- 
ing 5 the [scene of the] surrender. 

1 conor. 2 Adjective. 3 ad, with gerundive. 

4 Perf. part. 5 Lit. "on which was represented." 



Lesson 24. 

Verbs. —6. Subjunctive Construction's. 

i. Learn § 57, 2. with a, b; 3, 4, 5, 6 (uses of the 
Subjunctive) ; also 7. with a (Imperative Construc- 
tions) . 

2. The Subjunctive mood in Latin is used to repre- 
sent a great variety of constructions in English, most 



Verbs: Subjunctive Constructions. 63 

of which are included in the dependent clauses, to be 
given in future Lessons. The others are the follow- 
ing : — 

a. The rare Subjunctive in English is for the most part 
rendered by the subjunctive in Latin (but compare special con- 
structions in future Lessons). Thus — 

1. Let him that standeth take heed lest he fall, caveat qui 

stat ne cadat. 

2. I care not, so it serve the state, nil mea refert dum- 

modo rei publicae prosit. 

3. "What would Cicero say if he were alive? Quid diceret 

Cicero si viveret? 

b. The auxiliaries which form the English Potential — may, 
might, could, would, should — are very loose in their use and 
meaning, being sometimes pure auxiliaries, and sometimes retain- 
ing their proper force. In the former case they are generally 
rendered by the subjunctive in Latin ; in the latter, they require 
some verb of similar meaning. Thus — 

1. You may say (it is possible you should say), dicas. 

2. You may say (you are permitted to say), licet dicer e, 

3. He would go if I should wish it, eat si vetym. 

4. Ke would go (now) if I wished it. iret si v x ellem* 

5. You would have it so, sic voluisti. \ 

6. I should like to go, ire velim. 

7. I could wish he were here, vellem adesset. 

8. A soldier should obey his commander, miles imperatori 

par ere debet. 

9. Whoever could go went, quicumque ire poterat ivit. 

10. What could I do (what was I to do)? Quid facer em? 

11. I wish he would come, utinam veniat. 

12. Would he were now here! O si nunc adesset! 

c» The English Imperative — except commands in the seco?td 
person — is regularly rendered by the Latin subjunctive. Com- 
mands addressed to a definite person take the imperative in Latin;- 
prohibitions to a definite person, 1. noli, with the infinitive ; 2. 
cave, with the present subjunctive ; 3. ne, with the perfect sub- 
junctive. Thus — 



64 Latin Corn-position. 



1. Let us go, eamus. 

2. Well, be it so, flat sane. 

3. Let justice be done though the heavens fall, flat justitia 

ruat caelum. 

4. Leap down, fellow-soldiers, desilite, commiliiones. 

5. Do not suppose, nolite putare. 

6. Pardon nothing, do nothing by favor, be not moved by 

compassion, nihil ignoveris, nihil gratiae causa 
feceris, misericordia commotus ne sis. 

d. General precepts, both affirmative and negative, are regularly 
expressed by the second person of the present subjunctive, less 
commonly the perfect. 

e. There are many idiomatic constructions — more especially 
clauses of Result and clauses in Indirect Discourse — which in 
Latin require the subjunctive, though they have no modal form 
in English. (For these constructions, see hereafter, especially 
Lessons 26 and 28.) 

Exercise 33. 

1. w Let him go then," they said, " where he pleases 
as an exile, and suffer in some other place whatever 
fate has reserved for him ; and let us pray that the 
gods visit us not with their anger, for rejecting Marius 
from our city in poverty and rags." Moved by such 
considerations, all in a body entered the room where 
Marius was, and getting round him, began to conduct 
him to the sea, 

2. "Why," said Rasselas, " should you envy others 
so great an advantage? All skill ought to be exerted 
for universal good. Every man has owed much to 
others, and ought to repay the kindness that he has 
received." 

3. Sweet language will multiply friends, and a fair- 
speaking tongue will increase kind greetings. Be in 
peace with many ; nevertheless have but one counsellor 
of a thousand. If thou wouldest l get a friend, prove 

1 volo. 



Verbs: Subjunctive Constructions. 65 

him first, and 1 be not * hasty 2 to credit him. For some 3 
man is a friend for 4 his own occasion, 4 and 5 will not 5 
abide in the day of thy trouble. 

4. My lords, 6 if you must fall may you so fall. But 
if you stand — and stand I trust you will — together 
with the fortunes of this ancient monarchy, — together 
with the ancient laws and liberties of this great and 
illustrious kingdom, — may you stand asunimpeached 
in honor as in power. May you stand the refuge 
of afflicted nations ! May you stand a sacred temple 
for the perpetual residence of an inviolable justice ! 

5. Believe me, Athenians! if, recovering from this 
lethargy, you would 7 assume the ancient spirit and 
freedom of your fathers, the world might 7 once more 
behold you playing a part worthy of Athenians ! May 
the gods inspire you to determine upon such measures ! 

6. Lay hold on this chance of safety, Conscript 
Fathers ! by the immortal gods I conjure you. Give 
one sign to the Roman people, that even as now they 
pledge their valor, so you pledge your wisdom to the 
crisis of the state. Do you not know this Antony? 
Do you not know his companions? To be slaves to 
such as he, to such as they, would it not be the fullest 
measure of misery, joined with the fullest measure of 
disgrace? If it be so — which heaven forfend ! — . 
that 8 the supreme hour of the republic has come, let 
us, the rulers of the world, rather fall with honor than 
serve with infamy ! Born to glory and to liberty, let 
us hold these bright distinctions fast, or let us greatly 
die! 



neve. 2 Adverb. 8 quispiam. 4 temp oris causa, 

nee. 6 P aires Conscriptu 7 Pres. subj. * uf, with subj. 



66 Latin Composition. 



Lesson 25. 

Relations of Time. 

i. Learn § 62, with 2. a, b, and Remark 2 ; c, d, 
e (use of Temporal Particles) ; § 58, 9, 10. with 
Remarks (Sequence of Tenses). 

Remark. — Whenever it becomes necessary to use the 
Subjunctive mood in a subordinate clause — as in this and 
the following Lessons — careful attention must be paid to 
the rule for the Sequence of Tenses. The learner must 
notice carefully which is the mam clause, i. e., what is the main 
'fact to be stated. This is often disguised in English by one 
or more modifying clauses ; especially Relative (who, 
which), Temporal (when), and Conditional (if). Upon 
the time of the main clause will depend the time of the 
whole. Sometimes, however, an intervening dependent verb 
may throw the time back so as to require secondary tenses 
in those which follow, though the leading verb is primary. 
Thus — 

1. Cicero is said to have gone into exile to prevent civil 

war, Cicero eoc patria excessisse dicitiir tit helium 
civile averteret. 

2. "We seem to have advanced so far that even in fulness of 

•words we are not surpassed by the Greeks, tantum 
profecisse videmur ut a Graecis ne verborwm 
quidem copia vinceremur, 

2. The English particle when and similar expres- 
sions of time are rendered in Latin by two different 
constructions : — a. ubi, postquam, and similar parti- 
cles (see 2. a) with the Indicative, usually the perfect ; 
b. cum, generally with the Indicative of the present 
or perfect, and with the Subjunctive of the imperfect 
or pluperfect (2. b : see examples in Grammar). 



Relations of Time. 67 

Remark. — The distinction between these two constructions 
is not at first obvious ; but will become clearer by considering the 
distinction of Absolute and Relative time (see Note on page 177 
of the Grammar), and by careful observation of the practice of 
Latin writers. 

a. If when is equivalent to whenever, the Indicative is 
always to be used : as, 

When midsummer had begun, he used to make his quarters 
at Syracuse, cum aestas summa esse jam coeperat 9 
Syracusis stativa faciebat. 

b. The common English form of narrative, " Such and such 
things had happened (were happening), when," &c, is always to 
be rendered with the Indicative in Latin — usually with cum: as, 

1. This he had said when news was brought, dixerat hoc 

cum nuntiatum est. 

2. I was just reading your letters, when one was brought 

me, legebam tuas episiolas, cum fnihi epistola 
adfertur. 

c. If when or while approaches in meaning to since (as it 
often does in fact), it is expressed by cum with the subjunctive ; 
sometimes by other constructions (see Lesson 22) : as, 

But if you do not yet quite see — when the thing itself 
is plain by so many clear proofs and tokens, quod 
si nondum satis cemitis — cum res ipsa tot tarn 
Claris argumentis signisque luceat. 

Exercise 24. 

I. Hamilcar had poured the libation on the victim, 
which was duly offered on the altar ; when on-a-sud- 
den he desired 1 all the others to 3 step aside to a little 
distance v [and then] called his son Hannibal. Hanni- 
bal, a boy of nine years old, went up to his father, 
and Hamilcar asked him kindly whether 2 he would 
like 2 to go with him to the war. When the boy 
eagerly caught at the offer and with a child's earnest- 
ness implored his father to 3 take him, Hamilcar took 

1 Participle. 2 velletne. 3 «/, with subj. 



68 Latin Composition. 

him by the hand and led him up to the altar; and 
bade him, if he wished l to follow his father, to lay 
his hand on the altar, and swear that he would never 
be the friend of the Romans. Hannibal swore, and 
never to his latest hour forgot his vow. 

2. When 2 Archias came to the door of the temple 
with his satellites, he found Demosthenes seated. He 
first addressed him in [language of] friendly persuasion, 
and offered to intercede with Antipater in his behalf. 
Demosthenes, having listened for-a-time in silence to 
his bland professions, at length replied, w Archias, you 
never won me by your acting, nor will you now by 
your promises. " When the player found that he was 
detected, he threw away the mask and threatened 
in earnest. w Now," 3 said Demosthenes, "you speak 
from the Macedonian tripod : before you were only 
acting. Wait a littlg till I have written 4 a letter to my 
friends at home." And he took a roll as if to write ; 
and, as was his wont when he was engaged in com- 
position, put the end of the reed to his mouth, and bit 
it ; he then covered his head with his robe and bowed 
his head. 

3. When he had remained some time in this atti- 
tude, the barbarians, thinking that he was lingering 
through fear, began to taunt him with cowardice ; and 
Archias, going up, urged 5 him to rise, and repeated 
his offers of mediation. Demosthenes now 6 felt the 
poison in his veins : he uncovered his face, and fixing 
his eyes on the dissembler said, "It is time for you, 
Archias, to finish the part of Creon, and cast my body 
to the dogs. I quit thy sanctuary, Poseidon, still 

1 si vellet. 2 ubi. 3 nunc. 4 Future perfect. 

5 peter e ab eo ut. 6 jam. 



Purpose and Result. 69 

breathing ; though * Antipater and the Macedonians 
have not spared even this from pollution." So say- 
ing, he moved with-faltering-step towards the door ; 
but had scarcely passed the altar, when he fell with 
a groan, and breathed his last. 

1 cum, with subj. 



Lesson 26. 

Purpose and Result. 

i. Read carefully § 69, comparing the references. 

Remark. — a. In general, Relative or other subordinate 
clauses are used in Latin nearly as in English. But in Latin 
the Subjunctive mood is used in many such clauses, where 
English uses the Indicative. It will be seen, therefore, that not 
every relative or other subordinate clause is to be translated 
by the Latin subjunctive ; nor, on the other hand, is every 
English indicative in such clauses to be rendered by the 
indicative. The learner must, accordingly, accustom himself 
to notice the true (logical) relation between the subordinate 
and the main clause ; and express the former according to the 
Latin idiom, which will appear in the subsequent Lessons. 

b. When a relative clause (including those introduced by 
relative adverbs and conjunctions) simply states a fact or 
circumstance which might be put as an independent statement, 
there is no occasion for the subjunctive in Latin. But in 
most cases, where there is a logical relation between the two 
clauses, so that the force of the relative clause would be lost by 
taking it out of its connection with the former, the subjunc- 
tive is required in Latin. 

N. B. Clauses expressing cause — introduced in English by 
because, since, inasimich as — take the subjunctive only in special 
idiomatic uses (see § 63). 



70 Latin Composition. 

c. The most common uses of the subjunctive in clauses of 
the kind above referred to are to express purpose — in order 
that, that, to, in order to, and the like ; or result — so that, 
that, so as to. 

2. Learn § 64, i. with a, 2 (clauses of Purpose) ; 
§ 65, i. with a, b (clauses of Result) ; 2. with #, e,f 
(clauses of Characteristic). 

3. In English, relations of purpose and result* are 
often expressed by the Infinitive, which must never be 
used in this way in Latin. 

a. The most general way of expressing Purpose is by ut 
(negatively ne), unless the purpose is closely connected with some 
one word, in which case the relative is more common. Thus — 

1. Arria gave her husband a sword in order that he might 

kill himself, Arria gladium dedit marito ut se 
interftceret. 

2. Arria gave her husband a sword to kill himself with, 

Arria gladium dedit marito quo se interftceret. 

b. The Gerundive constructions of Purpose are usually limited 
to short concise expressions, where the literal translation of the 
phrase, though not the English idiom, is nevertheless not harsh 
or strange. 

c. The Supine in this construction is used only with verbs of 
motion and a few idiomatic expressions (see § 74, 1). The Future 
Participle of Purpose should be avoided. 

d. A kind of purpose is expressed idiomatically by the Gerun- 
dive used passively after particular verbs (see § 72, 5. c). 

e. In the greater number of cases Result is expressed by ut 
(negatively ut non), the relative being less common (compare 
examples in § 65, 1). 

/• The use of the Subjunctive in clauses of Characteristic 
(see § 65, 2) can only be learned by practice and comparison of 
examples. But compare what is said above of Relative clauses in 
general. 

g. Expressions such as " He is too honest to deceive," " It is 
too distant to be seen," and the like, which are very common in 



Purpose and Result. 71 

English, are in Latin to be rendered by a clause of Result with 
quam ut following a Comparative: as, 

Caesar was too merciful to punish his adversaries, clemen- 
tior erat Caesar quam, ut inimicos puniret* 

Exercise 25. 

i. On the reedy margin of the lake stood here and 
there some monuments ; tombs, it was said, 1 of ancient 
Assyrian kings. As the royal galley, which Alex- 
ander steered himself, passed near one of them, 2 a 
sudden gust of wind carried away his cap into the 
water, and lodged 7 the light diadem which circled it 
on one of the reeds which grew out of the tomb. One 
of the soldiers immediately swam out to recover it ; 2 
and, to keep it dry, placed it on his own head. Alex- 
ander rewarded him with a talent ; but at the same time 
ordered him to be flogged for the thoughtlessness with 
which he had assumed 3 the ensign of royalty. The 
diviners, it is said, took the matter more seriously, and 
advised the king to 4 inflict death on the offender, 5 in 
order to avert the omen. 

2. Socrates recommends to Alcibiades, in order 
that he might have a model for his devotions, a short 
prayer which a Greek poet composed for the use of 
his friend in-the-following-words : 6 " O Jupiter ! give 
us those things which are good for us, whether they 
are such things as we pray for or such things as we 
do not pray for ; and remove from us those things 
which are hurtful, though they are such things as we 
pray for." 

3. Polybius also learned the Roman tongue, and 
attained to that knowledge of their laws, their rights, 
their customs and antiquities, that few of their own 

1 dicebant. 2 Relative. 3 Subjunctive. 

4 ut, with subj. 5 homo, 6 ita. 7 demitto* 



72 Latin Composition. 

citizens understood them better. So that he taught 
the noblemen of Rome their own municipal laws ; and 
was accounted more skilful in them than Fabius 
Pictor, a man of the senatorial order, who wrote the 
transactions of the Punic wars. He who neglected 
none of the laws of history was so careful of truth 
that he made it his whole business to deliver nothing 
to posterity which might deceive them ; and by that 
diligence and exactness may be known to be studious 
of truth and a lover of it. 

4. The Pompeians were too much dispirited to 
make any resistance. Shivered once more* at the 
first onset, they poured in broken masses over hill and 
plain. But Csesar was not yet satisfied. Allowing 
a part of his troops only to return to the camp, he led 
four legions in hot pursuit by a shorter and better 
road, and drew them up at a distance of six miles 
from the field of battle. 

1 qua diligentia ac cura. 

Lesson 27. 

Conditional Sentences. 

Read carefully §§ 59, 60, 61, including all the sub- 
sections, and committing to memory the types of con- 
ditional expressions on page 167. 

a. The learner should notice carefully the precise nature of the 
condition which he wishes to render into Latin, because the use of 
the tenses in English is not uniform. Thus, — " If he is alive 
now" is a present condition, to be expressed in Latin by the 
Present Indicative ; " If he is alive next year M is a future condi- 
tion, and would be expressed by the Future Indicative. " If he 
were here now " is a present condition contrary to fact, and would 
be expressed by the Imperfect Subjunctive ; " If he were to see 
me thus " is a future condition, to be expressed by the Present 
Subjunctive. 



Conditional Sentences. , 73 

&. In cases where the Condition is omitted, it must be mentally 
supplied in order to determine the form of the condition. 

c. The conditional phrases of Comparison, as if, as though, 
require in Latin the present and perfect subjunctive, not the im- 
perfect and pluperfect, as in English (see Remark under § 61, 1). 

d. For the Concessive expressions, although, granting that, 
even if. which require idiomatic constructions in Latin, see § 61, 2. 
For Provisos — provided that, only let, &c. — see § 61, 3. 

Exercise 26. 

1. Among the savages, to display undaunted forti- 
tude in torments is the noblest triumph of a warrior. 
To avoid the trial by a voluntary death is deemed 
infamous and cowardly. If any one betrays symptoms 
of timidity, they often despatch him at once with con- 
tempt, as unworthy of-being-treated 1 like a man. 

2. If we see a friend in distress, and give him all 
the consolation we are able, we perform the duties of 
friendship, which pays more attention to the disposi- 
tion of the heart than to the value of the gift. A 
small present may be the testimony of a great love. 
There is no good I do not wish you, and this is all I 
can offer toward it. I wish this little treatise may be 
of use to you. If it should not answer my hopes, 
I shall, however, be secure of pardon from your 
friendship. 

3. I am come to inform 2 you of a secret you must 
impart to Pausanias alone. From remote antiquity, I 
am of Grecian lineage. I am solicitous for the safety 
of Greece. Long since, but for the auguries, would 
Mardonius have given battle. Regarding these no 
longer, he will attack you early in the morning. Be 
prepared. If he change his purpose, remain as you 
are. He has provisions only for a few days more. 

1 See § 65, 2. /. 2 See § 53, 10. a. 



74 Lathi Cojnfosition. 

Should the event of the war prove favorable, you will 
but deem it fitting to make some effort for the inde- 
pendence of one who exposes himself to so great 
peril for the purpose of apprising you of the intentions 
of the foe. I am Alexander of Macedon. 

4. After a short interval, Charles, turning to Philip, 
who stood awaiting his commands, thus addressed 
him : w If the vast possessions which are now bestowed 
on you had come by inheritance, there would be 
abundant cause for gratitude- How much more, 
when they come as a free gift in the life-time of your 
father! But however large the debt, 1 1 shall consider 
it all repaid if yoii only discharge your duty to your 
subjects. So rule over them that men shall commend 
and not censure me for the part I am now acting." 

5. We are here as in a theatre, where every one 
has a part allotted to him. The great duty which lies 
upon a man is to act his part in perfection. We may 2 
indeed say that our part does not suit us, and that we 
could act another better. But this is not our business. 
All that we are concerned in is to excel in the 3 part 
which is given us. If it be an improper one, the 
fault is not in us, but in Him who has cast our several 
parts, and is the great disposer of the drama. 

1 beneficiutn. 2 fiossumus. s Plural. 



Lesson 28. 

Substantive Clauses. 

i. Read carefully § 70, with Remark; 1, 2, 3. 
with a, &, c, d, e^f (substantive clauses of Purpose) ; 
4. with #, &, c> d, g, h (clauses of Result); 5. with 



Substantive Clauses. 75 

b (clauses with quod). Compare § 57, 8. 3, c, d, and 
notice the general schedule of substantive clauses on 
page 249. 

2. In English, one action depending upon another 
is in almost any case expressed indiscriminately by 
that or by the Infinitive. In Latin the form of 
expression will depend on the meaning of the depen- 
dent words or clause. This meaning can usually be 
determined by the following Rules : — 

a. If the words can be put in an independent form as the 
words of some person in the Indicative, it is Indirect Discourse, 
and requires the Accusative with the Infinitive (see examples 
in § 70, 2). 

b. If they can be put in an independent form as a Question, 
they require the Subjunctive as Indirect Questions (see examples 
in § 67, 2). 

c. If they can be put in an independent form as the words of 
some person in the Imperative, or can be conceived as a Result, 
they require the Subjunctive. The Infinitive is used in many 
expressions of this class, either optionally or exclusively (see 
examples in § 70, 3, 4). 

d. If they could be expressed independently in the Indicative, 
but as a fact, and not as 4he words of some other person, they 
regularly require quod with the Indicative (see examples in 
§ 70, s). 

e. An English noun must often be rendered by a substantive 
clause, on account of the scarcity of abstract terms in Latin, or 
the want of a corresponding idiom. Thus — 

1. He was accused of treason against his country, accusa- 

ttis est quod patriam, prodidisset. 

2. A value beyond all estimation, pretiwm majus quam 

tit aestimetur. 

f. In English a real substantive clause is often introduced by 
the common expression FOR with the Infinitive ; and is usually 
rendered in Latin by the Accusative and Infinitive : ut with the 
subjunctive is more rare. The meaning of the particular ex- 
pression must be carefully noticed. Thus — 



76 Latin Composition. 

1. For a dying father to bequeath an empire to his son is a 

deed -worthy of gratitude, patrem morientem fllio 
imperium legare factxun est gratia dignum. 

2. The next thing is for me to speak of the war against the 

pirates, reliquxim est ut de bello dicam piratico. 

Note. — The forms of Indirect Discourse were developed in 
Latin into a very complex system, which, for the sake of fuller 
practice, will be exhibited in the two succeeding Lessons. 

Exercise 27. 

1. But before Caesar allowed his tired soldiers to 
enjoy the fruits of the victory of Pharsalia he required 
them to complete the conquest The pursuit was con- 
tinued during the remainder of the day and on the 
morrow. But the task was easy. 1 The clemency of 
the conqueror induced all to submit. When Caesar 
entered the camp, and saw the dead bodies of many 
Romans lying about, he exclaimed, "They would 
have it so. To have laid down our arms would have 
sealed our doom." 

2. The soldiers of Viriathus recognized their general 
simply by his tall figure, and by his striking sallies 
of wit, and above all by the fact that he surpassed 
every one of his men in temperance as well as in 
toil. 

3. The sailors were willing to do as he wished. 

But they were afraid that the vessel could not stand 

the beating of the waves, and as Marius also was 

much troubled with sickness, they made for land. 

They wandered about without any definite object, 

seeking merely to escape from the present evil as 

worst of all, and putting their hopes on the chances 

of fortune. For the land was their enemy, and the 

sea also ; and they feared 2 to fall in with men, and 

1 Lit. " not difficult." 
2 Notice construction of verbs of fearing (§ 70, $.fj 57, 8. c). 



Intermediate Clauses. 77 

feared also not to fall in with men, because they were 
in want of provisions. After some time they met 
with a few herdsmen, who had nothing to give them 
in their need. But they recognized Marius, and ad- 
vised him to get out of the way as quick as he could. 1 

4. Griselda, it is now time for you to reap the fruit 
of your long patience ; and that they who have re- 
ported me to be cruel, unjust, and a monster in 
nature, 2 should know that what I have done has been 
all along with a view to teach )'ou how to behave as a 
wife, and lastly to secure my own ease and quiet as 
long as we live 3 together, which I feared might have 
been endangered by my marriage. Therefore I had 
a mind * to prove you by harsh and injurious treat- 
ment ; and not being aware that you have ever trans- 
gressed my will, either in word or deed, I now seem 
to have met with that happiness I desired. I intend 
then to restore in an hour what I have taken aw r ay 
from you in many ; and to make you the sweetest 
recompense for the many bitter pangs I have caused 
you to suffer. 

1 Subjunctive. 2 ingenio. 3 Subjunctive. 

4 mihi propositu?n habni. 

Lesson 29. 

Intermediate Clauses. 

Learn § 6S, with 1. a, b, e, d, and 2 (Intermediate 
clauses). Compare § 67, I. and b (Subordinate 
clauses in Indirect Discourse). 

Remark. — Besides the constructions of dependent clauses 
already mentioned (which for the most part are suggested by 
some particle or some construction in English), another is 
found in Latin, which has no English equivalent whatever : 
namely, that of a clause subordinate to another which is itself 



78 Latin Composition. 

subordinate. This is especially to be observed when any one 
of the Infinitive and Subjunctive expressions which have 
been treated under the head of substantive clauses — itself 
the subject or object of some leading verb — has another 
clause depending on it. In this case, the verb of the latter 
is almost invariably in the subjunctive. But, in applying 
the rule, the following conditions must be observed : — 

a. When a subordinate clause depends on an infinitive or 
subjunctive, so that it becomes logically a part of the same expres- 
sion, its verb must regularly be in the Subjunctive (see examples 
in § 66, 2). 

N. B. This rule does not apply to the case of a simple relative 
clause following a complementary infinitive, which will generally 
come under the following head. 

b. If the subordinate clause is inserted for mere definition or 
explanation — so that it may be regarded as true independently of 
the comiection in which it stands — its verb will be in the Indica- 
tive (see examples under § 67, i. b). 

c. When a clause, though not depending on an infinitive or 
subjunctive, is represented as containing the words or thought 
of any other person than the writer or speaker, so that it be- 
comes informal indirect discourse, the verb must be in the 
Subjunctive (see examples under § 66, i). 

Note. — This construction is especially common in clauses 
expressing a reason or motive, which otherwise do not take the 
subjunctive. 

d. A subordinate clause in a Conditional sentence will have 
the mood and tense of the principal verb. 

Exercise 28. 

i. Sulla, encouraging his soldiers, who were 35,000 
men well armed, led them to Rome. The soldiers 
fell on the tribunes whom Marius had sent and mur- 
dered them. Marius also put to death many friends 
of Sulla in Rome, and proclaimed freedom to the 
slaves if they would join 1 him. But it is said that 
only three slaves accepted the offer. 
1 See c, above. 



Intermediate Clauses. 79 

2. The next day Marius, compelled by hunger, and 
wishing to make use of his remaining strength before 
he was 1 completely exhausted, went along the shore, 
encouraging his followers, and entreating them not to 
abandon the last hope, for which he reserved 2 himself 
on the faith of an old prediction. For when he was 
quite a youth, and living in the country, he caught in 
his garment an eagle's nest as it was falling down, 3 
w r ith seven young ones [in it] ; which his parents won- 
dering at, consulted the soothsayers, who told them 
that their son would become the most illustrious of men, 
and that it was [the will of] fate that he should receive 
the supreme command and magistracy seven times. 

3. His attendants advised him to wait until he had 
made preparations of men and money. To which he 
only returned, "They that love me will follow me." 
In a few days he drove the enemy from before the 
city, and took the count prisoner; who, raging at his 
defeat and calamity, exclaimed, "that this blow was 
from fortune ; but valor could make reprisals, as he 
should show, if he ever regained his liberty." 

4. When with infinite toil they had climbed up the 
greater part of that steep ascent, Balboa commanded 
his men to halt, [and] advanced alone to the summit, 
that he might be the first who should enjoy a spec- 
tacle which he had so long desired. 4 As soon as he 
beheld the South Sea stretching in endless prospect 
below him, he fell on his knees, and, lifting up his 
hands to heaven, returned thanks to God, who had 
conducted 5 him to a discovery so beneficial to his 
country and so honorable to himself. 

1 See a, above. 2 See 3, above. 3 ad terratn. 

4 See c, above. 5 See 5, above. 



8o Latin Composition. 



Lesson 30. 

Indirect Discourse. 

Read attentively § 67, throughout (Indirect Dis- 
course), noticing carefully the Remark on page 187. 

Remark. — 1. The Indirect Discourse in Latin corre- 
sponds to the common reporting of speeches, &c, in the 
newspapers and elsewhere, in which the pronouns and the 
tenses of the verb are changed, and the whole quotation is 
usually introduced by that, following a verb of saying, &c. 
This form of discourse is much more common and highly 
developed in Latin than in English, and may often be used 
in rendering the English direct narrative or quotation. 
Many difficulties and obscurities are avoided in Latin by the 
use of the reflexive pronoun, to refer to the speaker, and of 
the Indicative and Subjunctive moods as given in § 67, 1. 
The rule defining the employment of these moods is as 
follows : — 

a. The main clauses (statements) have their verbs in the 
Infinitive with the subject in the Accusative, as substantive 
clauses dependent on the verb of saying, &c. (see § 70, 2). 

5. Dependent clauses, introduced by relatives, relative or con- 
ditional particles, and the like, have their verbs in the Subjunctive, 

as INTERMEDIATE CLAUSES (see § 66, i). 

c. Imperative forms of speech take the Subjunctive. 
N. B. For special indirect forms see § 67, i. c, d. 

d. The Subject of the verb must regularly be expressed in 
indirect discourse, though a pronoun omitted in the direct. Refer- 
ences to the speaker must be made by the reflexives se and suus. 

e. Repetitions of some verb of saying, &c., which are common 
in English for the sake of keeping up the form of indirect dis- 
course, should be omitted in Latin. 

/. Particular attention should be given in translating the apo- 
dosis contrary to fact, which is done by the future participle with 
fuisse (see examples in § 67, i. c). 



Indirect Diseourse. 81 

g. Sequence of Tenses is very often violated in indirect dis- 
course for the sake of greater vividness, by the use of primary 
instead of secondary tenses, -*- but never in a narrative clause 
with cum. 

2. An Indirect Question includes all the cases where an 
interrogative clause, or one introduced by an interrogative 
word {who ? where ? whether, and the like) is made the sub- 
ject or object of a verb or of some equivalent phrase. As 
most interrogatives, both in English and Latin, have the 
same form with the relatives, care must be taken to distin- 
guish them by noticing whether there is an Antecedent, 
expressed or implied, which is the distinguishing mark of the 
Relative. 

N. B. For other interrogative forms see § 71. 

Exercise 29. 

1. When I came to the foot of the hill, I met with 
a very aged man, who asked me what I was and 
whither bound N I told him that I was a pilgrim going 
to the celestial city. Then said the old man, " Thou 
lookest like an honest fellow. Wilt thou be content to 
dwell with me for the wages that I shall give thee? " 
Then I asked him his name, and where he dw r elt. 
He said his name was Adam the first, and that he 
dwelt in the town of Deceit. I asked him then what 
was his work, and what the wages that he would give. 
He told me that his work was many delights, and his 
wages, that I should be his heir at last. 

2. His resolution was immediately formed. He 
rose and called together the officers of Proxenus, and 
addressed them. After 1 haying pointed out the mag- 
nitude of the evils which they had to apprehend, 
unless some provision were made without delay for 
their defence, he dexterously turned their attention to 

1 cittn. 



82 Latin Com-position* 

a more animating view of the situation. "Ever since 
they had concluded the treaty with Tissaphernes, he 
had observed with envy and regret the rich posses- 
sions of the barbarians, and had lamented that his 
comrades had bound themselves to abstain from the 
good things which they saw within their reach, except 1 
so far as they were able to purchase a taste 2 of them 
at an 3 expense which he had feared would soon 
exhaust their scanty means." 

3. I fancy, Cephalus, that people do not generally 
acquiesce in these views of yours, because they think 
that it is not your character but your great wealth that 
enables you to bear with old age. For the rich, it 
is said, have many consolations. " True," he said, 
" they will not believe me ; and they are partly right, 
though not so right as they suppose. There is great 
truth in the reply of Themistocles to the Seriphian, 
who tauntingly-told -him 5 that his reputation was due 
not to himself but to his country. c I should not have 
become famous if I had been a native of Seriphus, 
neither would you if [you had been] an Athenian.'" 

4. I will tell you [a tale of] what happened once to 
a brave man, Er, son of Armenius, a native of Pam- 
phylia. His story was, 4 that when the soul had gone 
out of him, it travelled in company with many others, 
till they came to a mysterious place, in which were 
two gaps adjoining one another in the earth, and 
exactly opposite them two gaps above in the heaven. 
Between these gaps sat judges, who, after passing 
sentence, commanded the just to take the road to the 
right, upwards through the heaven ; while the unjust 
were ordered to take the ro^d downwards, to the left. 

1 praeterquam quae. 2 pauca. 3 tantus. 

4 dico. 6 exprobare. 



Certain Special Constructions. 83 



Lesson 31. 

Certain Special Constructions. 

i. Read carefully §§ 70, 4. c> and 57, 8. ^(Ex- 
clamatory clauses) ; 70, 4. d (" so far from " &c.) ; 70, 
4. £, comparing 58, 11. /" (facere ut) ; 70, 4. g, and 
65, 1. #, b (quin, quominus) ; 72, 3. b (Participle 
with habeo) ; 64, 1. b 9 with Remark (disguised Pur- 
pose) ; 71, 2. with a, b, d (Double Questions) ; 59, 
3. d, e, f ; 4. d ; 60, 2. c (Indicative in conditions 
for Subjunctive). 

2. Some constructions which belong logically under 
the preceding heads have special idiomatic uses in 
Latin. Such are the following : — 

a. The English exclamations, "The idea that!" "To think 
that ! " " That ! " and the like, referring to something which has 
actually happened, are expressed by the Accusative and Infinitive, 
usually with the enclitic ne. When referring to something antici- 
pated or to a 7nere idea, by ut with the subjunctive, usually also 
with -ne : as, 

1. To think that you should have fallen into such grief for 

me ! te in tantas aerumnas propter me incidisse I 

2. "What! I interrupt you? eg one ut te interpellem? 

o. English expressions, like " Far from," or " So far from," 
with a following clause, are rendered in Latin by tantum abest, 
followed by two clauses with ut. The former clause is always the 
subject of abest, which has not a personal subject, as in English ; 
the latter clause is always one of Result, not an independent 
clause, as it often is in English (see examples in Grammar). 

c. Such phrases as " To allow one's self to," " manage to," 
" act in any way in doing a thing," are expressed in Latin by 
facere or committere, with an ut-clause as object. So also where 
verbs want the future infinitive, fore (futurum esse) ut is used. 



84 Latin Composition* 

d. Expressions implying Hindrance, usually (but not always) 
followed in English by from with the participial noun, take in 
Latin a subjunctive clause with quominus (rarely ne). If the 
hindering is negatived, quin may be used instead. The same 
construction is used in Latin with verbs of refusing. Expressions 
like " Not to doubt that (but that) " are regularly followed by 
quin. The accusative with infinitive is to be avoided. " To doubt 
whether," introduces an Indirect Question, and is so to be treated. 
" To hesitate " is expressed by the same verb (dubito), but with 
a different construction — the simple Infinitive. 

e. The English have, with a participle, is sometimes a mere 
auxiliary, corresponding to the Perfect in Latin. Sometimes, 
however, it retains a slight notion oi possession, and is then to be 
translated literally, with habeo or teneo. Thus — 

1. I have guarded the prisoners, captivos custodii. But — 

2. I have the prisoners guarded (under guard), captivos 

habeo custoditos. 

f. Parenthetical expressions, like " To be brief," " To say no 
more," " So to speak," are really expressions of Purpose, and are 
to be so treated in Latin : as, 

Not to be tedious, the enemy were beaten and put to flight, 
ne longus sini, hostes pulsi et fugati sunt* 

N. B. As this expression is elliptical, the sequence of tenses 
is disregarded. 

g. For the treatment of Double or Alternative Questions, con- 
sult the forms in the Grammar (§ 71, 2). 

h. In stating the propriety, possibility, and the like, of a future 
action, or one that has not been performed at all, Latin employs 
the Indicative, expressing it (as it were) as a general truth, where 
English uses the Potential, treating it as a particular case. For 
example — 

1. It would be tedious to follow up the matter, longum, est 

rem persequi. 

2. It -would befit us to mourn (but we do not), nos decehat 

lugere, 

3. How much better would it have been! Quanto melius 

fuerat ! 



Certain Special Constructions. 85 



Exercise 30. 

I. I do not doubt that you fully agree with me 
regarding the motives and the consequences of 
Caesar's murder. I, for my part, cannot avoid feeling 
both sorrow and indignation, whether 1 I consider the 
victim or l the assassins in that great crime. What- 
ever may have been the ambitions or the vices of his 
earlier public or private life, they cannot prevent us 
from regarding his death at this time as the most 
serious calamity to the Roman people, or from con- 
demning and execrating the infamous conspiracy that 
slew him. Not to speak of the glory and empire 
won to Rome by his victories, he was the first con- 
queror in civil war who refused to make it an occasion 
of massacre and revenge. Far from following the 
example of violence which the partisans of Pompey 
had threatened, he had 2 disciplined and controlled 
his forces, so as effectually to check the fury of 
slaughter or the lust of plunder. At least, his mercy 
to his enemies, after the victory at Pharsalia, should 
have 3 forbidden all thoughts of private resentment. 
[To think] that Marcus Brutus, whom he not only 
had spared on the field of battle and in the hostile 
camp, but even called his son, should strike the dead- 
liest blow against him ! that Cicero, who had so 
lately extolled with fulsome praise 4 his pardon 5 of 
Marcellus, should with yet greater fervor have gloried 
in the manner of his death ! Was it the hope of real 
liberty, or was it jealousy of his more vigorous genius 
and more dazzling glory ? 

1 sive. 2 habeo, 3 debuerat. 

4 efftisis laudibus efferre. 5 Clause with quod. 



86 Latin Composition. 

2. But the death of Caesar could not cause * true 
and lasting freedom to exist in a city which had 
beheld the murder of Gracchus, the massacres of 
Marius, the proscriptions of Sulla, the profligacy of 
Catiline, the violence of Clodius ! The wicked act 2 
of his enemies did not hinder Rome from becoming 
subject to the tyranny of a Caesar ; it did prevent it 
from enjoying a firm peace and an enlightened rule 
under the ancient forms of the commonwealth. It 
kindled again the fury of civil war. It destroyed the 
remnant of those ancient families and the authority of 
the Senate, which had made the glory of R6me. It 
extinguished the freedom of debate, and all confidence 
among men. It committed the destiny of the Repub- 
lic to the hands of Mark Antony and Octavianus. 
It removed the mighty Julius, to prepare the way for 
Tiberius, Caligula, and Nero. 

1 Lit. " bring it to pass that," &c. * f acinus. 



VOCABULARY. 



Note. — In using this Vocabulary, it should be borne in mind that the Latin terms 
here given are not in all cases the best or even the ordinary equivalent of the English 
words, but such as appear to be best suited to the passages where these occur. They 
need not, therefore, prevent the use of such other terms as may be preferred. In select- 
ing the right word, where several are given, it will often be necessary to consult the Latin 
lexicon. For numerals, reference should be had to the Grammar. Where numbers 
occur, they may be written in Roman numerals, but should always be read in full, as 
Latin words. 

The small figures mark the conjugations of the verbs. In general, the gender only 
of the less usual forms of nouns is given, and in verbs only those principal parts which 
are required. Adjectives in us, when not otherwise marked, are to be declined like bonus. 



A. 

A, an, usually omitted ; a cer- 
tain, quida?n (p. 18). 

abandon, relinquo, amitto (Jose). 

abide, maneo? mansi. 

abode, to make, habito?- [circa. 

about (here and there), passim; 

above, supra (ace), insuper ; 
above all, maxime. 

abroad, to get, emano. 1 

abstain, temper of se abstinere. 

abundance, abundantia, ae. 

abundant, satis (with gen.). 

abuse (v.), abutorf usus. 

academy, academia, ae. 

accept, accipio* cepi. 

accompany, comitor. 1 

account (v.), habeo? exist imo. 1 

account, on — of, ob, propter 
(ace.) ; it is of — , interest (see 
§ 50, 4. d). (See p. 29). 



accuse, accuso. 1 

accustomed, to be, soleo? solitus. 

achieve, gerof gessi. 

acquiesce, consentiorf sensus. 

Acron, Acron, onis. 

across, trans (ace). 

act (n.), factum , J -acinus, oris. 

act as, se gerere; — a part, par- 
tes agere, tueri. 

acting, actio in scena. 

actor, actor, oris ; histrio. 

Adam, Adarnus, u 

add, addo. z 

addition of territory, fines pro- 
?noti <i propagati. 

adj oining, conjunctus, proxim its. 

address, adloquor* appello. 1 

admire, miror} 

advance, progredior? gressus. 

advantage, utilitas, at is; I have 
the — of, me adjuvat quod. 

advise, hortorf moneo} 



88 



Latin Composition. 



affair, res, rei (f.). 

affection, amorj affections, animi. 

afflicted, adflictus. 

afraid, to be, timeo, 2 ui. 

after, posts conj. post quant. 

afterwards, postea. 

again, iterum, rursus, postea. 

against, contra, adversus (ace). 

Agamemnon, Agamemnon, 

onis, ace. ona. 
age, aetas, atis (f.). 
aged, confectus (provecius) ae- 

tate, longaevus. 
agitate, commoveo? movi. 
ago, abhinc. 

agree, adsentior* (dat.). 
agreeable, gratus, a, urn. 
aid, auxilium, i. 
air (music), cantus, us. 
alarm, terreo, 2 ui. 
alarmed, territus (abl.), sollici- 

tusj — for, metuens (dat.). 
alas, vae! 

Alcibiades, Alcibiades, is. 
all, omnis, e (whole), totus, solus 

(gen. ius). 
all in a body, universi. 
allied, conjunctus. 
allot, tribuo, z ui, utum. 
allow, potestatem dare (dat.). 
ally, socius, i. 
almost, fere, paene. 
along, praeter. — alone, solus. 
along with, una cum. 
already, jam. 
also, qtioque. 
altar, ara, ae. 
although, quanquam. 
altogether, o?nnino. 
always, semper. 
ambassador, legatus, i. 



ambition, ambitio, onis ; cupid- 

itas, atis (¥.). 
ambitious, ambiiiosus. 
among, inter (ace.) ; sometimes 

expressed by dat. ; apud. 
ancestor, proavus, i, auctor 

generis ; pi., majores, um. 
ancient, antiquus, vetus, eris. 
and, et, -que (enclitic), atque. 
anger, ira (visit with, persequi). 
animal (wild), /era, ae (f.) ; the 

lower animals, bestiae. 
animating, laetus. 
answer, respondeo, 2 di, sum. 
annual, annnus, sollemnis. 
Antipater, Antipater, tri. 
antiquities, ahtiquitas, atis (f.). 
anxiety, sollicitudo, inis (f.). 
anxious, sollicitus. 
any, ullus, ullo modo; — one, 

quisquam, quivis(p. 18) ; does 

any ? num quis f 
Apennines, Apennimis (sc. 

mons), i (m.). 
apparel, vestitus, us j in funeral 

— , sordide vestitus. 
appear, appareo 2 ui; videor 2 
appease, lenio, A placo. 1 
apply (for aid), se co7tferre,peto. 
apprehend, metuo? 
apprise, doceo. 2 
appoint, praeficio (ace, dat.). 
appointed (to head), praefec- 

tus datus. 
approach (n.), adventus, us. 
approval, gratia, ae. 
arbitration, arbitrium, i. 
arbitrator, arbiter, tri. 
archbishop, archiepiscopus, i. 
arduous, arduus. 
Argos, Argi, orum. 



Vocabulary. 



8 9 



aristocracy,'' nobilitas, atis. 

arm (v.), armo. 1 

armed, armatus. 

arms (weapons), arma, orum. 

army, exercitus, us. 

arrival, advent us, us. 

arriv e, p erven io, 4 adven io. 4 

arrogance, arrogantia, ae. 

arrow, sagitta, ae. 

art, ars, tis (f.). 

artificial, artificiosus. 

artisan, op if ex, icis. 

Aruns, A runs, Aruntis. 

as, ut; (when), cum. 

as . . as, ta?n . . quam. 

as if, as it were, ta7iquam. 
ascent, ascensus, us. 
ashamed, to be, pudere (impers. 

§ 50, 4. c). 
aside, se- (verb-prefix). 
ask, rogo, 1 quaero, peto (ab). 
assassin, sicarius, i. 
assassinate, interficio? occido? 
assistance, auxilium, i. 
assume, sumo, 3 adrogo. 1 
assumed, simulatus. 
Assyrian, Assyrius. 
at, with name of town, locative ; 
near (not in), apud, ad; as 
cause (as " alarmed at "), abl. ; 
at all, omnino; at once, statim. 
Athenian, Atheniensis, e. 
Athens, Athenae, arum. 
attached to, conjwictus cum. 
attack, aggredior? oppugno} 
attain, adsequor? 
attempt (v.), conor. 1 
attempt (n.), conatus, us (m.). 
attend, comitor ; ■ to — the ses- 
sion of the Senate, in Sena- 
turn ire. 



attendant, socius, comes. 
attention, to pay, specto y 1 to 

turn, animum revocare {ad). 
attitude, status, us. 
attractive, jucundus. 
audacious, audax, acts. 
augury, augurium. i. 
authority, auctoritas, atis (f.). 
avenge, ulciscor* ultus. 
avert, aver to, ti, sum? 
avoid, fugio, 3 fugi, evito; l I 

cannot — , nan possum nan. 
await, exspecto. 1 
awake, e somno excitare. 
aware, to be, animadvertere. 
away, to be, abesse. 
awhile, aliquamdiu. 
axe, stcuris, is (f.). 



B. 

babe, infans, tis. 

banish, pello* pepuli, pulsumj 
expello. 

bank, ripa, ae. 

bar (v.), claudo, z fi, su?n. 

barbarian, barbarus. 

barbarously, saeve. 

barren of, to be, careo? ui 
(abl.). 

battle, proelium, *(n.); pugna, 
ae (f.) ; field of battle, acies, 
ei (f.), locus ubi pugnatur. 

bay, sinus, us. 

be, sum (see paradigms of com- 
pound tense) ; to be so, ita se 
habere j — able, posse. 

beach, litus, oris (x.). 

bear, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. 

bear up, sustineo, 2 ui. 



9° 



Latin Composition. 



bear no relation to, nihil at- 

tinere ad. 

beard, barba, ae. 

beast, wild, f era, ae. 

beating, vis, vis (f.). 

beautiful, pulcher, a, um. 

beauty, species, et, forma, ae. 

because, quia. 

become, fio, fieri (or passive). 

before, ante, antehac, ante- 
quam. 

begin, incipio? cepi; coepi. 

beginning, initium, i. 

behalf, in, pro (abl.). 

behave, se gerere. 

behind, post; go behind, se- 
quor? 

behold, contueor, video, couspicio. 

believe, credo 3 (dat). 

belong, esse (with gen. or dat.) ; 
pertineo, ui (ad). 

bench, subsellium, i. 

beneath, subter, sub. 

beneficent, beneficus (use su- 
per!). 

beneficial, utilis, e. 

besides, praetor, praeterea (adv.). 

besiege, oppugno. 1 

besiegers, obsidentes. 

best, opti7nus; (adv.) optime, 
maxime ; (of two) magis. 

bestow, dono. 1 

betray, prodo* ostendo 3 (show). 

better, melior, us. 

between, inter (ace). 

bid, jubeo? jussu 

bind, obligo} 

bird, avis, is (f.). 

birth, by, natu. 

bite, 7nordeo, 2 momordi. 

bitter, acerbus. 



bitterly, vehementer. 

blame, culpa, ae. 

bland, blandus. 

blast, of music, clangor, oris 

(M.). 

blow (a blast of an instrument), 

edo? 
blow, ictus, us (m.); plaga, ae 

(f.), vulnus, eris (n.). 
boar, aper, apri. 
boast, glorior, 1 praedico 1 de. 
bodily gifts, bona corporis. 
body, corpus, oris (n.) ; of men, 

agmen, inis (n.). 
bolster-up, subvenio 4 (dat.). 
bondage, servitus, utis (f.). 
book, liber, bri (m.). 
booty, praeda, ae. 
borders, fines, ium (m.). 
born, natus ; to be — , nascor? 
both, uter que, utraque, utruni- 

que, gen. utriusquej both . . 

and, et . . et. 
bound, obligatus ; to be going 

anywhere, tendere. 
bow one's head, se inclinai'e. 
boy, puer, eri. 
brave, fortis, e. 
break, frango? fregi, fr actum. 
break up, confringo. 
breathe, exspiro ; l animam 

efflare, to breathe one's last. 
breathing, spiritum ducens. 
breeze, aura, ae. 
bribe (v.), corrumpo, 3 rupi, rup- 

tum. 
bribes (n.), dona, orum, 
bribery, ambitus, us (m.). 
bridge, pons, pontis (m.). 
bright, clarusj — distinctions ? 

praeclara. 



Vocabulary. 



9 1 



brilliant, clarus, insignis, e> 
splendidus. 

bring, adfero, irr., porto, 1 duco, 
perduco ; 8 — to an end, confi- 
cio; 3 — to pass, efficio? 

broken, fr actus, turbatus. 

brother, f rater, tn's (m.) ; — in- 
law, uxoris f rater. 

brutality, im?nanitas, atis (f.). 

brute, bestia, ae (f.). 

build, aedificoj l military works, 
roads, &c, munio. 4 

building, aedificium, i. 

bulk, magnitudo, inis (f.). 

bull, taurus, u 

burn (v.), ardeo? si. 

burst, iurumpo. 3 

business, negotium, res; make it 
one's — , opera?n ponere in. 

but, sed, autem (§ 43, 3. b), ta- 
menj but if, sin, quod si ; — 

buy, emo* [for, nisi (with verb). 

by (near), ad; (with passives) 
ab, a (abl.) ; means, ablative 
alone (see p. 28) ; by far, 
longe; be by (near), adesse. 



C. 

Cadiz, Gades, ium (f.). 

Caesar, Caesar, dris; adj., Caesa- 
rian us. 

Caenina (of), Caeninensis, e. 

calamity, calamitas, atis (f.). 

jail, appello, 1 advoco; 1 — to 
mind, commemorare ; 1 — upon 
(for opinion), sententiam ro- 
gare; — together, convoco. 

;amp, castra, orum (n.) ; of the 
camp, militaris, e. 



campaign, bellum, i. 

can, possum, posse, potui. 

candidate, to become (for con- 
sul), consulatum petere. 

cap, pileus, i (m.). 

capitol, capitolium, i. 

captain, dux, ducis. 

captivated, captus. 

capture (v.), capio? 

capture, expugnatio, onis (f.). 

care, cur a, ae, 

careful of, studiosus (gen.). 

carry, porto, 1 fero, deicio. 3 

Cartilage, Carthago, inis (f.). 

Carthaginian, Carthaginiensis. 

cast, proicio ; 3 — the parts of a 
play, distribuo. 

cast, j actus (part, of jacio). 

cat, fe lis, is. 

catch, excipio; 3 — at, capto} 

Catiline, Catilina, ae. 

Cato, Cato, onis. 

Caudine Forks, Furculae Cau~ 

dinae. 
cause to suffer, aliqua re adfi- 

cere ; efficere ut 
cause, res, rei; causa, ae; res 

(plur.). 
cavalier, eques, itis. 
cavalry, eques, itis, pi. 
celebrate, celebro} 
celestial, caelestis, e. 
censor, censor, oris ; one who 
has been — , censorius (p. 10). 
censure, reprehendo? 
chain, vinculum, i. 
chair, sella, ae (f.). {tor. 

champion, defensor, propugna- 
chance, occasio oblata; casus, 

us (m.) ; by chance, forte. 
change, muto. 1 



9 2 



Latin Corn-position . 



character, indoles ', mores (pi.)- 
charge, accusatio, crimen. 
Charles, Carolus, i. 
chariot, cur r us, us (m.). 
chase, venatio, onis (f.). 
chastise, verbero} 
check, reprimo. z 
cheer, recreo, 1 hortor} 
cherish hate, odium gerere. 
chief, dux, cisy princeps, ipis. 
chief-town, caput gentis. 
chiefly, maxime. 
child, puer, i; adj. puerilis, e. 
children, liberty young — ,pueri, 

orum, infantes. 
childless, orbus. 
chink, rima, ae. 
choose, delego? giy (of officers) 

facio 3 feciy creo. 1 
Cicero, Cicero, onis. 
circle, circulus y (v.) circa esse. 
circumstance, res, rei. 
citizen, civis, is. 
city, urbs, urbis, civitas, atis 

(f.) ; of the — , urbanus. 
civil, civ His, e. 
claim, vindico. 1 
class, ordo, inis (m.). 
claw, unguis, is (m.). 
cleft, fissus (part, of findo). 
clemency, dementia, ae. 
client, cliens, tis. 
climb, scando, 3 adscendo? 
close (v.), claudo, z si, sum. 
close to, prope (ace.) ; prope ab. 
closed, clausus. 
clothed, vestitus. 
coast, litus, oris (n.). 
coil, volvo? 
cold, algor, oris (m.). 
colleague, collega^ ae. 



college, collegium, i. 

colony, co Ionia, ae, 

come, veniof veniy — across, 
transeo, irey — forward, ex- 
sis to y 3 — in (of wind), ad- 
flare y — to, pervenio * ad, ac- 
cedo 3 ad. 

comeliness, forma, ae. 

command (v.), jubeo, 2 jussiy (in 
office), praeessey be master 
of, impero. 

command (n.), imperatum, iy 
supreme — , imperiwn, iy by 
— , jussu. 

commander, imperator, oris. 

commanding, dtix, ducis (gen.) ; 
as descriptive adj., augustus. 

commend, laudo. 1 [committo. 

commit (an act), facio, efficiof 

common (in common), commu- 
nis^ e. 

common people, plebs, is (f.). 

c ommon w ealth, res p ublica. 

communicate, impertio.* 

community, populus, i. 

companion, socius, i. 

compare, comparo. 1 

company: in — with, una cum. 

complete, ad ' finem perduco . 8 

completely, plane. 

compelled, coactus (cogo). 

compose, concipio, scribo. B 

compulsion, under, coactus. 

comrade, comes, itis. 

conceal, celo 1 (two ace), occulo. 8 

concerns, it, refert (§ 40, 4. d). 

conclude (make), facio. 

condemn, damno, 1 reprehendo} 

condition, condicio fortunae y 
fortunae, arum. 

conduct (v.), duco? deduco. 



Vocabulary. 



93 



conduct (harsh), asperitas. 
confederation, foedus, eris (n.). 
confer on, defer o ad, confero in. 
confidence, fiducia, ae, fides. 
confidence, to have — in, con- 

fido 3 (dat. or abl.). \pbsecro. 
conical, coni (gen.). — conjure, 
connect, conjungo 3 
connected, conjunctus. 
conquer, vinco, 3 vici, victum ; 

devinco. — conquest, victoria. 
conqueror, victor, oris. 
consequences, exitus, us (sing.). 
consider, existimo, 1 considero. 1 
consideration, res, rei (f.). 
consistent, to be, co7igruo 3 
consolation, solatio, co?isolatio, 

onis (f.). 
conspicuous, to be, emineo? 
conspiracy, conjuratio, onis. 
conspirator, conjuratus, i. 
conspire, conjuro. 1 
consul, consul, ulis ; (one who 

has been), consularis. 
consulship, consulatus, us (m.) ; 

in one's consulship, consul, in 

appos. with name. 
consult, consulo, 3 ui (§ 51, 2. 

consume, consumo. 3 
contempt (with), fastidiens, lis. 
contend (as with difficulty), 

labor x (abl.). 
content, contented, contentus 

(abl.) ; wilt thou be — , satin 

habes ? 
continue, persequor 3 secutus ; 

— in pursuit, hostes consec- 

tari. 
contrary to, contra (ace). 
control, moderatio, onis (f.). 



controlled, frenatus. 
convict, convinco? damno. 1 
corner, angulus, i. 
counsellor, to have, in consili- 
um adhibere. 

count (a title of rank), comes, 
it is. 

countless, inmimerabilis, e. 

country, regio, onis; terra , ae; 
(one's native), patria, aej — 
people, agrestes, iu?n, rus- 
tici, orum; in the — , ruri. 

court, aula, ae. — cover, see. 

covered, tectus (f.) coopertus; 
(here and there, as with dwell- 
ings), sparsus. 

cowardice, ignavia, ae. 

cowardly, ignavus. 

cradle, area, alveus. 

crafty, dolosus, callidus. 

crawl, serpo 3 

create, creoj * facio 3 feci j con- 
stituo. 3 

credit (v.), confido 3 

credit (n.), laus, dis (f.). 

Creon, Creon, ontis. 

crime, scelus, eris (n.). 

crisis, discrimen, inis (n.). 

cross, transire. 

crowd, comitates, us, turba, 
ae. 

crown, corona,ae; (royal power), 
imperiu7n, regnum* 

cruel, crudelis, e. 

cry, clamo j x — out, clamo, ex- 
clamo. 1 

cultivated, cultus. 

curious, memorabilis, e, 

curule, curulis, e. 

custom, mos, moris (M.), 

cynic, cynicus. 



94 



Latin Composition. 



D. 

danger, periculum, i. 
dangerous, gravis, e. 
daughter, filia, ae. 
day, dies, did (m.), (rarely F. 

in singular). 
dazzling, clarus. 
dead (slain), occisus. 
deadliest, gravissimus. 
dearly, care, carissime. 
death, mors, tis ; condemn to 

— , darnnare capitis (§ 50, 4. b), 

morte multarej put to — , in- 

terficere. 
debar, prokibeo, 2 ui, itU7n. 
debase, depravo. 1 
debate, sententias dicere. 
debt (kindness), see note, p. 74. 
deceit, fallacia, ae. 
deceive, decipio, z 
decemvir, decemvir, viri. 
decide the contest, decerto. 1 
decision, judicium, i. 
declare, nuntio, 1 adfir?no} 
dedicate, dedico} 
deed, factum, i. 
deem, puto. 1 
deeply, vehementer. 
defeat (v.), supero} 
defeat (n.), calamitas, clades. 
defend, defendo; defence, salus. 
degree (to what — ), quo. 
delay, mora, ae. 
deliberate, delibero. 1 
delight (v.), delecto} 
delight (n.), gaudium, i; delec- 

tatio, onis (f.) ; oblectamen- 

tum, i. 
deliver, libero, 1 trado. 3 
deliverer, liberator, oris. 



demand, postulo, 1 flagito?- 

Demosthenes, Demosthenes, is. 

deny, nego. x 

depose (a king), regno spolio. 1 

deprive, orbo, x - privo ; x — of 
voice, vocem eripere (dat.). 

deputation, legatio, onis (f.). 

descended, genitus (with abl). 

descend, descendo? 

descent, genus, eris (n.). 

desert (n.), deserta, orum. 

deserted, desertus. 

desire, cupio, z ivi (with ace. or 
infin. ), jubeo. 2 

desire (n.), cupido, inis (f.). 

despatch, conficio? interficio. z 

despise, contemno* psu 

despoil, spolio. 1 

despotism, dominatio, onis (f.). 

destiny, fortunae, arum. 

destroy, deleo, 2 evi, etum. 

destroyer, perditor, oris. 

destruction, exitium, pernicies. 

detected, detectus. 

determine, statuo ; 3 — on, ca- 
per e (p. 6$). 

detestable, nefandus. 

devoid, expers, tis (with gen.). 

devotions (of — ), precandi 
(gen.). 

dexterously, sollerter. 

diadem, diade7na, a tis (N.). 

dictator, dictator, oris. 

dictatorship, dictatura, ae. 

die, morior* 7nortuus. 

die out, exstinguor. z 

die (n.), alea, ae. 

dignity, dignitas, honos. 

difficult, difficilis, e. 

dinner, cena, ae (f.). 

dip, tingo? tinxi } tinctum. 



Vocabulary. 



95 



direct, viam monstrare. 
disappear, evanesco 3 ui. 
disaster, c lades, is (f.). 
discharge, praesto, 1 fungor. 
disciplined, coercitus (p. 85). 
discontinue, abrogo. 1 
discourse (v.), disputo?- 
discovery (conduct to — ), effi- 

cere ut inveniret. 
discredit, infamia, ae (f.). 
disease, morbus, i (m.). 
disgrace, ignominia, dedecus. 
display, praebeo? 
di spirited, fractu s animo. 
displease, displiceo, ui (dat.). 
disposer, rector et moderator, 
disposition, voluntas, atis. 
disregard, neglego, xi. 
dissatisfied, non contentus. 
dissembler, simulator, oris. 
dissolution, solutio, onis (f.). 
distinguish, laudibus ornare; 

with distinction, honorifice. 
distress, res adversae. 
distribute, distribuo. s 
distrust, diffidentia, ae. 
disunion, dissentio, onis (f.). 
divide, divido 3 si, sum. 
divine, divinus. 
diviner, haruspex, icis. 
divinity, natura divina. 
&o,facio, 3 feci, factum. 
dog, cam's, is (gen. pi. canum). 
dominion (subjects), civitas, 

atis (f.). 
doom : to seal — , pemicies at- 

que exitium esse. 
door, fores, ium (f.) ; porta, ae 

(f.) ; out of doors, for a s. 
doubtful, dubius. 
downward, deorsum. 



drama, fabu la, ae. 

draw up, subduco ;* troops — , 

copias instruo 3 
drink (n.), potio, onis (f.). 
drive, pello 3 pepuli, pulsum. 
drowned : to be — , aqua pe- 

rire. 
dry, sicctis. 
dry (up), exsicco. 1 
due, to be, deberi. 
duly, rite. 

duty, munus, eris j officium, i. 
dwell, habito. 1 



E. 

eagerness, earnestness, studi- 

um, i; eagerly, avide. 
eagle, aquila, ae. 
earlier, prior, oris. 
early, mane. 
early-ripe, maturus. 
earnest : in — , serio. 
earth, terra, ae ; surface of — 

expressed by omnis. 
ease, tranquillitas, atis (f.).* 
East, oriens, tis (m.) ; of the 

— , Asiaticus. 
easy , facilis, e. 
educate, educo, 1 erudio. 4, 
education, disciplina, ae. 
effectually, penitus. 
effeminacy, mollities, ei (f.). 
effort, to make, nitor. 3 
Egypt, Aegyptus, i (f.). 
elder, major (natu). 
elect, creo; 1 facio, s feci, f actus. 
election (as consul), consula 

tus, its (m.). 
elegy, elegia, ae. 



9 6 



Latin Composition. 



elephant, elephanlus, i. 

eloquence, eloquentia, ae. 

emblem, signum, u 

eminent, illustris, e. 

empire, imperium, i. 

employ, utor, 3 usus, adhibeo. 

empty, inanis, e. 

enable, facer e ut possim. 

encounter (v.), confligo 3 cum. 

encourage, cohortor. 1 

end (v.),finio. 4 

end, finis, (f. or m.) ; at an — , 
fi?iitus; bring to an — , confi- 
cio, 3 fecij — of, extremus. 

endanger, in periculum addu- 

cere. 
endless, sine fine. 
endowed, praeditus. 
endure, fero {perferd), tuli; ca- 
pable of enduring, patiens, lis. 
enemy, hoslis, is (" the enemy," 
usually plur.) ; a personal — , 
inimicus, i, * 
energy, studium, i. 
engage, adhibeo, 2 ui, itum* 
engage in, inire. 
engaged, oc cup at us. 
English, Angli, orum. 
enjoy (fruit), percipio 3 
enlightened rule, imperium sa- 

pienter administratum. 
enmity, odiu?n, i. 
Enna (man of), Hennensis, is. 
enrich, locupleto. 1 
ensign, insigne, is (n.). 
enter, intro j v ' ineo , irej — a 

ship, conscendo. 3 
enterprise, conatus, us (m.). 
entire, totus (gen. ius). 
entitle, inscribe 3 
entreat, obsecro. 1 



envenomed, venenatus. 

envy, invideo ; invidia (noun). 

Epidaurian, Epidaurius. 

Epirots, Epirotae, arum. 

equal, par, parts. 

equally, ?ion minus, aeque. 

establish, conloco. 1 

estate, praedium, i. 

esteem (v.), aestimo. 1 

Etruscan, Etruscus. 

even, etiam ; not — ., ne . . qui- 

detn j — as, ut. 
event, factum, ij eventus, us 

ever, unquamj (always), semper. 

every, everybody, quisque, qui- 

libet, omnis 4 unusquisque (p. 

i 9 ). 

everywhere, ubique, ubivis. 
evil, malusj (n.\incommodum, i. 
exactly, plane. 
exalted, excelsus. 
example, exemplum, u 
except, praeter (ace), nisi. 
excess, nimium. — excel, excello. 
excited, concitatus. 
exclaim, clamo. 1 
execrate, exsecror. 1 
exercise (v.), exerceo? ui, itum. 
exercise (n.), exercitatio, onis 

(use plur.). 
exert, exerceo? ui. 
exertion, labor, oris (m.). 
exhaust, conficio,* exhaurio. x 
exigency, necessitas, atis (f.). 
exile, exsilium, i; to be in — , 

exsulo; 1 an — , exsul, ulis. m 
expel, expello, 3 pult\ pulsum. 
expense, pretium, i. 
experience (v.), obire (ace). 
exploit, res gesta. 



Vocabulary. 



91 



expose, obicio, z jeci ; offer o. 
exterminate, exstirpo. l 
extinguish, restinguo, 9 nxi. 
extirpate, exstirpo. 1 
extort, extorqueo, 2 torsi. 
extraordinary, extraordinarius. 
extremely, express by superl. 
eye, oculus, i (m .). 



face, vultus, us (m.). 

facilitate, adjuvo? juvi. 

failings, vitia, orum. 

fair share, jus ta pars. 

fair-speaking, blandiloquus . 

faith : on the — of, fretus (with 
abl.). 

faithful, fidus. 

Falerian, Falerius. 

fall, cado, 1 pereo; — to the lot 
of, obtingo, tigi (of office, use 
rather obtinere, of the man 
chosen); let — , deicio ; — in 
with, occurro; 2 — upon, in- 
vader e in; — down, decido ; 3 
— on one's knees, in genua 
procumbere. 

false, falsus. 

faltering, vacillans, tis. 

fame,fama, ae. 

family, familia, ae. 

famine, fames ', is (f.). 

famous, clarus. 

fancy, opinor} {late. 

far, by far, longe; far and wide, 

farewell, vale. 

fate, /alum, i ; Fortuna, ae. 

father, pater, tris; parens, tis; 
of the fathers, patrius. 



fatigue, labor, oris (m.). 

fault, culpa, ae. 

favor (y.),faveo, 2 favi, fautum. 

favor (n.), beneficium, i. 

favorable, secundus ; prove — , 
bene succedere. 

fear (v.), timeo, 2 metuo, 3 vereor* 

fear (n.), ti?nor, oris ; metus, us. 

feeble, exiguus. 

feel, sentio, 4 sensi; adjicior (with 
abl.). 

fellow, vir, viri. 

ferment, agitatio, tumultus. 

fervor, studium, i. 

festival, festu s dies. 

few, aliquot, pauci, ae, a. 

field, ager, gri (m.), arvum, i. 

fierce, acer, ferox; fiercely dis- 
puted victory, acerrimis pug- 
nis parta victoria. 

fig, or 

fig-tree, ficus, i (f.). 

fight (v.), pugno; — a battle, 
co7nmittere proelium. 

fight (n.), pugna, ae. 

figure, species, ei (f.), statura. 

fill, compleo, impleo? 

find, invenio, 4, video. 2 

finish, per ago. z 

fire, ignis, is (m.). 

fum,jirmus. 

first, primus; at — , primo; (be- 
forehand), ante. 

fitting, to be, decere. 

t\2L,fig0. Z 

flame, flamma, ae (f.), ignis, is 

(M.). 

flee, fugio, z fugi ; confugio. 
fleet, classis, is (f.). 
flight, fuga, ae. 
flock, pecus, oris (n.). 



9 8 



Latin Composition. 



flog, fustibus caedere or virgis. 

fLovr,fluo, z xi, xum. 

foe, hostis, is (m.). 

fold, sinus, us (m.). 

follow, sequor, 3 insequor, itnitor. 

follower, comes, itis. 

food, cibus, i (m.). — foot, pes. 

foot, of hill, imus collis; — (in- 
fantry), pedes, itis (pi.). 

for (prep.), pro (abl.) ; often 
expressed by dative (§ 51, 
7. r.), or by ace. of place. 

for, nam, enim, etenim (§ 43, 3. 
d) ; (instead ot), in loco. 

forbid, veto, 1 ui. 

forces, copiae, arum. 

forest, silva, ae. 

forfend: heaven — , di 07nen 
avertant. 

forget, obliviscor? oblitus (§ 50, 
4. a). 

forgetting, oblitus (gen.). 

forgive, ignosco, 3 novi. 

i brk, f 'urea, ae. 

form (v.),facio, capio* 

form (n.), for?na, ae; (political) 
institutum, i. 

former (the), ille, a, ud. 

forsaken, deserius. 

forth : to go — , egredi. 

fortify, munio. 4 

fortitude, fortitudo, inis, (f.) . 

fortress, castellum, i (n.). 

fortune, for tuna. 

forum, forum, i. 

forward : to come, exsislere. 

found, condo, z didi; to — a col- 
ony at, coloniam deducere 
(with ace. of name of town). 

franchise, civitas, atis (f.), jus, 
juris (n.). 



free, liber, era, umj — (as a 
gift), gratuitus ; — town, 7nu- 
nicipium; freedom, libertas. 

friend, amicus, ij intimate — , 
familiaris. 

friendly, to be,faveo, 2 favi. 

friendship, amicitia, ae. 

fringe, praetexo* ui. 

from (out of), ex; (away from), 
ab; (by reason of), propter 
(see p. 33). 

frugal, parcus. 

frugally, frugaliter. 

fruit, / rue tus, us. 

full, plenus; —measure, summus. 

fully, bene, plane. 

function, munus, eris (n.). 

furious, ferox, ocis. 

further (adj.), reliquus. 

fury, saevitia, ae, furor, oris 

(M.). 

future, futurus. 

G. 

Gabinian law, Gabinia lex. 

gain (v.), pario, z peperi, par- 
turn ; sibi conciliare. 

gain (n.), quaestus, us. 

gain over, concilio. 1 

gallant, fortissimus. 

galley, navis, is (f.). 

games, ludi, orum. 

gap, hiatus, its (m.). 

garment, vestis, is (f.). 

gate, janua, porta, ae (f.). 

gather, carpo? psi. 

Gaul (the land), Gallia, ae; 
(the people), Galli, orum. 

gay, laetus. 

general (n.), imperator, oris. 



Vocabulary. 



99 



generally, fere {see " men "), 

vulgo. 
genius (intellect), ingenium, i. 
German, Germanus. 
get, adipiscorj — away, effugio. 
getting round, circumfusi. 
gift, donum, ij munus, eris. 
gifts, bona, orum. 
gigantic, ingens, Us, i?n?nanis, e. 
give, do, 1 dedi, datum; tribuo? 
adhibeo j 2 — back, reddoj 3 — 
up, depono ; — place, cedo, z 
cessi ; — to one's self ,sumo} 
glory (v.), glorior. 1 
glory (n.), gloria, ae, laus, dis 
(f.), dec us, oris (x.), flam a, ae. 
go, eo, ire, ivi, ltu?n; procedo, 2 
iter facioj 3 — on behind, 
seguor; 3 — out, egredi, 3 ex- 
cedo, z exlre j — up to, adire, 
accedere; so goes, ita se ha- 
bet. 
goat, caper, prl (m.). 
god, deus, i (§ 10, 4./). 
good, bonus j make — , compen- 
sare; be — for, coiivenire 
(dat). 
goodness, virtus, utls (f.). 
governor, praefectus, i. 
grandson, nepos, otis. 
gratitude, occasion of, gratum, 

res grata. 
great, magnus, immanis. 
greatly, multum; so — , tantum, 

magnifice. 
Grecian, Greek, Graecus. 
greeting, salutatio, onis (f.). 
grief, luctus, us (m.) ; dolor, oris, 

(*■)■ 

groan, gemitus, iis (if.). 
gross, gravis, e. 



ground, terra; on the — , humi, 

group, ag?nen, mis (x.). 

grow up, adolesco 3 evi; — out, 

provenio} 
guard (n.), custos, odis. 
gust, flat us, us (m.). 



habitation, domicilium, u 

hail, appello. 1 

hall, aula, ae. 

halt, consist o. z 

hand, m anus, us (f.) ; holding 
in — , ipse manu tenens ; 
(power), potestas, atis (f.) 

Hannibal, Hannibal, dlis. 

happen, accido,* evenio. 

happiness, fe lie itas, atis (f.). 

happy, felix, icis. 

harbinger, praenuntia, ae. 

harbor, fiortus, us (m.). 

hardship, labor, oris (m.). 

hardy, durus. 

harsh treatment, crudelitas, 
atis (f.). 

Hasdrubal, Hasdrubal, dlis. 

hasten, propero. 1 

hastily, temere. 

hateful, odiosus. 

hatred, odium, i. 

haughty, arrogans, tis. 

have, habeo? ui, itutn ; (take to 
one's self), adhibeo 2 (see p. 84). 

head (n.), caput , itis (x.). 

head-quarters, castra; appoint- 
ed to — , praefectus, with gen. 

health (state of), valetudo, inis 

(F.). 

hear, audio. A 



IOO 



Latin Composition. 



heart, animus, i. 

heat, calor, oris (m.). 

heaven, caelmn, u 

heifer, juvenca, ae. 

heir, heres, edis. 

help, auxilium, i. 

herald, fe tia lis, is. 

herdsman, pastor, oris. 

here, hies — and there, passim. 

hereditary, paternus. 

heritage, hereditas, atis (f.). 

Hesiod, Hesiodus, i. 

high, altus, excelsus. 

highest, summus, maximus. 

hill, mons, collis (m.). 

hinder, impedio. 4, 

hindrance, impedimentum, i 

(N.). 

his (of his), ejus s reflexive, 

suus. 
history, historia, ae. 
hold, teneo / 2 — out, propono. 
holiday, dies festus. 
home, domus, us s doinicilium, 

is at — , domi. 
Homer, Homerus, i. 
honest men, boni, orum. 
honesty, probitas, atis (f.). 
honey, mel, mellis (n.). 
honor (v.), eolo, 3 ui, cultum. 
honor (n.), decus, oris (n.) ; 

honor^ oris (m.) ; dignitas, 

atis (f.) ; with — , honeste. 
honorable, honorificus. 
hope (n.), spes, spei (f.) ; voium, i. 
hopeless, inutilis, e. 
Horace, Horatius, i. 
Horatian, Horatius. 
horn, cornu, tis (n.). 
horse, equus, is war-horse, 

equus militaris. 



hostile (of the enemy), hostilis, 

es (actively hostile), infe7isus. 
hostilities, be Hum. 
hour, hora, ae s in an — , mo- 

mento tempo?'is. 
house, domus, us (f.). 
how, quams — much, quantum, 

quantos interrog., quo?nodo. 
however, tamen, vero, quam- 

vis s — large, quantum vis. 
human, humanus. 
humble, hu?nilis, demissus. 
humbled, fr actus. 
humiliation, molestia, ae. 
humility, with, demissis verbis. 
hunger, fames, is (f.). 
hunter, venator, oris. 
hurry (v.), propero. 1 
hurtful, to be, noceo, 2 ui. 
husband, maritus, i. 



I, egos I for my part, ego vero 

(or equidem). 
ides, idus, uum (§ 84). 
idleness, socordia, ae. — if, si. 
ignorance, inscitia, ae. 
ignorant, ignarus. 
ill, 7nale. 

illustrious, clarus, praeclarus. 
Iliyrians, Illyrii, oru?n. 
image, i?nago, inis (f.). 
imitate, i?nitor} 
imitation, imitatio, onis (f.). 
immediately, statim, illico. 
immortal, sempiternus, immor- 
immovable, immobilis. [talis. 
impart, communico l cum. 
impatient, imp aliens, tis. 



Vocabulary. 



IOI 



impend, impendeo? 
implore, oro. 1 
important, ft o tens, tis. 
impression, see memory, 
improper, minus aptus. 
in, in, de (abl.). 

increase (v. a.), adaugeo? xi, 
ctitm (in neut sense, use pas- 
sive). 
increasing, major, us. 
indeed, quidem. 
independence, libertas, atis (f.). 
indifference to, cdntemptio, 

onis (f.) (with gen.). 
indignation, ira, ae, i?idignatio, 

onis (f.). 
indolence, ignavia, ae. 
induce, induco? 
infamous, turpis, e, nefandus. 
infamy, ignominia, ae. 
inferior, inferior, us. 
infinite, summus. 
inflict death on, morte 7nultare. 
influence, to have, gratia valeo. 2 
influenced, adfectus. 
inform, certiore7n facio. 
inhabit, habito} 
inherit, accipio? 
inheritance, hereditas, atis (f.). 
injury, injuria, aej do no — , 

nihil nocere (dat.). 
insolently, insolenter. 
inspiration, sftiritus, afflatus. 
inspire, animum dare; may the 

gods — , di duint. 
instance, for, quidem. 
instantly, statim. 
instead of, pro (abl.); in loco 

(with gen.). 
instil, instillo 1 (ace. and dat.). 
institute, conslituo, 3 instituo? 



instructed, certior f actus. 

insult (n.), contumelia, ae. 

insurgents, use seditio. 

intelligence, intelligeniia, ae. 

intend, in animo esse (habere). 

intention, consilium, u 

intercede, deprecor. 1 

interest, to be one's — , inter 
esse (gen. § 50, 4. d). 

interests, utilitates et comifioda. 

interregnum, interregnum, i. 

interrupt, interrumpo? rupi. 

interval, tempus, oris (n.). 

intimate (adj. or noun), famili- 
ar is, is. 

into, in (ace). 

intolerable, intolerabilis, e, 

introduce, induco, z duxi. 

invade, invado* di, sum. 

invaders, hostes inr2i7npentes. 

invasion, ini-uptio, onis (f.). 

invent, invenio.* 

invention, inventa, orum (n.). 

inventor, inventor, toris (m.). 

inventress, invenirix, tricis 

(F.). 

inviolable, inviolatus. 
invite, invito, 1 oro. 1 
irritated, moles te ferens. 
island, insula, ae. 
Italian, Italus. 
Italy,* Italia, ae. 
ivory, ebur, oris (n.) ; of ivory, 
eburneus. 



jealous, invidus (gen.). 
jealousy, invidia, ae. 
jest, jocus, ij yA.joca. 



102 



Latin Composition . 



join in, accedere ad, jungere se 

(dat.) ; in a military sense, 

militare cum aliquo. 
joined to, conjunctus cum. 
joy* gaudium, i. [tri. 

judge (n.), judex, ids, arbiter, 
judicial pow er, judicium, i. 
Jugurtha, Jugurtha, aej (adj.), 

Jugurthinus. 
Julian (adj.), Julius, a, urn. 
Jupiter, Juppiter, Jovis. 
just, Justus, 

just now, nunc maxime. 
justice, aequitas, tatisjjustitia, 

ae. 

K. 

keep, servo; r — silence, iaceo. 2 
kill, interficio, z occido. 3 
kind, comis, e, benevolus. 
kindle, incendo. 3 
kindly, comiter, blande. 
kindness, benejicium, i; as a 

quality, comitas, facilitas, atis 

(f.), benevolentia, ae. 
king, rex, regis; (adj.), regius. 
kingdom, regnmn, i. 
knee, genu, us (n.). 
knife, cultellus, i. 
knight, eques, itis. 
know, scio, 4 nosco 3 novi ; Intel- 

lego; z (be aware), sentio. 4 
knowledge, scientia, ae. 



labor, labor, oris (m). 
lake, lacus, its (m.). 
lament, moleste ferre. 



lamp, lucerna, ae. 
land, terra, ae. 

language, oratio, onis ; verba. 
large, magnus. 
lasting, diuturnus. 
last, duro. 1 

last (adj.), ultimus ; at — , tan- 
dem, extremum. 
lastly, denique. 
latest, sup r emus. 
lastly, denique. 
Latium (of), Latinus, a, um. 
latter (the), hie, haec, hoc (see 

P- 13). 
law, lex, legis (f.). 
lay, impono; 3 — hand on, tango. 
lay hold, teneo, 2 tango? 
lay down, deponere. 
lead (v.), duco, 3 adduco 3 duxi, 

due turn ; — away, abduco. z 
leader, dux, ducis. 
leap into, insilio, 4 ui; — over, 

trausilio, 4 ui. 
learn, disco, z didici. 
learned, doctus.—at least, saltern. 
leathern, ex pellibus f actus. 
leave, relinquo, z liqui; (go from), 

egredij (proceed), prcficisci. 
left (hand), sinistra, ae. 
legion, legio, onis (f.). 
length, at, tandem, nunc deimim. 
less, inferior, us j minus. 
let fall, demittere. 
let loose, libero. 1 
lethargy, stupor, oris (m.). 
letter, epistola (ula), ae. 
levy, conscribo. 3 
liar, mendax, acis. 
libation, libamentum, i. 
liberate, libero} 
liberator, liberator, torts. 



Vocabulary* 



103 



liberty, liber tas, tat is (f.). 

liberties, jura (n.). 

Libyan, Libycus. 

lie, jaceo? ui; — upon, esse (gen.). 

life, vita, ae; in the life-time of, 

lift, to/to, 3 sustuli. [vivus (abl.). 

light (adj.), lev is, e. 

lighted (illuminated), in lustra- 

tus ; (kindled), accensus. 
like (adj.), similis, e (gen. or 

dat.) ; (adv.), velut, ut. 
lineage, genus, eris. 
litfger, moror. 1 
lion, leo, onis (m.). 
listen (to), audio} 
literature, litterae, arum. 
little, paulumj how — (adv.), 

quam non; distance, paulum. 
live (v.), vivo, 3 vixi ; habito. 1 
long, longus, diuturnusj — 

since, jamdudum j as — as, 

quamdiu ; no longer, non jam. 
look out, prospicio; like, videor. 
loose (let), libero, 1 emit to. 3 
loquacious, log u ax, acis. 
lord, dominus, i; to be — , 

potior* (gen. § 54, 6. d). 
lose, amitto. 3 
loss, detrimentum, i. 
loudly, vehementer. 
love (n.), ainor, oris (m.) ; cart- 

tas, at is (f.) ; lover, amans. 
lower, inferior, us. 
lust, cupido, inis (f.). 
luxuriously, luxuriose. 



M. 

Macedonian, Macedonicus ; a 
Macedonian, Macedo, nis. 



mad scheme or conduct,/*^ r^r. 
magnitude, magnitudo. 
magistrate, magistratus, us. 
maintain, defendo? 
make, facio, z feci; reddo; 3 — 

good, compenso j 1 — way, 

cedoj 3 — for (seek), peto 3 
man, homo, inis, vir, i (m.) ; 

men generally, magna pars 

hominumj a man who, is qui. 
manner, mos, moris (m.). 
many, multi, plurimi; so — , 

tot j very — , plerique. 
March, (of), Martins. 
march (v.), proficiscor 3 profec- 

tus ; progredior 3 gressus j iter 

facere. 
march (n.), iter, itineris (n.). 
mariner, nauta. — margin, or a. 
market-place, forum, i. 
marriage, matrimonium, i; — 

with, conubiumj to give in — , 

nuptum dare. 
marry (of the man), duco, 3 duxi 

(sc. in matrimonium y or uxo- 

rem in appos.) ; of the woman, 

nubo, 3 nupsi (with dat.). 
Mars, Mars, Martis. 
Marsian, Marsus. 
martial, bellicus. 
marvellous, mirus. 
mask, persona, ae. 
mass (of troops), caterva, ae. 
massacre (v.), trucido} 
massacre (n.), caedes, is; truci- 

datio civium. 
master, dominus, t. 
matron, matrona, ae. 
may, licet (impers.), possum. 
mean-time, interea ; means, opes. 
measure, consilium, i (m.). 



104 



Latin Composition. 



mediation, deprecatio, onis (f.). 

meet, occurro? nanciscor* nac- 
tus, invenio. 4, 

memorable, memorabilis, e. 

memory, memoria, ae; our 
memories excited by our im- 
pressions, animis memoria 
plenis recenti earum rerum 
quas sensibus percepimus. 

men (soldiers), milites, um. 

menial, servus, i. 

mercy, dementia, ae. 

merit, virtus, utis (f.). 

message, mandatum, i. 

midst of, medius. 

mighty, magnus Hie. 

might, possim (subj.).. 

Milan, Mediolanum, i. 

military, bellicus, militaris, e. 

mind, mens, tis; animus, i. 

mine, cuniculi, orum. 

mingle, misceor. 2 

misery, miseria, ae. 

misuse, pravus usus. 

Mithridatic, Mithridaticus. 

model, exemplum, i. 

moderate, modicus. 

modern, hodiernus. 

monarchy, imperiwn, i. 

money, pecunia, ae. 

monstrous, immanis, e. 

monument, 7nonu7nentum. 

morass, palus, udis (f). 

more, plus, amplius, magis. 

morning, in the — , mane (n.); 
(adj.), matutinus. 

morrow, posterus dies. 

mortal, mortalis, e. 

most (men), plerique; (adv.), 
maxime. 

mother, mater. — motive, causa. 



mountain, 7nons, tis (m.) ; (adj.), 

montanus. 
mountaineer, montanus. 
mourning, luctus, us (m.). 
mouth, os, oris (n.) ; of river, 

ostium, i. 
move, moveo? movi. 
moved, permotus. 
movement, 7notus, us (m.). 
moving, incedens, tis. 
much, multum, multo, magni. 
multiply, multiplico. 1 
multitude, multitudo, in is (f.). 
Mulvian, Mulvius. 
municipal law, jus civile. 
murder (v.), occido, 3 trucido. 1 
murder (n.), caedes, is. 
mutter, summissa voce dicere. 
my, meus, a, um (voc. M. mi). 
myself, ego (ipse). 
mysterious, secretus. 



N. 

name (appoint), creo. 1 

name, nomenj in the — , verbis. 

narrow, tenuis, e j angustus, a, 

um; narrow pass, angustiae. 
nation, gens, tis; natio, onis. 
nature, natura, ae. 
naval, navalis, e. 
near, vicifiitsj (prep.), prope ; 

(adv.), juxta, haud procul ; 

nearest relatives, pi'oximi. 
nearly, paene. [i. d). 

necessary, opus (in pred. § 54, 
need, requiro ; 3 to have — , opus 

esse (dat. and abl.) ; to be in 

— , egere. 



Vocabulary. 



105 



neglect, neglego? 

negligence (act of), delictum, i. 

neighbor, vicinus, finitimus, a, 
um. 

neighborhood, vicinia, ae, vi- 
cinum, i. 

negligence, negligently ae. 

nest, nidus, i (m.). 

never, nunquam. 

nevertheless, nihilo minus. 

new, novus. 

next (of two), posterus ; of 
several, proximus. [noclu. 

night, nox, noctis (f.) ; at — , 

no (adj.), nullus ; (adv.), nihil. 

nobility, nobilitas, atis (f.). 

noble, nobilis, e (to emphasize 
quality,* use superlative) ; no- 
bles (as a party), nobilitas. 

noblest, summus. 

not, non; as question, nonne ; 
— to, ne; if — , si minus. 

nothing, nihil, nee quicquam. 

now, nunc; (already), jam ; (of 
past time), turn; (emph.), hie 
nunc; (at this age), hoc aetatis. 

number, numerus, i; great 
numbers, multitudo. 

numerous, magnus. 

Numidian, Numida, ae. 



O. 

oath, j 'usjurandum (§ 14, 2. d). 

obedience, obedientia ; uncon- 
ditional — , obed. omnium re- 
rutn. 

obey, pareo? ui, itum. 

object, causa, ae; (definite) con- 
silium, i. 



obliged, coactus (part, of cogo). 
observe, animadverto. 3 
obstacle, difficultas. 
obtain, adsequor, consequvr* 

secutus ; adipiscor* adeptus. 
occasion, occasio, tempus. 
occur, fio, fieri, f actus. 
ocean, oceanus, i (m.). 
odious, invisus. 
of, usually expressed by gen. or 

possessive (see p. 35). 
offensive, odiosus. 
offer (v.), offerre, polliceri, prae- 

stare, imponere. 
offer (n.), condicio, onis (f.). 
office, ?nagistratus, us; dignitas 
officer, praefectus, i. 
often, saepe. 
oil, oleuin, i. 

old, vetus, eris; (of age), natus. 
old age, senectus, tutis (f.). 
old man, senex, senis. 
older, major. 
omen, omen, inis (n.). 
on, in (abl.) ; — , de. [sus. 

once, quondam; — more, rur- 
one, unus (gen. ius) ; the — 

. . . the other, alter . . . 

alter. — at once, statim. 
only (adj.), solus (gen. ius), 

unicus; (adv.), modo, solum, 

tantunt. 
onset, impetus, us (m.). 
open (v.), recludo? si, sum. 
opinion, sententia, ae. 
opportunity (favorable), occasio, 

onis. 
oppose, resisto, B stiti. 
opposed, contrarius ; — in war, 

adversus aliquem pugna?'e. 
opposite, contra, alter, a, um. 



io6 



Latin Composition* 



opposition, (p. 44) , vis. 
oppression in one's province, 

rep'etundae. 
oppressive, gravis, e. 
or, aut, velj (as altern.) an, -ne 

(§ 71, 2). 
oracle, oraculum, i. 
oration, oratio, onis (f.). 
orator, orator, oris j (adj.), ora- 
tor ius. 
order (v.), jubeo, 2 jus si. 
order, mandatum, ij by — of, 

jmssuj (rank), ordo, inis. 
other, alius, a, ud; (of two), 

alters the — , ceteri, reliqui; 

some — -, aliquis. 
ought, debeo? oportet (impers. 

with ace). 
our, noster, tra, trum. 
out, ex (in compos.). 
outlive (to have), supers tes esse. 
outside (prep.), extra. 
over, supra, trans (ace) 
overcome, supero. 1 
overflowed, superfusus. 
overhear, excipio. z 
overflow, se effundere per 

(ace). 
overturned, eversus. 
overwhelmed, confectus. 
owe, debeo, 2 ui. 
own (often omitted), gen. of ipse 

in appos. with possessive ; 
proprius. 



painstaking, diligentia, ae. 
Palatine, Palatinus, i. 
palm-tree, palma, ae. 



Famphylia, Pamphylia, ae; 

(adj.), Painphyliensis. 
pang, dolor, oris (m.). 
pardon (v.), ignosco, novi. 
pardon (n.), venia, ae. 
parent, parens, tis. 
part, pars, tis(¥.), (meaning duty, 

&c, use plur.) ; for the most 

— , magna ex parte. 
partisan, fau tor, oris. 
partly, aliqua {magna) ex parte. 
party, pars, tis (f.) (generally 

plur.) ; f actio, onis. 
pass a law, legem ferre; — 

over, supero, 1 praetergredi, 

praeterferri-, (time), ago. 2 
passion (for), cupiditas, at is 

(f.) (gen.) ; passions, pertur- 

baiiones animi. 
patience, patientia, ae. 
patrician, patricius. 
patron, patronus, i. 
pay, solvo. 3 
peace, pax, pacis j in — , con- 

cors, dis. 
peaceful, quietus. 
peculiar, proprius. 
Penates, Penates, hwi (m.). 
penetrate, penetro} 
peninsula, peninsula, ae. 
people, populus, i (m.), plebs, is 

(f.), homines. 
perfection, in, perfecte. 
perform, ago, 3 fungor. 3 
peril, periculum, i. 
perish, pereo, ire, ii. 
perpetual, sempiternus. 
Perses, Perses, is. 
persuade, persuadeo 2 (dat ) ; 

friendly persuasion, arnica 

verba. 



Vocabulary. 



107 



Pharsalus, Pharsalus, ij (adj.), 

Pharsalicus. 
Philip, Philippics, i. 
Philometor, Philometor, oris, 

ace. ora. 
philosopher, philosophu s, i. 
Physcon, Physcon, onis. 
pilgrim, peregrinator, oris. 
pillar, columna, ae. 
pipe, tibia, ae. 
pirate, praedo, onis. 
pity (v.), have — on, misereor 2 

(gen. person). 
place (v.), impono, z depono j z — 

at the head, praepono 3 (dat.). 
place (n.), locus, ij pi. /oca, 

orum. 
play (on instrument), cano j 3 — 

a part, partes agere. 
player, his trio, onis. 
pleasant, co?mnodus. 
please, placeo, 2 ui, itutn; (wish), 

volo. 
pleasure, voluptas, atis (f.). 
pleasure-grounds, horti deli- 

cati. 
plebeian, plebeius. 
pledge, polliceor. 2 
plot, conjuratio, onis (f.). 
plunder, praeda, ae. 
plunge, inicio, z jeci. 
poet, poeta, ae (m.). 
poetry, versus, uu?n (pi.) (m.). 
point out, indico?- 
poison, venenum, i. 
polished, excultus. 
pollution, violare (ger. p. 69). 
Pompey, Pompeius, ij (adj.), 

-anus. 
poor, miser, era, umj pauper, 

eris. 



populace, vulgus, i (n.). 

population, multitudo homi- 
nu?n. 

position, locus, i (pi. /oca). 

possession, possessio, onis, ager, 
gri. — posterity, posteri (pi.). 

posted, collocatus. 

pour (neut.), sefundere. 

poverty, egestas, atis (f.) 

power, poles tas, atis (f.) ; (do- 
minion), imperium, i (n.) ; 
potentia, ae (f.). 

powerful, potens, lis. 

praise (v.), laudo. 1 

praise (n.), laus, dis (f.). 

pray, precor. 1 

prayer, carmen precationis. 

precede, anteeo, ire. 

prediction, vaticinatio, onis (f.). 

preparations, to make military 
— , copias parare. 

prepare (a way), munio. A 

prepared, paratus. 

present (n.), munus, eris (n.). 

present (adj.), praesens, tis. 

preserve, conservo. 1 

preserver, conservator, oris. 

prevail, vinco? 

prevent, i7npedio.* 

priest, sacerdos, otis, pontifex, 
icis. 

principal, maximus. 

prison, career, eris (m.). 

prisoner, captivus, i. 

private (citizen), privatus, i. 

privation, inopia omnium re- 
rum. 

prize, praemium, i. 

proceed, progredior. z 

produce, efficio? 

professed, apertus. 



io8 



Latin Composition . 



professions (verbal), verba, pro- 
missa. 

profit (v.), fructum caper e. 

profligacy, flagitia, orum. 

promise (v.), pro7nitto? polli- 
ceor* itus; edico* 

promise (n.), promissum, i. 

promontory, promuntorium, i. 

proof, testimonium, L 

property, bona, orum. 

propose, fero,ferre (of a law). 

proscribe, proscribo. 3 [( F -)- 

proscription, proscriptio, onis 

prosecute, persequor? 

prospect (in), ante oculos. 

prostrate, prostratus. 

proud, superbus. 

proudly, superbe. 

prove (try), experior. A 

province, provincia, ae. 

provision, to make, provideo. 2 

provisions, commeatus, uu7n. 

public, publicus. 

Punic, Punicus. 

purchase, emo, 2 emi, emptum. 

pure, purus. 

purple, purpureus. [ — , qua re. 

purpose, consilium, i; for what 

pursue, persequorj 3 celeriter ad 
consectandum, in hot pursuit. 

push (against), trudo* 

put, pono* posui, positum ; — 
an end to,finio; 4 — to death, 
interficio j 3 — off (shore), sol- 
vere navem. 



Q. 

quaestor, quaestor, oris. 
quality (good), virtus, utis (f.). 



quarter (district), vicus, i (m.). 

quickly, celeriter. 

quiet, quies, etis (f.). 

quiet, quietus ; remain — , qui- 
esco, 3 evi. 

quietly, quiete. 

quit, relinquo* reliquu 

quite, ad7nodum. 

quoth, inquit (after the first 
word or words of the quota- 
tion). 

R. 

rage, ira. 

raging, iratus,furens, tis, 

rags, squalor, oris (m.). 

raise, tollo, s sustuli, sublatum. 

rank, ordo, inis (m.). 

rascal, improbus, i. 

rather, potius. 

reach, manils, uu77i (f.). 

read (aloud), recito. 1 

reader, lector, oris. 

ready, paratus ad. 

real, verus. 

reap (fruit), capere, percipere. 

reason, ratio, onis (f.), res, rei 

(F.). 

reawaken, deiiuo concito. 1 

recall, revoco. 1 

receive, accipio* (excipio), cept, 

ceptum. 
recognize, agnosco? novij (hold 

valid), ratum habere. 
recollection, recordatio. 
recommend, commendo. 1 
recommendation, commenda- 

tio, onis (f.). 
recompense, to make, compen- 

sare. 
recount, 7nemoro, commemoro. 1 



Vocabulary. 



109 



recourse, to have, se conferre 

ad. 
recover, rectiperol 
recovering, experrectus (p. 65). 
redeem, compenso. 1 
reed, anmdo, inis (f.) 
reedy, amndinibus praetextus. 
refinement, humanitas, atis (f.). 
refuge, perfugium, ij take — , 

confugio. 3 
refusal, recusation onis. 
refuse, recuso} 
regain, recipio. 3 
regard (think), existimo ; l — 

for, studium (gen.) ; pay — , 

rationem habere, respicere; re- 
regret, dolor, oris, [garding, de. 
feign (v.), regno! 1 
reign (n.), regnum, i. 
reject, recuso, 1 eicio 3 jeci. 
relation, to bear, attineo* 
relative, propinquus. 
relief, opis (gen.), on (f.). 
rely on, confido 3 (dat. or abl.). 
relying, fretus (abl). 
remain, maneo* matisi. 
remainder of, remaining, re- 

liquus. 
remark, animadverto? 
remarkable, insignis, e. 
remember, recordor ! (§ 50, 4. 

a, r.). 
remembrance, recordatio, onis. 
remind, moneo, 2 ui, itum. 
remnant, reliquiae, arum. 
remote, ultimus. 
remove, averto, 3 amoveo. 2 
renounce (allegiance to), impe- 

rium abicere. 
renovate, renovo. 1 
renown, laus, dis (f.). 



repay (a kindness), referre. 
repent, paenitet. 
repeat, iterum with verb. 
reply, respondeo, 2 di, sum. 
reply, responsum, i. 
report, nuntio, 1 dico 3 
represented, expressus. 
representative, exemplum, i. 
reprisals, to make, co7npensare. 
republic, respublica (§ 14, 2. d.). 
reputation, fa ma, ae. 
require, postulo. x 
rescue, servo J eripio. 
resentment, simultas, atis (f.), 

iracundia, ae. 
reserve, reservo; * — to one's 

own use, sibi adservare. 
residence, do7nicilium, i. 
resign (office), abdico y 1 (power), 

depono? 
resist, rest's to, 3 stiti. [g er -)' 

resistance, Contendere (inf. or 
resolution, consiliwn, i. 
resolve, constituo? 
rest-of, reliquus. 
restless, inquietus. 
restore, renovo, x restituo, 3 

reddo. 3 
retire, abeo, ire (abl.). 
return, revertor 3 regredior 3 

redeo, respondeo ; on his — , 

rediens, tis; — thanks, age?'e 
return (n.), reditus. [gratias. 
revenge, ultio, onis (f.). 
revive (neuter), renascor j 3 

(trans.), restituo 3 
revolution, civilis motus (m.). 
reward, praetJiium, i; to give 

as — , donare. 
rich, dives, ids, opimus. 
riches, divitiae^ arum. 



no 



Latin Composition. 



right, rectus, a, umj rights, 

jura, urn (n.) ; to think — , 

recte sentire. 
right hand, dextra, ae. 
ring (signet-ring), anulus, i. 
rise, or tor 2 (infin. oriri), coorior, 

ortus j surgo, 8 surrexi. 
rival, aemulus, i, 
river, flumen, inis (n.). 
road, iter, itineris (n.). 
rob, spolio. 1 

robe, toga, ae, vestis, is (f.). 
roll (for writing), tabellae, arum. 
Roman, Romanus. 
Rome, Roma, aej (as people), 

Romanij (as state), civitas 

Romana (respublicd). 
room, cubiculum, i. [radicitus. 
root, radix, icisj — and branch, 
rose, rosa, ae ; full of roses, 

roseus. — round, circum. 
roving, vagus. 
royal, of royalty, regius. 
ruin, exitium, i. 
rule over, impero. 1 
ruler, princeps, ipis. 
rumor, rumor, fama. 
run, curro, z cucurri. 
rush, procurroj 8 — upon, 

inruo. 8 



S. 

Sabine, Sabinus. 

sacred, sacer, era, um. 

sacrifice, macto} 

safe, tutus, 

safety, salus, utis (f.). 

sail (v.), navigo. 1 

sail (n.), velum j sailor, nauta. 



sake : for the — of, causa, fol- 
lowing a gen. 
sallies of wit, facetiae, arum, 
same, idem, eadem, idem. 
sanctuary, aedes, is. 
satellite, satelles, itis. 
satisfied, contentus. 
savage, barbarus. 
save, servo. 1 
say, dico, 3 aio, inquam (Gr. p. 

Si)) absol. loquor. 
scarcely, vix. — scanty, exiguus. 
schooled, adsuef actus. 
scorn, ludibrium. 
sea, mare, is (n.) ; (adj.), marinus. 
sea-shore, or a, ae. 
season, tempus, oris (n.). 
seat, sedes, is (f.). 
seated, sedens, tis. 
secession, secessio, onis (f.). 
second, secundus, alter. 
second time, iterum. 
secret, res occulta; — society, 

sodalitas, atis (f.). 
secretary, scriba, ae (m.). 
secure (v.), occupo. 1 
secure : to be — , non dubiam 

spem habere j to make — , tu* 

tiorem reddere. 
security, securitas, atis (f.) 
sedition, seditio, onis (f.). 
see, video, 2 vidi, visum. 
seek, peto,* cupio, 8 adpeto. 8 
seem, videor, 2 visus. 
self-same, idem, eadem, idem. 
seize, prehendo 8 di, sum; 

eripio. 8 
sell, vendo, 8 didi. 
senate, senatus, us (m.) ; — 

house, curia, ae. 
senator, senator , oris; adj. ~ius. 



Vocabulary. 



in 



send, mitto? mist, missum. 
sense, sensus, us (m.). 
sensible, prudens, tis. 
sentence, to pass, judicium 

ferre. 
separate, separo} 
separate (his own), proprius. 
sepulchre, sepulcrum, i. 
serious, gravis, e. 
seriously, in serium. 
Seriphus, Seriphus, /(f.) ; (adj.), 

Seriphius. 
servant, servus, i. 
serve, servioj* — well or ill, 

bene aut male tnereri de. 
servile, servilis, e. 
session, consessus, us (but may 

be omitted; as, in Senatmn 

venire). 
Bet, p<?no ; * — on foot, incipio? 

cepi, ceptumj — out, proficis- 

cor, B fectus ; — sail, navigo. 1 
several, plures, iuntj singuli. 
severe, severus. 
severely, saeviter. 
severity, sever itas, atis (f.). 
shade, umbra, ae. 
shaft, telum, i (n.). 
shame, ignominia, ae, dedecus, 

oris (n.). 
share (v .), participo. 1 
share (n.), pars, tis (f.). 
she, ea, ilia. 
she-wolf, lupa, ae. 
shelter, tego, 3 texi, tectum. 
shepherd, pastor, oris. 
ship, navis, is (f.). 
shivered, pulsus. 
shore, litus, oris (n.) ; go on — •, 

in terra7n egredi. 
short, brevis, e. 



shortly after, paulo post. 

should, &c., see p. 63. 

show, demonstro. 1 

shrink, abhorreo.* 

sick, to be, aegroto} 

sickness (sea-sickness), nausea, 

ae. 
side (party), pars, tis (f.) ; on 

the — , a parte. 
siege, for the siege of, ad oppug- 

nandum. 
sight, conspectus, us (m.), spec- 

taculum, i. 
sign, signal, signum, i. 
signify, signifco. 1 
silence, silentium, i; in — , 

silentio, tacite; to keep — , 

silere, tacere. \mcdo. 

simple, inconditus ; simply, 
since, post (ace. ; see p. 40) ; 

ever — , jam hide aj postea t 
singular, mirus. 
sister, soror, oris. 
sit, sedeo, 2 sedi. — situation, res. 
skilful, peritus (gen.). 
skill, ars, artis (f.). 
slaughter, caedes, is (f.). 
slave, servus, i; to be a — , 

servioy 4 — market, grex ve- 

nalium. 
slay, i?iterfcio 3 feci, fectujn, 

caedo 3 cecidi, caesus j — with 

cruelty, trucido. 1 
slayer, inter fee tor, oris. 
slight, parvus. 
sloth, ignavia, ae. 
small, parvus. 
smite, percutio 3 cussi. 
snake, anguis, is, serpens, tis 

(M.). 

snatch, eripio? ui. 



112 



Latin Composition. 



so, sic, itaj — . . as, ita . . ut> 
tarn . . quamj — many, totj 

— great, tantus j — that, adeo 
utj will have it so, sic velle. 

soldier, miles, itis. 

solicitous, sollicitus. 

Bolid,Jirmus. 

some, aliquid, nonnullus (p. 18) ; 

— thing, aliquid; — time, 
aliquamdiuj — times, inter-* 
dumj — ... others, alii, . . alii. 

son, filius, ij in-law, gener, 

eri. 

song, carmen, inis (n.). 

soon, brevi tempore; (present- 
ly), mox; — after, paulo 
post j as — as, ut primum. 

soothsayer, haruspex, icis. 

sorrow, dolor, oris (m.). 

soul, a?iimus, ij anima, ae. 

sound, sanns. 

south, meridionalis (adj.). 

Spain, Hispania, ae; (adj.), 
Hispanicus. 

spare, parco, z peperci; (refrain), 
temper o. 1 Spartan, Spartanus. 

speak, loquor* locutus ; — of, 
co7nmemoro. x 

spectacle? spectaculum, i. 

spectre, species, ei (f.). [cere. 

speculator, to be a, quaestumfa- 

speech, sermo, onis (m.). 

spirit, animus, i (m.), (pi.). 

sport, lusio, onis (f.). 

spot, locus, ij plur., loca. 

spring, ver, veris (n.). 

square (of a city), platea, ae. 

staff, baculum, i. 

stand, sto; 1 steti, statumj — 
aside, de via decederej — 
(bear), ferrej (be), esse. 



state, civitaSy atis; res publica 

(F.). 

stately, procerus. 

statue, statua, ae. 

stature, staiura, ae. 

steep, arduus. 

steer, guberno. 1 

step aside, decedo. z 

stepmother, noverca, ae. 

stick (n.),fustis, is (m.). 

stifle, exstinguo? 

still, etiam turn, etiam nunc, 

adhuc. 
stir up, excito. 1 
stone, saxum, i. 
stop, moror} 
storm, violent, ?nagna tempes- 

tas. 
story, fabu la, ae. 
straggle, vagor. 1 
stranded, in terram delatus. 
strange, novus. 
stream, flumen, inis (n.). 
strength, vires, iuin (f.). 
strengthen, confirmo. 1 
stretching, patens, tis. 
strict, severus, exactus. 
strictly, severe. 
strike, percutio ; 3 — down, cae- 

doy s — a blow, inferre. 
striking (keen), argutus. 
stroke, mulceo, 2 mulsi. 
strong, validus. 
stronghold, praesidium, i. 
strongly, vehementer. 
studious, studiosus. 
stupidity, stultitia, ae. 
subject, to be, servire. 
subjects, cives, ium. 
submission, obsequium, i. 
submit, se dedere. 



Vocabulary. 



"3 



subterranean, subterrancus . 
succeed, succedo* cessi. 
success, prosperus eve7itus, 

success us, us (m.). 
successful, felix, icis. 
succor (help), subvenire (dat.). 
suckle, lacto. 1 

such, talis, ej is,ea,id; tarn. 
sudden, subitus. [subito. 

suddenly (on a sudden), repente, 
suffer, fero, tuli; patior? 
sufficiency, satis, [consciscere. 
suicide, to commit, mortem sibi 
suit, convenio.* 
suitable, idoneus. 
summer, aestas, atis (f.) ; (adj.), 

aestivus, 
summit, summus mons. 
summon, convoco} 
sun, sol, so lis (m.). 
superior, superior, melior; (abs.), 

optimus. 
support, cofi/irmo. 1 
suppose,////*?. 1 
supreme, supremus, summus. 
surely, profecto. 
surface of earth, omnis terra. 
surmount, surpass, supero. 1 
surrender (v.), dedo? dedidi. 
surrender (n.), deditio, onis (f.). 
surrounded, stipalus. 
survive, super esse, supers tes 

(itis) esse with dat. 
suspend, suspendo? di, sum, 
suspense, cura, ae. 
swallow (n.), hirundo, inis (f.). 
swamp, palus, udis (f.). 
swear, juro; l — together, con- 

Juro. 1 
sweet, dulcis, e. 
sweetly, jucunde. 



swim, no, nato, trano. 1 
symptom, indicium, u 
Syracuse, Syracusae, aru?n (f.). 
Syracusan, Syracusanus, a, 

u?n. 
Syrian, Syrus, a, um. 



T. 

take*, capio* cepi, captum,porto, x 

ducoj* (enjoy), fruor z ; — 

- away, adimo, z emi, emptU7?i ; 

— in charge, accipio ; 3 — 
part in, co7nmimico ; x — claim 
for one's self, sibi adrogare ; 

— prisoner, capere; — refuge, 
confugere; — up arms, ar7na 
capere j — by the hand, manu 
arripere; (follow), sequij — 
seriously, in serium vert ere. 

task, opus, eris (n.). 

talents, ingenium, i (use sing.). 

tall, procerus. 

taunt, obicio, z exprobro^ 

teach, doceo, 2 ui. 

teacher, doctor, oris. 

tear away, detrako* xi, ctum. 

tear (n.), lacrima, ae. 

tell, nuntio, 1 narro, x dico? 

temperance, te7nperantia, ae, 

conti7ientia, ae. 
tempest, te7npestas, atis (f.). 
temple, te77iplu7n, i, aedes, is (f.). 
terms, condiciones, tun (f.). 
terrify, terreo? ui, itu7n. 
testimony, testimo7tium, i. 
than, quam, (or abl.). 
thanks, grates, gratiae, arum. 
that, ut, quod (see pp. 54, JS) > 

— not, nej but — , quin. 



8 



"4 



Latin Composition . 



the, often expressed by tile. 
thea£re,scaena, ae. thence, inde. 
then, turn, inde, deinde, igitur. 
there, ibi. — their, eorum, situs. 
therefore, itaque, qua de causa. 
thing, res, rei (f.). 
think, putoj- reor? ratus. 
this, hie, iste; often qui. 
this day's, hodiernus. 
thong, lorum, i. 
though, quamquam, etiam si. 
thoughtlessness, temeritas, atis 

(F.). 

thought, consilium, i. 
thousand, mille (§ IS, I. e) ; one 

of a — , unus de multis. 
threaten, minor, minitor l (dat. 

of person) ; impendeo 2 (dat.). 
thronged, refertus. 
through, per, propter, or by abl. 
throw, jacio, z jeci, j actum j — 

off, abicio* jecu 
thrown (down), dejectus. 
thus, ita. 
Tiber, the river, Tiberis, is (m.) ; 

the river-god, Tiberinus, L 
tall, donee. — timidity, formido. 
time, tempus, oris (n.) ; for some 

— , aliquamdiu j from — to — , 

inter dum; from that — forth, 

jam inde; at the same — , 

tamen, nihilominus. 
tired, fessus ; to be — , taedet 

(§ 50, 4. c). [dative, 

to, ad (ace.) ; often sign of 
to-day, hodie, nunc, 
together, una- 
toil, labor, oris (m.). 
tomb, sepulcrum, i. [crastinus. 
to-morrow, eras; of — , (adj.), 
tongue, lingua, ae. 



too, nimis ; or express by com- 
parative/ (also), quoque. 

tooth, dens, tis (m.) ; grip of — , 
morsus, us (m.). 

torch, fax,facis (f.). 

torment (n.), tormentum, i; cru- 
ciatus, iis. 

torture (n.), tormentum, i. 

towards, erga (ace), ad, versus. 

town, municipium, i; oppidum, 
i; (village), vicus, i (m). 

trace, duco. z 

traitor, proditor, oris. 

tranquillity, tranquillilas, atis 

(F.). 

transaction, res, rei (f.). 
transgress, 7ninus obediens esse 

(dat.). 
travel, iterfacere. 
traveller, viator, oris. 
traverse, transire. 
treachery, perfidia, ae. 
treason, majestas, atis (§ 50, 

4. b). 
treasury, aerarium, i. 
treat, tracto ; l — as a son, in 

filii loco habere. 
treatise, liber, bri. 
treaty, indutiae s arum. 
tree, arbor. — trial, tormenta. 
tribe, tribus, us; gens, tis (f.). 
tribune, tribunus, i. 
trifling, minimus. 
tripod, cortina, ae. [dis (f.). 
triumph, triumphus, i; laus, 
triumphal, triumphalis, e* 
troops, jnilites, um. 
trouble, res adversae (plur.). 
troubled, to be, laborare. 
Troy, Troja, ae; of — , Tro~ 

janus, a, um. 



Vocabulary. 



"5 



true, verus, a, umj quidem. 
trust, confido? 
trumpet, tuba, ae. 
truth, Veritas, at is (f.). 
turf, caespites, tint (plur.). 
turn, verto, 1 ti, sumj — away, 

aver tor j 3 — out-of-doors, 

for as eicio* 
tusk, dens, tis (m.). 
two, duo j where only — , ambo. 
tyranny, dominatio, onis (f.). 
tyrant, tyr annus, i. 



U. 

Ufentine, Ufens, tis, 
unambitious, minime ambiti- 

osus. 
uncle, avunculus, u 
uncover, detego. 2 
undaunted, invictus. 
under, sub (ace. or abl.). 
understand, recte aestimo, 1 

teneo. 2 
undertake, adgredior, suscipio. 
undoubtedly, sine dubio. 
unfeeling, durus. 
ungrateful, ingratus. 
unjust, injustus. 
unimpeached, integer incol- 

umisque. 
unhappy, miser, era, um. 
universal, co7nmunis, e. 
unless, nisi. — until, donee. 
unprincipled, improbus. 
unprofitable, inutilis, e. 
unrighteous, iniquus. 
unworthy, indignus. 
upbraid, obicio, 3 jeci. 
upper classes, nobiles. 



upon (as living — ), ex. 
upward, sursum. 
urge, suadeo 2 (dat.). 
use (v.), utor, 3 usus. 
use (n.), usus, us (m.). 
useless, inutilis, e. 
utmost (adj.), maximus. 



vast, ingens, tis. 

vainly ; frustra^ nequicquam. 

Valerian, Valerius, a, um. 

valor, virtus, utis (f.). 

value, pretium, i: 

Veians, Veientes, turn. 

vein, vena, ae. 

vengeance, ulcisci ; of — , use 

gerund. 
venture, audeo? ausus. 
very, per, in compos. (§ 17, 5. 

d) ; — same, ipse, a, umj gra- 

viter; often by superl. 
vice, vitium, i. — vessel, navis. 
victim, hostia, victima, ae (F.). 
victor, victorious, victor, oris 

(m.) ; victrix, icis (f.). 
victory, victoria, ae. 
view, cogitatio, onis (f.) ; sen- 

tentia, ae ; to be with a — , 

pertinere ad. 
vigorous, acer, crisj nervosus. 
violence, vis (f.). 
violent, violentus. 
violently, vehementer, vu 
virtue, virtus, utis (f.). 
voluntary, voluntarius. 
vote, sententia, ae. 
vow, votum, i. 



n6 



Latin Composition. 



w. 

•wages, merces, edis (f.). 

■wait, maneo? mansij — for, 
exspecto. 1 

wall (of house), paries, etis (m.) ; 
(of city), murus, moenia. 

wander, vagor} 

want to, opus esse (dat. of per- 
son and abl. of thing) ; to be 
in — of, indigere (gen. of 
thing). 

war, bellum, / (n.). 

war-horse, equus militaris. 

warlike, bellicosus. 

warrior, vir fortis. 

warn, moneo; 2 warning, monitus. 

wasted, confectus. 

watch, observo. 1 

water, aqua, ae. 

wa.ve,Jluctus, us (m.). 

way, via, ae j a. good — , ali- 
quantum. 

weaken, debilito. 

wealth, copiae, arum. 

wealthy, locupies, tis. 

wear, gero, 3 gessi, gestum. 

well, bene. 

what ? quid? — sort ? qualisf 

whatever, quod, with indie. 

when, cum, ubi, ut (p. 67). 

whenever, cu?n (with indie). 

where, ubi, quo, qua (§ 41, 2. 
a.). [sive. 

whether, utrum . . an, sive . . 

which, rel., quod; qua/is, e; int, 

while, cum. [quis, uter (p. 17). 

white, albus. 

•whither, quo. 

who, qui j whoever, quisquis, 
quicumque, siquis. 



who? (interrog.) quis (see p. 

17). 

•whole, totus (gen. ius). 

wholly, plane, omnino. 

why, cur, quam ob rem. 

wide, latus j (of measure), in 
latitudinem. 

wicked, sceleratus. 

wife, uxor, oris. 

wild, ferus, immanis, e ; — 
beast, /era j — fig, caprificus. 

will, volo, velle, volui. 

willing, paratus ad (p. j6). 

willingly, volens, tis. 

win, concilio, 1 parioj 3 — tri- 
umph, triumphum ago? 

wind, ventus, i. 

window, fenestra, ae. 

winter (v.), hiberno. 1 

wisdom, consilium, i, 

wish, volo, cupio 3 op to} 

•with, cum j with me, mecu?n; 
— himself, &c., secum. 

within, intra, inter ; of time, 
often expressed by abl. (see 
p. 40). 

without, sine; — doing a thing 
(see p. 60). 

wolf, lupus, i (m.) ; lupa, ae (f.). 

woman, mulier, is. 

wonder (n.), miraculum, i. 

wont, to be, soleo, 2 solitus. 

woodpecker, picus, i. 

word, verbum , i. 

work, ministerium, i. 

world, orbis terrarum; homi- 
nes, um. 

worn out (by age), aetate con- 
fectus. 

worship, colo, z colui f cultum. 

worst, pessimus. 



Vocabulary . 



117 



■worthy, dignus (with abl.). 
•would, &c., see p. 63. 
wound, vulnus, eris (n.). 
wounded, vulneratus. 
wretched, miser, era, um. 
write, scribo, z ft si, ptu?n; 

down, conscribo? 
wrong, pravus. 



year, annus, 1. 

yesterday, heri ; of — , hester- 
nus. [etiam. 

yet, tatnen; not — , nondum 
you (sing.), tu; (plur.), vos. 



young, ju vents, is; — man, 
adulescens, tis; juvenis, is; 
— of birds, pullus, u 

younger, minor, oris. 

your (of sing, subject), tints, a, 
um; vester (of plur.). 

yourself, ipse (tu), te. 

yourselves, ipsi, vos. 

youth, puer, eri ; juventus, tu- 
tis (f.) ; young man, adules- 
cens, tis. 



Zama (adj.), Zamensis, e. 
zeal, alacritas, a tis (f.). 



PART SECOND. 



INTRODUCTION. 

The Exercises given in Part I. have been chosen chiefly 
to illustrate the constructions of Latin syntax, and the proper 
words and phrases have been given in a special Vocabulary. 
In those which are to follow, the student is expected to make 
the selection of words and phrases for himself, and must rely 
on his general knowledge of the language, or on a general 
Lexicon. An English-Latin lexicon should, however, be 
used only for the suggestion of words which do not occur to 
the mind from a knowledge of the language. The real guide 
should be the Latin Lexicon, in connection with passages 
cited in it, or else remembered. 

A few points should be put clearly before the mind at 
starting. 

I. Choice of the Word or Phrase. 

Single words, in all languages, commonly express not 
single ideas, but groups of ideas. They cover, as it were, 
not points, but surfaces. The surface thus covered by parallel 
words is very often quite different in different languages. 
Words do not coincide, but only partly overlap ; and 
hardly any word in one language is exactly equivalent in 
meaning to the apparently corresponding word in another. 
Thus the English bold and boldness correspond most nearly 
to the Latin audax and audacia; but these often have an 
idea of blame, which is not in the English words : homo 



120 Latin Composition. 

audax is a man bad as well as bold. On the other hand, 
the verb to lie in English implies a moral offence, while 
the corresponding Latin mentior conveys no such opprobrium, 
though it may be conveyed by the context. The word law 
answers most nearly to lex, which, however, is limited to 
written or statute law; so that the abstract expression the 
law (including common law) would have to be rendered 
by jura atque leges, or some similar phrase. 

Besides this difference in the original meaning of words, 
their derived or figurative meanings are often very widely 
different. Thus the English noun form may mean things 
so different as shape (jigura), manner (modus), vain show 
(simulatio), ceremony (ritus), a bench at school {scamnum), or 
a hare's bed (latibulum). The adjective right may be 
aequus (a right decision), aptus (a right selection), or dexter 
(on the right hand). The verb to raise may be folio, levo (to 
lift), augeo (as of wages), struo (of buildings), cieo, moveo (to 
raise pity, &c), co7iscribo (of troops), colo (of grain and fruits). 
On the other hand, the Latin tollo may mean to lift, exalt, 
take away, weigh (anchor), destroy ; signum is a mark or sign, 
signal, standard, statue, constellation ; gravis is heavy, weighty 
(dignified or influential), burdensome, offensive, sickly. 

This difference is especially to be noted in the case of 
English words derived from Latin. The apparent likeness, 
in such cases, is one of the commonest sources of error. 
Usually the corresponding Latin words are much the more 
energetic and forcible, since they are the growth of roots 
still living and vigorous in the language. Thus the Latin 
labor is toil or hardship ; deprimere (" depress "), to sink, 
as a ship in battle ; opprimere (" oppress "), to overwhelm, or 
smother; supprimere (" suppress "), /# trample down. The 
judicious selection of a Latin term will thus frequently restore 
to life a dead or fated metaphor ; while a vague or general 
term — such as is often given in English by a Latin deriva- 
tive — may require to be rendered in Latin by some qualify- 
ing phrase. 

Hence, in translating into Latin, — 



Part II. Introduction. 121 

a. Notice carefully the exact shade of meaning in which the 
English word is used, and see that the Latin word covers the 
ground. In securing this, it is often necessary to notice the other 
words in the sentence. Thus drown may often be rendered by 
submergere, because the rest of the sentence shows what is meant ; 
but if not, then the idea of death by drowning must be brought out 
by some explanatory word or phrase. 

h. Observe the cases where Latin makes' distinctions of meaning 
not recognized in English. Thus, city may be either urbs (a 
collection of streets, houses, &c), oppidum (a fortified or garrison 
town), or civitas (a political community). An enemy may be 
inimicus (a personal enemy), or hostis (a public foe). Glory may 
be either fa?na (reputation in common talk), dectis (outward splen- 
dor or distinction), laus (the approval and praise of men), or gloria 
(the more general word). 

c. In a far greater number of cases, English makes distinctions 
not recognized in Latin.* For example, society, participation, 
association, partnership, alliance, and several other words, are 
represented by the Latin societas. If it is not clear from the 
context which is meant, some descriptive or limiting word must be 
added : as, societas generis htimani, societas et communication 
societas et foedus, and so on (see e 9 below). 

cc. In general, the Latin prefers to make a person subject rather 
than a thing, a thing rather than an abstraction, so that an idea 
is often expressed in Latin from a point of view different from our 
own. Thus, — 

Caesar stationed the auxiliaries ... so that they might make 
a display, alamos constituit . . . ut ad speciem 
alariis uteretur. 

So to serve for any thing may often be rendered by UTI, governing 
the noun which expresses the English subject (but compare Gr. 
§ 51, 5). 

d. In many expressions we find an English phrase of two or 
more words rendered in Latin by a single term ; as, a sense of 
duty, officium ; a feeling of shame, pudor ; presence of mind, 
animus (alone, but also with praesens or praesentia). 

* English employs, roughly, about five times as large a vocabulary as Latin, with a far 
smaller proportion of regular derivatives. 



122 Latin Coinfosition. 

dd. As in all languages, there are in Latin many technical 
or semi-technical expressions, which must be carefully noticed. 
Such a word or phrase will often be suggested by some word in the 
English expression from the Latin equivalent of which it is often 
a regular derivative. 

e. There are many words in English which have no natural 
equivalent whatever in Latin. These must be analyzed, and ex- 
pressed by phrases ; often substituting special and concrete words 
for general and abstract ones ; and oftener putting the force of an 
adjective into a verb, or noun, or adverb. Thus, — 

i. Accomplice, scelerum (consiliorum) conscius. 

2. Art, artes fingendi et pingendi. 

3. Conscience, conscius animus* 

4. Historian, rerum gestarum scriptor. 

5. Inspiration, divinus quidam adflatus. 

6. Lawgiver, qui leges poniU 

7. Panic, res trepida. 

8. Patriotism, stadium rei publicae, and the like. 

9. Rhetoric, rhetorum praecepta. 

(Stereotyped expressions, however, of this kind, should be avoided.) 

/. Latin generally prefers to express in concrete terms what 
English gives in abstract (compare h). Thus, strength, vigor, 
energy, pungency, may be expressed by sanguis, lacerti, nervi, 
aculeij expression or sentiment by vox. So, too, the phrases, — 

1. I do not fear a bad man's anger, improbum irqtum 

non metuo* 

2. The assassination of Caesar seemed to many a glorious act, 

occisus Caesar multis pulcherrimum facinus 
videbatur* 

3. Every evil at its birth seems harmless, omne malum 

nascens innocuum videtur. 

4. The world hates ingratitude, omnes immemorem bene- 

ftcii oderunt. 

5. There is a wide difference between learning and ignorance, 

plurimum interest inter doctum et rudem. 

6. Firmness and dignity are characteristics of true courage, 

constantem et gravem eum esse voliimns quern 
fortem dicimus* 



Part II Introduction. 123 

7. He had read no poetry, and knew nothing of oratory, 
nullum, poetam legerat, nullum oratorem noverat. 

ff. Nouns, especially abstracts, are less common in Latin than 
in English. Hence abstract qualities, if connected with the sub- 
ject, must often be rendered by adjectives or participles ; if con- 
nected with the predicate, by adverbs. Names of actions (verbal 
abstracts) are expressed by verbs, colored if necessary by adverbs 
or adverbial phrases. 

g. Even the few abstract nouns found in Latin are constantly 
made concrete, especially by using them in the plural : as, 

1. The life of all, vitae omnium. 

2. The immortality of the soul, aeternitas animorum* 

3. The cold of the winters, frigora hiberna. 

4. Some cases of superiority, quaedam excellentiae. 

5. Sharing in misfortune (of several persons), societates 

calamitatum. 

h. The two languages often differ in their modes of express- 
ing the Degree of a quality. Thus, as much or equally is often 
rendered by no less ; and conversely, less by not so 7nuch, ?nore by 
so much as no other, and the like, according to convenience of 
expression in the particular case. 

i. Certain literal for?ns of speech are frequent in Latin, present- 
ing the object as it appears to the eye or comes at first hand before 
the thought. Thus, — 

1. They refresh themselves with food and sleep, corpora 

cibo somnoque curant. 

2. To relieve one from superstition or disease, aut religione 

animos aut corpora morbis levare. 

3. In the face of the world, ante omnium oculos. 

4. A musical ear detects very slight discords, musicorum 

aures vel minima dissona sentiunt. 

5. I never lose sight of him, numquam ab eo oculos 

deicio. So — 
7. The tribunes were especially alarmed, praecipuus pavor 
tribunos invaserat. (Here the personification adds to the 
vigor of the expression; so, contemptor ani??itts i tiro exercittis, &c). 

ii. The same tendency to literalness is seen in the use of a 
second noun (" hendiadys "), where English uses an adjective, a 
phrase, or a compound (compare Part I. p. 5). Thus, — 



124 Latin Composition. 

i. Rational instruction, ratio et doctrina. 

2. An eye-witness, spectator et testis. 

3. A shameful disaster, ignominia et calamitas. 

4. Art-culture, artificium et expolitio. 

J. English abounds in effete metaphors — rhetorical expressions 
(noun or verb) — which have lost their force and become mere 
conventional phrases : these must often be expressed by some 
simple word, or wholly omitted, and the bare substance of the 
thought given in Latin (compare l 9 m 9 below). Thus, — 

1. Homer flourished many years before, Homerus multis 

ante annis fuit (also, floruit). 

2. Virtue in solitude could not reach its highest development, 

virtus solitaria ad ea quae summa sunt non 
potuit pervenire. 

Examples may be found in such nouns as object, point, feature, 
circumstance, instance, capacity, person, expression, elements ; in 
the verbs observe, remark, ?nanage, continue, discuss, avail one's 
self, assure, represent, allude, qualify, enhance, convey, embrace, 
exist, constitute, deliver, succeed in, manage to; and particularly in 
adverbial and prepositional phrases, such as regarding, concerning, 
with the view of (ut), in reference to (ad), on account of (ob, 
propter), in spite of all that (tamen), &c. 

te. Latin often prefers an abstract noun to an adjective ; thus 
mnking the quality the main thing, and (as it were) embodying it. 
Thus, — 

1. Isocrates had many pupils of high rank, Isocvafes nobili- 

taie discipulorum floruit. 

2. It takes much water to quench a furious blaze, vis flam- 

mae aquae multitudine opprimitur. 

3. Orators are and always have been few, magna oratorum 

est sempej'que fait paucitas. 

4. A gloomy winter was followed by a sickly summer, tristem 

Itiemem pesHbus aestas excepit. 

5. "Weak men were overcome with superstition (i.e. because 

they were weak), superstitio hominum inibeciZlitatem 
occupavit. 

6. "When the pleasant spring-time is past, then come summer 

and autumn, praeterita verni tempovis suavitate, 
aestas venit et auctumnus. 



Part II. Introduction. 125 

I. The simplicity of Latin requires that force or color shall be 
given to an expression but once, whether in subject or predicate ; 
and that neutral or unemphatic phrases shall be used in other 
parts of the clause (compare / and h). Thus, — 

1. Immense indignation prevailed, indignatio ingens erat. 

2. But how vast the privilege, for the soul to live ! At Mud 

quant I est, animum viveref 

3. In both cases he acted with dignity, utrumque egit 

graviter, 

4. All incidents of life which happen in accordance with 

nature, omnia quae secundum naturam flunt. 

5. For even these tributes are honorable, haec enim ipsa 

sunt honorabilia. ■ 

To the same habit of mind may be referred the frequent use 
of such colorless words as ars, genus, locus, ratio, res, sententia, 
studitim, vis ; afficio, ago, capio, facio, habeo, possum, sunt, versor 
(see Lexicon under these words). 

II. An English sentence is often filled out with words not 
strictly necessary to the sense, but inserted for fulness or rotundity 
of expression. In general, it is unclassical to express any thing 
which is obvious from the context, or to repeat what has once been 
said in other words in the same clause or phrase (compare I). 

m. English narrative abounds in varied descriptive phrases 
alluding to an idea or person once expressed : these must be 
omitted in Latin ; or, if something is necessary to prevent ambigu- 
ity, a simple pronoun is used. Proper names are repeated, but not 
so often as in English. Thus, the words italicized 'in the following 
extract (recounting the death of the elder Pliny) would be omitted 
in a Latin version of the passage, or else expressed by pronouns : — 

"As the shades of evening gathered, the brightness of the flames 
became more striking ; but, to calm the panic of those around him, the 
philosopher assured them that they arose from cottages on the slope, 
which the alarmed natives had abandoned to the descending flakes of 
fire. . . . The sea was agitated, and abandoned by every bark. Pliny, 
wearied and perplexed, refused to stir farther ; while his companions, 
all but two body-slaves, fled in terror. Some, who looked back in their 
flight, affirmed that the old man rose once with the help of his attendants, 
but immediately fell again, overpowered, as it seemed, with the deadly 
vapors." 



126 Latin Composition. 

n. But if the allusive or descriptive word is essential to the idea 
to be conveyed, it must be given outright in a clause or special 
expression : as, 

But the veteran could not be deceived : ille autem — ut 
qui esset rei bellicae peritissimus — illudi non 
potuit. 

o. The tendency in Latin to a direct form of statement requires 
that the main idea should be asserted directly in the main clause, 
and not hidden in a relative clause, participle, or adverb (compare 
t;). The necessary emphasis is to be given by position. For 
example, — 

i. A fresh blow came, that crushed the city, clades nova 
civitatem adflixit* 

2. It is these that delight in flattery, has delectat adsen- 

tatio. 

3. You are the very man I was looking for, t e ipsum quae- 

rebam* 



II. Structure of the Sentence. 

The best English writers give a connected story or argu- 
ment in short clear sentences, each distinct from the rest, 
and saying one thing by itself. In Latin, on the contrary, 
the story or argument is viewed as a whole ; and a logical 
relation among all its parts is carefully indicated, so that the 
whole forms a compact group. For example, — 

But gloomy silence and voiceless Sed silentium triste ac tacita maes- 

sorrow had paralyzed the minds of titia ita deflixit omnium animos, ut y 

the inhabitants. For very dread p rae metu obUti quid re linquerent 

they forgot what they were leaving {d secum ferren ^ deficiente con . 

behind, what they were carrying .,. ., ■ ,.. ,. 

... „ T> , /. , . , siho. rogttantesque alii altos, nunc 

with them. With no fixed idea, z 

, . . . , , . in liminibus starenL nunc errabundi 

and inquiring every man of his ' 

neighbor, they were at one mo- domos suas > " lii ™ u ™ illud visuri > 

ment standing at their thresholds, pervagarentur. 

at another wandering restlessly 

through their homes to see the end. 

p. In particular, so much of a statement as can be so treated, 
with its attendant circumstances, modifications, &c, is put into a 



Part II Introduction. 127 

single complex sentence, called a Period (§ 76, 4; compare s)- 
Thus, — 

Qui cum, multis circa finitimos populos legationibus terra marique nequic- 
qua?n missis, nisi quod ex Etruria haud ita multum frumenti advectum 
est, nullum motnenttim an7ionae fecisset ; et, revolutus ad dispe7isatio7iem 
inopiae, profiteri cogendo frumentum et vendere quod usu me7istruo super- 
esset, fraudandoque parte diurni cibi servitia, criminando inde et obiciendo 
irae populi frumentarios, acerba inquisitioiie aperiret magis quam levaret 
inopiam ; multi ex plebe spe amissa potius quam tit cruciarentur trahendo 
animam, capitibus obvolutis se in Tiberim praecipitaverunt 

Here the principal fact expressed in the main clause is, that 
many of the people drowned themselves rather than submit to slow 
starvation ; while the cruel policy that drove them to it is described 
in subordinate clauses. In English it might be told as follows : — 

He sent a number of embassies by land and sea to the surrounding 
nations, but effected no result beyond the importation of an insignificant 
amount of corn from Etruria, and produced no movement in the market. 
On applying himself to the administration of the meagre supplies, he 
compelled people to make a report of the corn they held, and to offer 
for sale all that exceeded the necessary supply of their wants for a 
month. He robbed the slaves of part of their daily rations, and pro- 
ceeded to libel the corn-merchants, and expose them to the fury of the 
populace. By this galling inquisitorial policy he revealed rather than 
relieved the distress. Many of the lower orders, in utter despair, 
bandaged the eyes and threw themselves into the Tiber, rather than 
endure the torment of a prolonged existence. 

q. Even when long periods are not used, still the logical connec- 
tion is indicated by the use of connecting Relatives (see § 48, 4) ; 
or (qq) by Correlative words and Particles, especially idem, itaque, 
autem, enim, vero, quidein. 

r m But, in coordinate clauses, the copulative conjunctions are 
omitted oftener than in English (asyndeton) ; the connection being 
made clear by the Position of words and by Antithesis. 

s. Of two coordinate clauses with and, the less important is 
merged in the other by the aid of participles and subordinate 
phrases. In such cases a change of subject should be avoided. 

t. A change of subject should be marked by the introduction 
of a pronoun, if the new subject has been already mentioned in the 
preceding sentence. But (tt) the needless use of pronouns may 
be avoided by change of structure. 



128 Latin Corn-position. 

u* A noun should be kept in the same case if possible. 

In illustration of these points, compare the following examples : — 

i. Then he called them together, and having briefly addressed them 
waited a little, and led them out with him. Tunc convocatos* cum 
brcviter admonuisset, paulisper moratus secum eduxit. 

2. The plan was universally approved, and its execution was intrusted 
to the consul. Cunctis rem approbantibus," negotium co?isuli datur. 

3. This matter was soon accomplished, and the legions returned to 
winter-quarters. Eo celeriter confecto negotiof in hiberna legiones redierunt. 

4. When Midas the Phrygian was a child, and asleep, some ants piled 
grains of corn upon his lips. Midae Mi Phrygio? cum puer esset, dormienti 
formicae in os tritici grana congesserunt. 

5. They came to the king at Pergamus. He received the ambassadors 
kindly, and conducted them to Pessinus. Pergamum ad regem venerunt, 
qui q legatos comiter exceptos Pessinuntem deduxit. 

6. If I cannot crush the pain, I will hide it. Dolorem u si non potero 
frangere, occultabo. 

7. When the barbarians saw that he had escaped the flames, they 
hurled darts at him from a distance, and killed him. Quern* ut barbari 
incendium effugisse viderunt, telis eminus emissis interfecerunt. 

8. When Zopyrus, who professed to be able to read every one's 
character from his outward appearance, had at a party made a large 
catalogue of moral defects to reproach Socrates with, the rest laughed 
him to scorn ; but Socrates came to his assistance. Cum multa in 
conventu vitia collegisset in eum Zopyrus, qui se naturam cujusque ex forma 
perspicere profitebatur, derisus est a ceteris, ab ipso autem Socrate sub/e- 
vatus u 

9. For they believe that these divinities were born in the realm, and 
that grain was first discovered in their land ; and that Libera, whom 
they also call Proserpine, was carried off from the grove of Enna. It is 
said that Ceres, in the course of her anxious search for her daughter, 
kindled her torch at the fires that blaze from Etna's summit ; and, hold- 
ing it before her, wandered over the whole world. Nam et natas esse has 
in iis locis deas, et fruges in ea terra primu?n repertas esse arbitrantur, et 
raptam esse Liber am, quam eamdem Proserpinam vocant, ex Hennensium 
nemore. Quam cum investigare et conquirere Ceres vellet? dicitur inflam- 
masse taedas iis ignibus qui ex Aetnae vertice erumpunt ; quas sibi cum ipsa 
praeferrety orbem omnem peragrasse terrarum. 

v. In turning loose sentences into periods, be sure to get the 
main idea in the main clause, and keep the other clauses in their 
proper relations (compare o). In general, the main subject or 



Part II. Introduction. 129 

object must be put in the main clause, not in the subordinate ones. 

Thus — 

• 

1. When Hannibal had reviewed his auxiliary forces, he set out for 
Gades. Hannibal \ cu??i recensnisset auxilia, Gades profectus est. 

2. The augur Tiresias is described by the poets as a philosopher, and 
is never represented as bewailing his blindness. Augurem Tiresiam, 
quern sapientem fingunt poetae> numquam inducunt deplorantem caecitatem 
suam. 

3. The Volscians found that, now they were severed from every other 
hope, there was but little hope in prolonging the conflict. In addition to 
other disadvantages, they had engaged on a spot ill adapted for fighting, 
and worse for flight. Cut to pieces on every side, they abandoned the 
contest and cried for quarter. After surrendering their commander and 
delivering up their arms, they passed under the yoke; and with one 
garment each were sent to their homes, covered with disgrace and 
defeat. Volsci exiguam spem in armis, alia undique abscissa, cum ten- 
tasseut, praeter cetera adversa, loco quoque iniquo ad pugnam congressi, 
iniquiore ad fugam, cum ab omni parte caederentur, ad preces a certamine 
versi, dedito imperatore traditisque armis y sub jugum missi, cum singulis 
vestimentis, ignominiae cladisque pleni dimittuntur* . 

Here the main thought is the return of the Volscians : the cir- 
cumstances of the surrender, &c, are put in the several subordinate 
clauses. 

vv. The clauses should be arranged in the natural order of time 
or logical sequence, — cause before result; purpose, manner, and 
the like, before the act. (There are, however, many exceptions to 
this rule, from the tendency to put the more important first or else 
last.) 

w. Latin has a great fondness for antithesis and sharp contrasts, 
setting one wor'd phrase or clause against another. This tendency 
will often control the order of words, phrases, or clauses. 

a% As to the order of words : let the main word be seized and 
put at the beginning (see Part I. p. 2). By this means the drift 
of the clause or sentence may almost always be indicated in 
advance. 

y. A verb in the active voice is often rendered in Latin by the 
passive, and conversely, to avoid change of subject, or to secure a 
personal or concrete subject rather than an impersonal or abstract 
one (compare cc 9 with Lesson 20). 

9 



130 Latin Composition. 

Z. There are many idiomatic phrases which are to be rendered 
by Particles in Latin, especially in colloquial expressions, such as : 
well now, atque; to be sure, by the way, in fact (also 
why !), quidem; for, you see, etenimj and after all, atque; 
considering, utj I say, igitur. Yes may be given by etiam, 
maxime, vero, with a pronoun, or by repeating the verb ; no by 
immo, non, mmime, or, repeating a word with the negative (see 
Grammar, § 71, 3. a). These can only be learned by practice with 
the Latin particles. 



III. Idiomatic Phrases. 

The following examples include most of the idiomatic 
usages which have already been explained, together with some 
others, brought together here for convenient reference : — 

1. To act as a mother, matrem se gerere (Part I. page 3). 

2. I remember when a boy, puer me7nini. 

3. Fabius in his second consulship, Fabius consul iterum. 

4. A continued series of events, continuatio et series rerum (p. 5). 

5. Both consuls were slain, uterque consul occisus est (p. 7). 

6. He came against his will, invitus venit. 

7. He was the first to see, primus vidit (p. 8). 

8. The rest of the crowd, reliqua multitudo. 

9. All men praise bravery, o?nnes fortia laudant (p. 9). 

10. The fight at Cannae, pugna Cannensis. 

11. Another man's house, aliena domus. 

12. I prefer the art of memory to that of forgetfulness, memo7'iae 

artem quam oblivionis malo (p. 12). 

13. The army of Caesar defeated that of Pompey^ Caesaris exer- 

citus Poinpeianos vicit. 

14. That [just mentioned] is a great argument, but this is a 

greater, that, &c, hoc magnum est argumentum, illud 
autem majus, quod, etc. (p. 13). 

15. It is just three years, tres anni ipsi sunt. 

16. The book you gave me, liber quern mihi dedisti (p. 15). 

17. Caesar the conqueror of Gaul, Caesar qui Gallium vicit. 

18. A class, of which there is great lack, cujus generis magna est 

paucitas. 

19. Those evils which we suffer with many seem to us lighter, 

quae mala cum mtdtis patimur ea nobis leziora videniur. 



Part II. Introduction. 131 

20. There were as many opinions as men, quot homines tot erant 

sententiae (p. 16). 

21. What can happen to any [one] man can happen to any man 

[whatever], cuivis potest accidere quod cuiquam potest. 

22. Each army was in sight of the other, uterque utrique erat 

exercitus in conspectu (p. 19). 

23. The boy's name is Marcus, puero nomen est Marco (p. 26). 

24. It is the part of wisdom, est sapientis. 

25. In silence, tacite (or silentio), p. 30. 

26. I esteem Plato very highly, but the truth more, Platonem per- 

magni sed veritate7n pluris aestimo. 

27. You have robbed me of my property, bona mihi abstulisti. 

28. Much more rich than wise, multo divitior quam sapienlior. 

29. The more virtuously one lives the less he will injure others, 

quanto quis vivit honestius tanto minus nocebit aliis. 

30. A means of guarding against troubles, cautio inco?nmodorum. 

31. Jealousy of the Senate, invidia senatoria (p. 35). 

32. More learning than wisdom, plus doctrinae quam sapientiae. 

33. You ought to have gone, te ire oportuit. 

34. Within four days after this was done, the matter was reported 

to Chrysogonus in Sulla's camp at Volaterrae, quadriduo 
quo haec gesta sunt res ad Chrysogonum in castra L. Sullae 
Volaterras defer tur (p. 41). 

35. To fight on horseback, ex equo pugnare (p. 43). 

36. He would often play with his children, saepe cum pueris lude- 

bat (p. 46). 

37. I begin to feel like dancing, /#/# lubet saltare. 

38. The commander is relieved, imperatori succeditur (p. 49). 

39. Men do not gather grapes from thorns, ex sentibus uvae non 

percipiuntur. 

40. Socrates was put to death by his fellow-citizens, Socratem cives 

sui interfecerunt (p. 50) . 

41. Crassus is not envied for his wealth, Crasso divitiae non 

invidentur (p. 51). 

42. What is creation ? Quid est creare f (p. 53). 

43. It was reported that Caesar's house had been attacked (or, An 

attack on Caesar's house was reported), oppugnatio Caesaris 
domus nuntiabatur (p. 55). 

44. In the following winter, ea quae secuta est hieme (p. 57). 

45. Any evil is easily crushed at its birth, omne malum nascens 

facile opprimitur (p. 57). 



132 Latin Composition. 

46. Your being here is agreeable, quod ades (or, te adesse) gratum 

est (p. 60). 

47. I dissuaded him from going, ne iret dissuasi. 

48. I should like to go, ire velim (p. 63). 

49. I could wish he were here, vellem adesset. 

50. What was I to do ? Quid facerem? 

51. Caesar was too merciful to punish his adversaries, clementior 

erat Caesar quam ut inimicos puniret (p. 71). 

52. He was accused of treason against his country, accusatus est 

quod pairiam prodidisset (p. 75). 

53. I have yet to speak of the war against the pirates, reliquum est 

ut de bello dicam piratico (p. 72). 

54. An inestimable value, pretium majus quam ut aestimetur. 

$$. To think that you should have fallen into such grief for me ! 

te in tantas aerumnas propter me incidisse ! (p. 83). 
56. What ! I interrupt you ? egone ut te interpellem ? 
$J. I do not doubt that he will come, non dubito quin venturus sit. 

58. Not to be tedious, ne longus si?n. 

59. It would befit us to mourn, nos dccebat lugere. 

60. I fear he will come, vereor ne veniat. 

61. I fear he will not come, vereor ut veniat 

62. And besides, accedit quod (with indie). 

63. To utter many falsehoods, multa mentiri. 

64. It is worth while, operae pretium est. 

65. He says he has not done it, negat se fecisse, 

66. The many defeats they have sustained, clades quas plurimas 

passi sunt. 

67. To have a prosperous voyage, ex sententia navigare. 

68. Such is his self-command, quae est ejus continentia j or, qua 

est continentia.. 

69. So far as I know, quod scio (sciam). 

70. I never heard him without admiration, numquam eum audivi 

quin admirarer. 

71. I cannot but believe, non possum quin credam. 

72. Nothing prevents your reading the book, nihil obstat quominus 

libru?n legas. 

73. How many are there of you ? Quot estis f 

74. I made him retire, effect ut se reciperet. 

J 5. He deserves to be loved, dignus est qui ametur. 
j6. For many years he has been in my debt, multi sunt anni cum 
in nostro aere est. 



Part II. Introduction. 133 

yj. I congratulate you on your influence with Caesar, gratulor tibi 
quod tantutn apud Caesarem vales. 

78. He was accused of having betrayed the king, accusatus est 

quod regem prodidisset. 

79. Many men admire poems without understanding them, plurimi 

carmina 7nirantur neque ea intelligunt, 

80. Instead of reading he is playing ball, pilam agit cum legere 

debeat. 

81. He makes it his object to serve the country, id agit ut patriae 

inserviat. 

82. He is kind in allowing you to depart, benignus est qui te profi- 

cisci patiatur. 

83. He is too strong to be subdued, fortior est quam ut (quam qui) 

devinci possit. 

84. It was owing to you that I did not come, per te stetit quo- 

minus venirem. 
$5. To aim at a revolution, novis rebus studcre. 

86. To the great danger of the state, cum summo, rei publicae 

periculo. 

87. Love for Cicero, amor Ciceroni's ; Cicero's love of his brother, 

Ciceronis amor fraternus (or, in fratreni). 

88. He spoke so that no one heard, ita locutus est ut nemo audiret 

(that no one might hear, ne quis audiret}. 

89. And no one heard, nee quisquam audivit. 

90. One understands in this way, another in that, alius alio modo 

intellegit. 

91. Both public and private buildings, both sacred and profane, 

aedificia publica, privata, sacra, prof ana. 

92. We had reached the temple of Vesta, ventum erat ad Vestae. 

93. To be brief, quid ' multa f quid plura ? 

94. I find great pleasure in doing this, hoc gratis si?num facio. 

95. I am far from being cruel, procul abest quin saevus sim. 

96. He lost one of his eyes, altero oculo captus est. 

97. You are the very one I was looking for, te ipsum qucerebam. 

98. Not only not of citizen's, but not even of Italian blood, non 

modo civicae sed ne Italicae quidem stirpis. 

99. We are so far from admiring our own matters, that, &c, tan- 

turn abest ut nostra miremur, ut, etc. 

100. We seem to have advanced so far that even in fulness of words 

we are not surpassed by the Greeks, tantum profecisse vide- 
mur ut a Graecis ne verborum qitidem copia vinceremur. 



134 Latin Composition. 

INDEX 

TO THE POINTS CONSIDERED IN THE FOREGOING 
INTRODUCTION. 



I. Choice of the Word. 

PAGE 

a. Shade of meaning in the English word 121 

b. Distinction expressed in Latin words 121 

c. Distinction expressed in English words 121 

cc. Opposite point of view ..121 

d. English phrase equivalent to Latin word 121 

dd. Use of Technical words 122 

e. No Latin equivalent to the English word 122 

f. Concrete form of expression in Latin 122 

ff. Use of abstract terms . 123 

g. Abstracts made concrete in the plural 123 

h. Change of form in expressing Degree 123 

i. Literal forms of expression 123 

ii. Pairs of words (hendiadys) 123 

j. Effete metaphors in English 124 

k. Abstract noun used for adjective 124 

/. Color to be given to the expression but once 125 

//. Words unnecessary to be expressed in Latin 125 

m. Descriptive or allusive expressions 125 

n. Phrase used for descriptive epithet 126 

o. The main idea to be put in the leading clause 126 

II. Form of the Sentence. 

/. Periodic structure of the sentence 126 

q. Use of Relatives as connectives, &c 127 

qq. Use of autem, enim y quidem, vero, idem 127 

r. Connective omitted in coordinate clauses . 127 

s. Coordinate clause made subordinate 127 

t. Use of Pronoun, to mark change of subject 127 

tt. Repetition of Pronoun avoided by change of structure . . . 127 

u. The Noun to be kept in the same case 128 

v. Main idea in the main clause 128 

vv. Clauses to follow the natural or logical order 129 

w. Use of Antithesis 129 

x. Emphatic position of the Main Word 129 

y. Change of Voice 129 

z. Use of Idiomatic Particles . 130 



Exercises in Translation. 135 



EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 

Note. — In the following Exercises, the small letters refer to the 
Notes on Words and Constructions given on pages 121-130; the 
figures, to the Notes at the foot of the page. 

I. Death of Epaminondas. 

' When Epaminondas v had conquered the Lacedae- 
monians at Mantinea, and at the same time perceived 
that he was dying of a mortal wound, as soon as he 
could 11 see, 1 he asked whether his shield were safe. 
When his weeping 11 comrades answered that it was 
safe, he inquired whether the enemy were routed ; 
and q when he heard that 11 question 11 also answered 
according to his wish, 2 he ordered the spear, with 
which he was transfixed, to be drawn out. And so, 
drenched with blood, he expired in the midst of joy 
and victory. 

1 dispicere (a). 2 lit cupiebat. 

II. The Ring of Gyges. 

Gyges, a shepherd of the king, when the earth had 
parted asunder after heavy storms d of rain, descended 
into the aperture, and perceived a brazen horse, in 
whose side there were doors. On opening these, q he 
saw a body a of unusual size, with a gold ring on its 
finger ; this q he drew s off and put on his arm. Then 
he betook himself to the assembly of the shepherds. 
There, when he had turned round the bezel of the 
ring to the palm of his hand, he became 1 invisible, 6 
while qq he saw every thing himself; when he q turned 
the ring back to its place, he was once more visible. 



136 Latin Composition . 

III. Cyrus the Younger. 

When Lysander v the Lacedaemonian had come to 
to Cyrus 11 the Younger, at Sardis, 1 and had brought 
him presents from the allies, Cyrus x treated 1 him with 
great courtesy ff and kindness in other matters, 1 and in 
particular showed him a 2 piece of ground fenced in 
and carefully planted. Whilst q Lysander was admir- 
ing the tallness ff of the trees, the straightness g of their 
rows, and the fragrance of the perfumes which were 
wafted 3 from the flowers, he remarked 3 that he ad- 
mired the ingenuity no less than h the industry of the 
man who had measured 7 out and designed all these 
things. And Cyrus answered him, w Well now, 2 I 
made all the measurements you 4 speak of; they are 
my x rows, my designing ; many even of these trees 
have been planted by my own hand." Then Lysan- 
der, beholding his kingly robe, the comeliness of his 
person, and his attire resplendent with much Persian 
gold and many jewels, said, "They rightly call you 
happy, Cyrus, since in you 5 good fortune is combined 6 
with moral d excellence." 

1 Lesson 17, h. Rem. 2 Lesson 9, 2. a. 3 See Grammar, § 66, 1. c. 
4 Lesson 7, 5. 5 tua. 6 Lesson 20, 4. 



IV. Xenophon's Sacrifice. 

Whilst Xenophon v was performing the customary 
sacrifice, he received the intelligence- 1 that the elder of 
his two sons, named Gryllus, had fallen in the battle 
at Mantinea. He did not, however, consider this a 
sufficient reason cc for omitting 1 the appointed dd worship 
of the gods, but deemed it sufficient to lay aside his 
sacrificial d crown. He then inquired s how he had met 1 

1 Lit. " should be omitted on that account." 



Exercises in Translation. 137 

his death, and was told 1 that he had fallen while fight- 
ing with the utmost bravery. He therefore replaced 
the crown upon his head, calling the gods, to whom 
he was sacrificing, to witness that the pleasure he 
received at the valor of his son exceeded the grief 
occasioned 1 by his death. 

1 Lesson 22, 2. 

V. The Sibylline Books. 

1. An old woman, who was quite unknown to him, 
came to Tarquinius x Superbus, the seventh and last 
king of Rome, bringing with her nine books, which 
she declared to be the oracles of the gods : she said 
she was willing to sell them. Tarquinius inquired 8 the 
price ; the woman m asked an extravagant and enor- 
mous sum. The king m laughed, thinking 1 the old 
woman in her dotage. ff Then she placed a brazier 
with fire in it before him, and burnt up three books 
out of the nine ; and then inquired of the king whether 
he were ready to buy the remaining six at the same 
price. Tarquinius laughed still more, and said that 
beyond a doubt 2 the old woman was out of her senses. 

2. The woman immediately, on the spot, consumed 
three more books, and once more quietly made the 
very same request of the king, namely, to purchase the 
remaining three at the same price. Tarquinius, struck 
by the strangeness of the affair, concluded that such 
persistency and boldness were not to be trifled 1 with ; 
and purchased the three remaining books at just the 
same price that had been asked for all the nine. The 
woman then left 8 the presence of Tarquinius, but 3 
report says was never seen aftefwards. The three 

1 quasi, 2 plane. 3 Lesson 22, 3. c. 



L J 



8 Latin Co7nfosition. 



books were deposited 5 in the receptacle dd for sacred 
things, 4 and were called the Sibylline Books. Certain 
priests consulted them as they would an oracle, when- 
ever the Romans considered that the gods should be 
consulted on behalf of the state. 5 

4 sacrarinm. 5 publice* 

VI. Hannibal and Antiochus. 

When Hannibal on his expulsion g from Carthage 
went to stay with Antiochus, x king of Syria, the king 
passed before 1 him in review 1 immense bodies d of 
troops, which he had equipped with the view of 
making war 2 against the Roman people. He showed 
him an army decorated with gold and silver orna- 
ments ; he also brought on the held 11 scythed chariots 
and elephants with towers, and cavalry glittering with 
their bits, housings, collars, and breast-trappings. 
And then the king, elated at the sight of an army so 
great in numbers and so splendidly equipped, turned 
to Hannibal and remarked, 1 "Do you think this army 
can be matched with that of the Romans? and do you 
think all this will be enough for the Romans?" To 
this Hannibal, jeering at the cowardice and weakness 
of his soldiers, though so splendidly equipped, replied, 1 
" It is my belief ff all this will be enough, quite enough, 
for the Romans, however greedy they may be." 

Nothings certainly, could have been said more 
smart or cutting : the king had put the question g with 
respect j to the number of the army, whether it would 
be a match for that 11 of the Romans ; Hannibal's 
answer g had reference to the booty the Romans 11 
would acquire. 11 

1 Lit. " showed to him in the field." 2 Participle in rus. 



Exercises in Translation. 



VII. The Talking Crow. 



139 



After the victory of Actium, amongst those 1 who 
came 11 to congratulate Augustus* there approached 
him" a certain man, having with him a crow, which he 
had taught to say, Hail, Ccesar, conqueror, emferor! 
Caesar, struck with the cleverness ff of the bird, bought 
it for twenty thousand sesterces. Being greeted in 
a like manner by a parrot, he ordered it to be pur- 
chased. He was 8 amused in the same way with a 
magpie, and it also he bought. These instances 1 
induced 7 a poor shoemaker to teach a crow a similar 
salutation. Often, when 1 wearied with his task, he q 
would say to the bird, when 1 it did not give the re- 
quired 11 answer, "I have lost my time and my trouble." 
At length, however, the crow learned to speak the 
address. Then he brought the bird to Augustus. 
He, however, upon hearing the crow's greeting, re- 
marked, j " I have plenty of such saluters at home." 
Whereupon the crow added, very opportunely, " I 
have lost my time and my trouble." At this Augustus 
laughed/ and ordered the bird to be bought at a still 
higher price 11 than he had hitherto given for the others. 

1 Participle. 

VIII. Hannibal in the Alps. — Arnold. 

Day dawned ; p the main 11 army broke up 1 from its 
camp, x and began to enter the defile; while qq the 
natives, a finding aj their positions 2 occupied by the 
enemy, at first looked on quietly, and offered 3 no dis- 
turbance ff to the march/ But when they saw the 
long narrow line f of the Carthaginian army 11 winding 7 
along the steep mountain side, and the cavalry 1 and 

1 With moveo (i,y). 2 arx (z). 



i^o Latin Composition. 

baggage-cattle struggling at every step, 3 with the 
difficulties 1 of the road, the temptation 1 to plunder 4 
was too strong 1 to be resisted ; 5 and from many points 
of the mountain, above 6 the road, they rushed down 7 
upon the Carthaginians. The confusion was terrible f 
for 8 the road or track was 8 so narrow* that the least 
crowd 9 or disorder pushed 7 the heavily loaded 1 bag- 
gage-cattle down the steep below; 11 and the horses, 
wounded by the barbarians' missiles, and plunging 10 
about wildly 10 in their pain and terror, increased the 
mischief. 11 

3 Relative with insistere (/). 4 Lesson 15, a (/). 5 Impersonal. 
6 imminens. 7 Imperfect. 8 quippe. 9 With siquid. 
10 furo. ll strages (a, i). 

IX. The Embassy of Philip. — Arnold. 

Fortune in another quarter j served the Romans 
no less h effectually . j The qq Macedonian ambassadors, 
after having 7 concluded 1 their treaty with Hannibal at 
Tifata, made their way back into Bruttium in safety, 
and p embarked to return 11 to Greece. But their ship 
was s taken, off the Calabrian coast, by the Roman 
squadron on 1 that 11 station ; and the ambassadors, 
with all their papers, were sent prisoners to Rome. 
A 2 vessel which had been of this company 1 * escaped 
the Romans, 3 and informed 4 the king what had hap- 
pened. He was obliged, therefore, to send a second 
embassy to Hannibal, as the former treaty had never 
reached 17 him ; and although this second mission 1 
went 5 and returned 5 safely, yet the loss of time was 
irreparable, 1 and p nothing could be done till the follow- 
ing year. 6 

1 Rel. clause (cf. Lesson 8, 3). 2 unus (as opposed to the rest). 

8 Lit. "out of the hands of," &c. (/). * defero (dd). 

6 Participle. 6 Lit. " done this year." 



Exercises in Translation. 141 

X. Hannibal near Rome. 

1. The next day, Hannibal, crossing the Anio, 
drew out all his forces in order of battle. dd Nor did 
Flaccus and his consuls decline the contest. The 
troops on both sides having been drawn up to try 11 the 
chances of a 1 battle, in which the city of Rome was to 
be the conqueror's prize, a violent shower mingled 
with hail so disordered both the lines, that the troops, 
scarcely able 11 to hold their arms, retired into their 
camps, with less h apprehension of the enemy than of 
any thing else. On the following day, also, a similar 
storm separated the armies marshalled on the same 
ground. After they had retired to their camps, an 
extraordinary calm and tranquillity arose. This cir- 
cumstance was held providential 2 among the Cartha- 
ginians ; and an expression f of Hannibal's is said to 
have been heard, Cf That at one moment j the inclina- 
tion, at another the opportunity, 3 of becoming master 
of Rome, was not allowed 4 him." 

2. Other contingencies 1 also, the one important, 1 the 
other insignificant, 1 diminished his hopes. The im- 
portant one was, that, while he was encamped 5 under 
arms near the walls of the city, he heard that troops 
had marched out with colors flying, 11 as a reinforce- 
ment for Spain ; while qq the less significant circum- 
stance 11 was that it was discovered, from one of his 
prisoners, that at this very time the very ground on 
which he was encamped had been sold, with no 
diminution^ of price on that account.- 1 Indeed, it 
appeared so great an insult g and indignity that a 
purchaser should have been discovered at Rome for 

1 See Lesson 7, 1. Note. 2 With religio (dd). 3 fortuna. 

4 dare (*). 5 seder c (i). 



142 Latin Composition. 

the very soil which he possessed and held as the 
prize ff of war, that, calling instantly for a crier, he 
ordered that the silversmiths' shops, which then were 
ranged j around the Roman Forum, should be put up 
for sale. dd 



XI. Young Scipio. 

1. At Rome, after the recovery ff of Capua, the 
attention 1 of the Senate and people was fixed 1 upon 
Spain as much as h upon Italy ; and it was resolved dd 
that the army there should be recruited, 1 and a general 
despatched. 1 It was not, however, so clear whom 
they should send, as that, since two great generals 
had fallen within thirty days, he who was to supply dd 
their place should be chosen with extraordinary care. 
As some named one man, others another, it was at 
last determined that the people should hold an assem- 
bly to elect dd a pro-consul for Spain ; and the consuls 
proclaimed a day for the assembly. At first they had 
expected that those who believed themselves worthy 
of so important a command would give in dd their 
names. As this q expectation was defeated, their 
sorrow for 2 the disaster sustained was renewed, and 
also their regret for the generals lost. 

2. Accordingly, the people sorrowfulty, and almost 
at a loss what to decide upon, 3 descended into the 
Campus Martius 11 on the day of the election ; and, 
turning towards the magistrates, looked round upon 
the countenances of their leading men, who were 4 
anxiously gazing at each other, and murmured that 
their fortunes were so fallen, and such despair ff was 
felt for the state, that no one ventured to accept the 

1 cura. 2 Lesson 15, a. 3 consilium (dd) 9 4 Lesson 22, 3. a. 



Exercises in Translation. 143 

command in Spain ; when suddenly Publius Cornelius, 
son of that Publius who had fallen in Spain, then 11 
about twenty-four years of age, declaring dd himself a 
candidate, dd took his station on an eminence 1 whence 
he could be seen. The eyes of the whole assembly 
were 8 directed towards him, and by acclamations and 
tokens of favor d they augured a happy and prosperous 
command. 

XII. Hannibal's Exile. 

1. Hannibal x was° the only man who perceived 1 
that he was aimed at by the Romans; and that peace 
was only allowed the Carthaginians on the under- 
standing j that a remorseless war should be maintained 2 
against himself alone. He therefore resolved to sub- 
mit to the crisis and to his fate ; and, having prepared 
every thing for flight, he first publicly appeared 3 in 
the forum on that day in order to avert suspicion, 
but, p as soon as darkness fell, j departed in his out-of- 
doors^ dress, with two attendants ignorant of his 
design. Horses being in readiness ff at the spot where 
they had been ordered/ he passed 8 through Byzacium 
by night, and arrived on the following day on the sea- 
coast, between Adolla and Thapsus, at a castle of his 
own. There * a vessel prepared and manned with row- 
ers received him. Thus did Hannibal leave Africa, 
pitying the fate of his country oftener x than his own. 

2. The same day he crossed into the isle of Cer- 
cina. Finding 4 there several 5 Phoenician merchant- 
ships^ in harbor, with their freights, 6 and a concourse 
of people having flocked together to welcome him as 

* f alio, with negative. 2 manere (/'). 3 obversari (s). 

4 Lesson 22, 2. 5 Lesson 9, 2. a. 6 merx (i). 



144 Latin Composition. 

he 7 disembarked from the vessel, he ordered that all 
who 7 inquired should be informed 00 that he had been 
sent as ambassador to Tyre. Apprehensive, however, 
that one 5 of their ships, sailing by night for Thapsus 
or Adrumetum, might announce that he had been 
seen at Cercina, he commanded a sacrifice to be pre- 
pared, and s the captains of the vessels and the mer- 
chants to be invited ; also giving orders 1 that the sails, 
together with the yard-arms, should be brought toge- 
ther from the ships, that they might enjoy 8 the shade 
— for it happened 9 to be v midsummer — while supping 
on the shore. 

3. So far as circumstances j and time permitted, the 
banquet was duly prepared 10 and celebrated on that 
day, 11 and the feast was protracted with a profusion of 
wine to a late hour of night. Hannibal, as soon as 
he found an opportunity of escaping the notice of 
those who were in the harbor, unmoored his vessel.' 
The rest, having at length arisen from their deep 
slumber, on the following day, full of the fumes d of 
wine, spent several hours in carrying back and setting 
in order the tackle of their ships. 

4. At Carthage, too, there was a concourse of the 
people, accustomed to frequent the house of Hannibal, 
at the vestibule of his mansion. As soon as it was 
generally known 12 that he was not to be found, 13 a 
crowd of citizens, 11 in quest of the chief man in the 
state, flocked 1 to the forum. x Some spread a report 
that he had taken to flight, as 14 was really 11 the 
case ;* others that he had been assassinated by the 
treachery of the Romans ; and you might observe 

7 Lesson 22, 3. a. 8 Withyfo (cc). 9 forte. 

10 With noun in adverbial phrase (compare/). ll Lesson 15, a. 

12 vulgari. 13 comgarere (cc). u id quod. 



Exercises in Translation. 145 

various countenances, as is natural 11 in a state agi- 
tated 15 by the intrigues of partisans supporting different 
factions. 

15 discors y making it more personal : lit. " of men supporting (favere) 
different (alius alius) parties and agitated," &c. (compare i). 



XIII. The Tale of Atalanta. — Bacon. 

Atalanta, who was exceeding fleet, 1 contended x 
with Hippomenes in the course, x on condition that, if 
Hippomenes won, he should espouse dd her, or forfeit 3 
his life if he lost. The match was very unequal, for p 
Atalanta had conquered 7 numbers 1 to their destruc- 
tion. Hippomenes therefore had recourse 8 to strata- 
gem. He procured 55 three golden apples, and purposely 
carried them with him. They started. 7 Atalanta out- 
stripped him soon ; then Hippomenes bowled one of 
his 11 apples before her, 1 across the course, in order 1 not 
only to make 11 her stoop, but to draw y her out of the 
path. She, prompted by female curiosity, 2 and the 
beauty of the golden fruit, 11 starts from the course to 
take up the apple. Hippomenes, in the mean time, 
holds on his way, and p steps before her; but she, by 
her natural 11 swiftness, soon fetches up her lost ground, 
and leaves him again behind. Hippomenes, however, 
by rightly timing 3 his second and third throws, ff at 
length won the race, not by his swiftness, but r by his 
cunning. x 

1 eo consilio ut. 2 studium (/). 3 jactare ad tempus. 

XIV. Assassination of C^sar. — Plutarch. 

1. When 1 Caesar* entered, the Senate rose to do 
him" honor, dd and some of the party 2 of Brutus stood 

1 Lesson 22, 3. a, 2 Lesson 15, c. 

10 



1 46 Latin Composition . 

around his chair at the back, and others presented 
themselves before him, as if their purpose 1 * was to 
support the prayers of Tillius Cimber on behalf of his 
exiled brother ; and they all joined in entreaty, follow- 
ing Caesar as far as his seat. When he had taken his 
seat, and was rejecting their entreaties, and as they 
urged 3 him still more strongly, began to show dis- 
pleasure ff towards them individually, Tillius, taking 
hold of his toga with both hands, pulled it downward 
from the neck, which was the signal for the attack. 11 
Casca was the first to strike him on the neck with his 
sword, a blow neither mortal nor severe; for, q as was 
natural at the beginning ff of so bold a deed, he was 
confused, and q Caesar m turning round seized 8 the blade 
and held it fast. 

2. And it happened that at the same moment d he 
who was struck 111 cried out in the Roman language, 
"You villain Casca, what are you doing?" and he 
who had given m the blow cried 1 out to his brother 1 in 
Greek, " Brother, help ! " Such being the beginning, 
those who were not privy to the conspiracy were pre- 
vented by consternation and horror at what was going 
on either from flying 4 or going to aid, and they did 
not even venture to utter a word. And now qq each of 
the conspirators bared s his sword ; and Caesar being 
hemmed in all round, in whatsoever direction he 
turned meeting blows and swords aimed against his 
eyes and face, driven about like a wild beast, was 
caught in the hands of his enemies ; for it was 
arranged that all of them should take a part in arid 
taste of the deed 1 of blood. 1 

3. Accordingly also Brutus gave him one blow in 
the groin. It is said by some authorities, that he 

3 Lesson 22, 3. 4 Lesson 31, 2. d. 



Exercises in Translation. 147. 

defended himself against the rest, moving 7 about his 
body hither and thither, and calling out, till he saw 
that Brutus had drawn his sword ; when 5 he pulled 
his toga over his face and offered no further resist- 
ance/ having been driven either by chance or the con- 
spirators to the base on which the statue of Pompey 
stood. And the base was drenched with blood, as if 
Pompey was directing the vengeance upon his enemy, 
who was stretched beneath his feet, and writhing je 
under many wounds ; for he is said to have received 7 
three and twenty wounds. 11 Many of the conspirators 
were wounded by one another, while they were aiming 
so many blows against one body. 

5 turn vero. 



XV. Death of Marcus Antonius. 

1. The orator, Marcus Antonius, found a faithful 
friend in these dangerous times, but still he did not 
escape. This friend, m though a poor man and of the 
lower class, received in his house one of the most illus- 
trious 11 of the Romans, and wishing to entertain him 
as well as he could, sent a slave to one of the neigh- 
boring wine-shops to get some wine. As the slave 
was more curious than usual in tasting it, and told 
the man to give y him some better wine, the merchant 
asked what could be the reason 11 that he did not buy 
the new wine, as usual, and the ordinary wine, u but 
wanted some of good quality ff and high price. ff The 
slave replied in his simplicity, ff as he was speaking to 
an old acquaintance, that his master was entertaining 
Marcus Antonius, \\ho was concealed at his house. 
The wine-dealer, m a faithless and unprincipled wretch," 



148 Latin Composition. 

as soon as the slave left him, hurried off to Marius, 
who was at supper, and having gained admission, 
told him he would betray Marcus Antonius to him. 

2. On hearing 1 this, q Marius is said to have uttered 
a loud shout, and to have clapped his hands with de- 
light ; and he was near 2 getting up and going to the 
place himself, but his friends stopped 87 him, and he 
despatched Annius with some soldiers with orders 1 to 
bring him the head of Antonius immediately. On 
reaching 3 the house, Annius waited 8 at the door, and 
the soldiers mounting the stairs 11 entered the room ; but, 
on seeing Antonius, every man began to urge some of 
his companions, and push him forward to do the deed 
instead 11 of himself. And so persuasive was the charm 
of his eloquence, when Antonius began to speak and 
plead for his life, that not a man of them could 11 ven- 
ture to lay hands on him or look him in the face, but 
they all bent s their heads down and shed tears. As 
this q caused y some delay, Annius went up stairs, 11 where 
he saw s Antonius speaking, and the soldiers awed and 
completely softened by his eloquence : on which p he 
abused them, and running up to Antonius, cut off his 
head with his own hand. 

1 Lesson 22, 3. b. 2 Lesson 31, 2. b, d. 3 Lesson 22, 2. 

XVI. Destruction of Carthage. 

1. But when, yielding 7 to famine, the most resolute 
of them set fire to the temple, Hasdrubal could not 
endure to face j death ; alone qq he ran x forth to the vic- 
tor, and falling upon his neck pleaded for his life. It 
was granted; 7 but when his wife, who with her 
children was amongst the rest on the roof of the 
temple, saw him at the feet of Scipio, her proud 11 



Exercises in Translation* 



149 



heart swelled 8 at this disgrace brought on her beloved 
perishing home, 1 and with bitter words bidding her 
husband be careful to save his life, she plunged first 
her sons and then herself into the flames. The strug- 
gle was 8 at an end. The p joy in the camp w and at 
Rome was boundless : x the noblest p of the Romans 
alone were s in secret ashamed of the most recent 
achievement of the nation. 

2. The senate ordered the general to level the city 
of Carthage and the suburb of Magalia with the 
ground, and to do the same with all the places which 
had held by Carthage to the last ; and thereafter to 
pass the plough over the site of Carthage, so as to put 
an end in legal form dd to the existence ff of the city, and 
to curse the soil and site for ever, that neither house 
nor corn-field might ever reappear 1 on the spot. The q 
command was punctually obeyed. The ruins burned 
for seventeen days. Recently, when the remains of 
the city wall were excavated, they were found to be 
covered with a layer 11 of ashes from four to five feet 
deep, filled with half-charred pieces of wood, d frag- 
ments of iron, and projectiles. Where qq the indus- 
trious Phoenicians had bustled and trafficked for five 
hundred years, Roman slaves henceforth pastured the 
herds of their distant masters. 

XVII. Xenophon at the Sea. 

1. They 8 had crossed 1 the plain to the foot of the 
hills in the dark, during the last watch of the night, 
and p found the passes 2 unguarded. But qq the people 1 
fled from the villages at their approach, and though 
the Greeks at first spared 7 their property,- 1 could not 

1 pervenire with trans. 2 Insert quidem (qq). 



150 Latin Composition. 

be induced to listen to any pacific 1 overtures. j But 
having recovered from their first surprise, and 8 col- 
lected a part of their forces, they fell upon the rear of 
the Greeks, and with their missiles made some slaugh- 
ter among the last 3 troops 11 which issued in the dusk of 
the evening 11 from the long and narrow defile. In the 
night qq the watch u -fires of the Carduchians were seen 
blazing 4 on the peaks of the surrounding 5 hills ; sig- 
nals 3 which warned the Greeks that they might expect 6 
to be attacked by the collected forces of their tribes. 

2. On the fifth day, as 7 the army was ascending 
Mount Theche, a lofty ridge distinguished- 1 by the 
name of the Sacred Mountain, Xenophon and the rear- 
guard observed a stoppage ff and an unusual clamor in 
the foremost ranks, 11 which had reached the summit, 
and they 8 supposed at first that they saw y an enemy 
before them. But when Xenophon rode up to ascer- 
tain the cause, the first shouts that struck his ear 
were, The sea, the sea! The glad sound ran quickly 
till it reached the hindmost, and all pressed forward 
to enjoy the cheering spectacle. The Euxine qq spread 00 
its waters before their eyes ; waters which rolled on to 
the shores of Greece, and which washed the walls ot 
many Greek cities on the nearest coast of Asia. 

3 In relative clause. 4 Infinitive. 5 Lesson 8, 3. 

6 Part in dus(y). 7 Lesson 25, 2. b. 8 adeo ut (p ). 

XVIII. Vercingetorix. — Merivale. 

Vercingetorix, with all the gallant gayety ff of his 
nation, 1 clad 8 himself in his most splendid armour, 
and mounted his noblest charger. Caesar qq had drawn 8 
up his troops, and had seated himself to receive his 

1 ut fere Galli (/). 



Exercises in Translation. 15 r 

captives. The Gaul m caused 11 the gates of his en- 
campment to be thrown 53 wide, and galloped forth into 
the open space, in the attitude of a warrior charging. 2 
Having approached close to the proconsul's chair, he 
dexterously wheeled round, and again returning to 
the same spot, sprang to the ground, and laid his 
arms at the feet of the conqueror. The army p was 3 
touched with a sense d of admiration akin to com- 
passion, but Caesar himself remained cold 1 and un- 
moved. 

2 With arma. 



XIX. A Story of Wolves. 

We had 1 one dangerous place to pass, and our 
guide told us, if there were more wolves in the coun- 
try , j we should find them there ; q and qq this was a small 
plain surrounded with woods on every side. It was 
within half an hour of sunset when we entered the 
wood, and a little after sunset when we came into the 
plain: we met with nothing in the first wood, except 
that we saw five great wolves cross the road, full 
speed one after another, as if they had been in chase 
of some prey and had it in view : they took no notice ff 
of us, and were gone out of sight in a few moments. 
Upon this, our guide, who, by the way, 2 was but 3 a 
faint-hearted fellow, bid. us keep in a ready posture, 1 
for he believed there were more wolves a-coming. 
We kept our arms ready and our eyes about us ; but 
we saw no more wolves till we came through that 
wood, w 7 hich was near half a league, and entered the 
plain. As soon as we came into the plain we had 

1 Lesson 20, 2. c. 2 quidem. 3 sane. 



152 Latin Co?n£ositzon* 

occasion* enough to look about us : the first object we 
met with was a dead horse which the wolves had 
killed, and at least a dozen of them at work picking 
his bones. 

XX. Death of Socrates. — Plato. 

1. When he had thus spoken, Socrates arose and 
went into another room that he might wash himself, 
and Crito followed 8 him ; u but qq he ordered 8 us to wait 
for him. u We waited therefore accordingly, discours- 
ing over and reviewing among ourselves what had 
been said; and sometimes speaking about his death, 
how great a calamity it would be to us ; and sincerely 
thinking that we, like those who are deprived of their 
fathers, should pass y the rest of our life in the condi- 
tion of orphans. d But when he had washed himself, 
his sons were brought to him (for he had two little 
ones, and one older), and the women belonging to his 
familv 11 likewise came in to him ; but q when he had 
spoken to them before Crito, and had left them such 
injunctions g as he thought 7 proper, 11 he ordered 7 the 
boys and women to depart, 8 and he himself returned 
to us. 

2. And it was now near the setting of the sun ; for 
he had been away in the inner room for a long time. 
But when he came in from bathing 1 he sat down, and 
did not 2 speak much afterwards ; for then the servant 
of the Eleven dd came in, and standing near him, said, 
K I do not perceive that in you, Socrates, which I have 
taken 1 notice 1 of in others : I mean, 11 that they are 
angry with me and curse me, when being compelled 
by the magistrates I announce to them that they must 

1 lotus. 2 nee. 



Exercises in Translation. 153 

drink y the poison. But, on the contrary, 3 I have found 
you to the present time d to be 11 the most generous, 
mild-, and best of all the men that ever came into this 
place ; and therefore I am well convinced that you 
are not angry with me, but with the authors 4 of your 
present condition, for you know who they are. Now 
therefore, for you know what I came to tell you, fare- 
well ; and endeavor to bear this necessity as easily 
as possible. " d 

3. At the same time bursting into tears, and turning 
himself away, he departed. But Socrates, looking 
after him, said, "And thou, too, farewell; and we 
shall take care 11 to act as you advise." And at the 
same time, turning to us, " How courteous," he said, 
" is the behavior ff of that man ! During the whole 
time of my abode ff here, he has visited me, and often 
conversed with me, and proved himself to be the best 
of men ; and now how generously he weeps on my 
account! But 2 let us obey him, Crito, and let some 
one bring the poison if it is bruised ; and, if not, let 
the man whose business 11 it is bruise it." 

4. ef But, Socrates," said Crito, * I think that the 
sun still hangs 1 over the mountains, and is not set yet. z 
And at the same time I have known others who have 
drunk the poison very late after it was announced to 
them ; who 5 have supped and drunk abundantly. 
Therefore do not be in such haste, for there is yet 
time enough." Socrates replied, 11 K Such 6 men, Crito, 
act fitly in the manner which you have described, for 
they think to derive some advantage^ from so doing ; n 
and I also with propriety shall not act in this manner. 11 
For I do not think I shall gain any thing by drinking 

3 quod contra, 4 Rel. clause (Lesson 8 f 3). 5 Participle. 

6 isti. 



154 Latin Composition. 

it later, except becoming 7 ridiculous to myself through 
desiring to live, and being sparing of life, when 
nothing of it any longer 2 remains. Go therefore," 
said he, " be persuaded, 8 and comply with my re- 
quest." 11 

5. Then Crito, hearing y this, q gave a sign to the 
boy that stood near him ; and the boy m departing, and 
having stayed for some time, came back with the per- 
son that was to administer 1 the poison, who brought it 
pounded in a cup. And Socrates, looking at the man, 
sain, " Well, 9 my friend, as you are knowing in these 
matters, what is 10 to be done?" "Nothing," he said, 
w but 11 after you have drunk it to walk about, until a 
heaviness comes on in your legs, and then to lie down : 
this is the manner in which you have to act." And 
at the same time he extended the cup to Socrates. 
And Socrates taking it — and, indeed, with great 
cheerfulness, neither trembling nor turning color, but 
as his manner ff was, looking sternly under his brows 
at the man — w What say you," he said, "to making a 
libation x from this? may I do it or not?" 

6. " We can only bruise as much, Socrates," he 
replied, 11 w as we think sufficient for the purpose." 
"I understand you," he said, "but 2 it is both lawful 
and proper to pray to the gods that my departure from 
hence to another world may be prosperous : which I 
entreat them to grant may be the case." j And so say- 
ing, he stopped and drank the poison very readily and 
pleasantly. And thus far the greater part of us were 
tolerably 12 well able to refrain from weeping ; 13 but 
when we saw him drinking, and that he had drunk it, 
we could no longer restrain our tears. And from me, 

? With ut. 8 credere. 9 quid est. 10 oportet, 

11 quam ut. 12 satis. 13 Lesson 31, 2. d. 



Exercises in Translation. 155 

in spite of my efforts, 4 they flowed, and that not drop 
by drop ; so that wrapping*' myself in my mantle, I 
bewailed, not indeed for his misfortune, but for my 
own, considering what a companion I should be 
deprived of. 

XXI. Hannibal in the Apennines. 

So furious a tempest attacked him 1 (while) cross- 
ing x the Apennines, that it almost surpassed the 
horrors of the Alps. The rain and wind together 2 
being 3 driven directly 4 against their faces, they first 
halted, because v either they were obliged to drop 
their arms, or, if 5 they struggled against the storm, 
they were whirled round by the hurricane, and 5 
dashed upon the ground : n afterwards, as 6 it took 
away 1 their breath, and did not allow them to respire, 
they sat down for a short time with their backs 7 to the 
wind. Then, indeed, the sky resounded 8 with the 
loudest thunder, 9 and lightnings 10 flashed amid the 
terrific peals : deafened 11 and blinded, they all became 
insensible 12 with fear. At last, the rain having spent 1 
itself, and the violence of the wind having been re- 
doubled 13 upon that account, it was held requisite to 
pitch their camp on the very spot whereon they had 
been overtaken by the storm. 11 But this was like 14 a 
fresh commencement of their toils. For they could 
neither spread their canvas, 1 nor fix their poles : l nor 
would any thing that had been fixed remain, the wind 
tearing every thing to shreds 15 and hurrying it away ; 
and soon after, when the water which 5 had been raised 

1 Hannibal. 2 mixtus (/). 3 Lesson 22, 2. 4 ipse (/). 

5 Lesson 22, 3. a 6 cum. 7 aversus (i, y). 8 Infinitive. 

9 sonns (/). lu ignis. 1A capias, with nouns. 12 With to?'pere. 

13 magis accensus. 14 velut. 15 By prep, in compos. 



156 Latin Composition. 

aloft by the gale, had been frozen on the icy summits 
of the mountains, it v poured down such a torrent 1 of 
snowy hail, that the soldiers, throwing every thing 
away, fell down upon their faces, 15 rather smothered 16 
than covered by their clothes. And such an intensity 1 
of cold succeeded, that, whenever any one endea- 
vored to raise and lift himself up from this miserable 
prostrate mass 17 of men and cattle, he was long 
unable, because, his sinews stiffening with the cold, 
he was hardly capable j of bending his joints. 

16 obruere. 17 strages. 



XXII. The Gauls at Rome. 

The Romans, seeing 1 from the citadel the city full 
of the enemy, some new disaster continually arising 
on every 2 side, were unable not only to realize*" it, 11 but 
even to command 3 their senses. 4 Wherever the shouts 
of the foe, the lamentations of women and children, 
the crackling of fire, and the crash of falling roofs, 
called 5 their attention, 11 terrified at every sound, 1 they 
turned their thoughts, faces, and eyes, as if stationed 
by fortune to be spectators 6 of the ruin ff of their coun- 
try, and left to protect 7 no part of their property, 1 
except their own persons : l so much more 8 to be pitied 
than others that have ever been besieged, inasmuch 
as 9 they were at once invested and 8 shut out from 
their country, beholding all their effects j in the power 
of their enemies. Nor was the night which suc- 
ceeded 10 a day so miserably spent more tranquil : x day- 

1 Lesson 22, 2. 

2 alius atque alius ; so as to present the actual picture more vividly (cf. /). 

3 constare. 4 Express by the organs of sense (/). 5 avertere. 

6 spectaculum (cc). 7 vindex {y). 8 ante, 9 Lesson 28, 2. d. 

10 excipere (cf. k). 



Exercises in Translation. 157 

light then followed a restless night : nor was there any 
moment which was free from 11 the spectacle of some 
ever 12 new disaster. Nevertheless, burdened and over- 
whelmed by so many evils, they abated 13 not x their 
courage, determined, 14 although they had beheld all 
things levelled by conflagration and ruin, to defend, by 
their valor, the hill which they occupied, ill-provided 
and narrow as it was, 15 yet the refuge 16 of freedom. 
And at last, as the same things happened every day, 
they had abstracted their thoughts, as if v inured to ca- 
lamities, 1 from all sense of their misfortunes ; gazing 
only upon the arms, and the swords in their hands, as 
the sole remnants of their hopes. 

11 cessare (a) y to give a more intense personal character than the 

ordinary words. 

12 semper. 13 fleeter e. 14 quin (I). 

15 The phrase may be omitted (cf. //), or with quamvis. 16 relietus (ec). 

XXIII. Murder of Marcellus. 

1. The day following, as I was purposing 1 to set 
out from Athens, his friend Posthumius came to me 
about four 2 in the morning, and informed me Marcellus 
had been stabbed 3 the night before by Magius Cilo, 
whilst they were sitting 11 together after supper ; that 
he had received two wounds from a dagger, 1 one of 
which was 11 in his breast, and the other under his ear ; 
but that neither of them, he hoped, was mortal. 4 He 
added, 5 that Magius, after having committed this bar- 
barous action, 11 immediately killed himself; and that 
Marcellus had despatched 7 him in order to give me 
this account, and likewise to desire that I would direct 
my physicians to attend 11 him. This I instantly did ; 

1 in animo habere. 2 Lesson 17, e. 3 ferire y pugione ieere. 

* Lit. " hoped he could live " (ec y i). 5 Lesson 30, i. e {11). 



158 Latin Cojnfiosition. 

and followed them myself as soon 1 as it was light. 
But when I had almost reached 00 Piraeeus, I met cc a 
servant of Acidanus with a note to acquaint me that 
our friend m expired a little before day-break. Thus 
did the noble Marcellus m unworthily fall 6 by the hand 
of a villanous assassin ; j and he whose life his very 
enemies had spared, in reverence j to his illustrious vir- 
tues, 7 met y with an executioner at last in his own 
friend ! v 

2. However, I proceeded to his pavilion: where 1 * I 
found only two of his freedmen and a few slaves ; the 
rest, I was told/ having fled in apprehension of the 
consequences 11 in which they might be involved j by 
this murder 8 of their master. I was obliged to place 
the body 9 of Marcellus in the same sedan that brought 7 
me, and to make 10 my chair-men carry it into Athens : 
where I paid him all the funeral honors that city could 
supply ; j which indeed were not inconsiderable. But 
I could not prevail 11 with the Athenians to suffer 12 him 
to be buried within their walls ; a privilege,- 1 they 
assured 5 me, which their religious ordinances would 
by no means admit. They granted me, however, 
what was the next honor, 11 and which they had never 
permitted to any stranger before : they allowed 11 me to 
deposit his ashes in any of the Gymnasia I should 
think proper. Accordingly I fixed upon a spot belong- 
ing to the Academy, one of the noblest colleges 13 in the 
whole world. In this place I caused a funeral pile to 
be erected, and afterwards persuaded the Athenians 
to raise dd a marble monument to his memory, d at the 
public expense. dd Thus have I paid to my relation 

6 acerbissima morte afficere (i), 7 dignitas. 8 Clause with quod. 

9 Simply is, 10 With instrum. abl. (j). n impetrare. 

12 locum dare, 13 gy?nnasium. 



Exercises in Translation. 159 

and colleague, 14 both during his life and after his 
death, every friendly office he had a right to expect 15 
from me. Farewell. 

14 Express by pro with abstract noun (cc), 

15 With simple possessive pronoun (*'). 

XXIV. Story of Cincinnatus. — Arnold. 

1. Then the Master dd of the people and the Master 
of the horse went together into the forum, and bade 
every man to shut 7 up his booth, and stopped dd all 
causes at law, dd and ordered that every 1 man who was 
of an age to go dd out to battle should be ready in the 
Field of Mars d before sunset, and s should have 11 with 
him victuals for five days, and twelve stakes ; and the 
older men dressed the victuals for the soldiers, whilst 
the soldiers m went about everywhere 2 to get their 
stakes ; and they cut them where they would without 3 
any hindrance^ So the army was ready in the Field 
of Mars at the time 4 appointed, and they set forth 
from the city, and made such haste, ff that ere the night 
was half spent 11 they came to Algidus ; and when they 
perceived that they were near the enemy, they made 
a halt. dd 

2. Then Lucius rode on and saw how the camp of 
the enemy 11 lay 5 ; and he ordered his soldiers to throw 
down all 11 their baggage into one place, 11 but to keep 
each man his arms and his twelve stakes. Then they 
set out again in their order of march as 6 they had come 
from Rome, and they spread themselves round the 
camp of the enemy on every side. When this was 
done, upon a signal given they raised a great shout, 
and directly every man began to dig a ditch just where 

1 Indef. Rel. 2 dis- in composition. 8 Lesson 23, 2. c. 

4 ad edictum. 5 With situs* 6 Lesson 8, 7. 



160 Latin Composition. 

he stood, and to set in his stakes. The shout rang 
through the camp of the enemy, and filled them with 
fear ; and it sounded even to the camp of the Romans 
who were shut up in the valley, and the consul's men 
said one to another, "Rescue is 7 surely at hand, for 
that is the shout of the Romans." 8 

7 Lesson 30. 8 Use civis, for facility in making an adjective. 

XXV. Princely Generosity. — Feltham. 

Diogenes asked 1 Plato x for a glass of wine, and q he 
presently sent him 11 a gallon. When next Diogenes* 
met him, he said to him : " I asked you how many 
were two and two? and you have answered, twenty." 
There are some of so noble a disposition, that, like 
trees of 2 ripe fruit, by degrees they drop away all 
that they have ; they would 3 even outdo the demands 
of all their friends, and would give as if they were 
gods, that could not be exhausted ; they look not so 
much either at the merit of others, or their own 
ability, 4 as the satisfaction 1 * of themselves from their 
own bounty. I find not a higher genius this way, 5 
than glowed j in the victorious 111 Alexander. He warred 
as if he coveted all things, and gave away as if he 
cared for nothing. You would think he did not con- 
quer for himself, but his friends ; and that he took, 
only that he might have wherewith to give ; so that 
one might well 6 conclude the world itself was tQO 
little 7 for either his ambition or his bounty. When 
Perillus begged that he would be pleased to give him 
a portion for his daughters, he immediately com- 
manded him fifty talents. The modest beggar m told 

1 Lesson 22, 3. a, 2 onustus. 3 volo. 4 copiae. 

5 Lit. " no greater example in this kind." 6 facile. 7 parum sufficere. 



Exercises in Translation. 161 

him ten would be enough. To which the prince m re- 
plied : " Though they might be enough for him to 
receive, yet they were not enough for himself to 
bestow." 

XXVI. Defeat of Varus. — Creasy. 

1. Fatigue and discouragement now began 11 to 
betray 1 themselves in the Roman ranks. Their line 
became less steady; baggage-wagons were aban- 
doned from the impossibility 1 * of forcing them along ; 
and, as this happened, many soldiers left 1 their ranks 
and crowded 1 round the wagons to secure the most 
valuable portions 11 of their property ; each busy about 
his own affairs, 11 and purposely slow in hearing the 
word d of command from 2 his officers. Arminius now 
gave the signal for a generaP attack. ff The fierce 
shouts of the Germans x pealed 1 through the gloom ff 
of the forests, and in thronging 1 multitudes 1 they 
assailed the flanks of the invaders, m pouring in clouds 
of darts on the encumbered legionaries, as 3 they strug- 
gled up the glens or floundered 1 in the morasses. 

2. Arminius, with a chosen band of personal re- 
tainers round him, cheered on his countrymen 11 by 
voice and example. He 11 and his men 11 aimed their 
weapons 11 particularly at the horses of the Roman m 
cavalry, The wounded animals , q slipping about in 
the mire and their own blood, threw their riders, and 
plunged among the ranks ©f the legions, disordering 
all round them. 

3. The bulk of the Roman army fought steadily 
and stubbornly, frequently repelling the masses of the 
assailants, but gradually losing the compactness ff of 

1 Lesson 22, 3. &. 2 Lesson 15, a. 3 Lesson 22, 2. 

11 



1 62 Latin Composition. 

their array. At last, in a series j of desperate attacks 
the column was pierced through and through, two 
of the eagles captured, 8 and the Roman host, which 
on the yester morning had marched forth in such 
pride ff and might, now broken up into confused 1 frag- 
ments, 11 either 4 fell fighting beneath the overpowering 
numbers of the enemy or 4 perished in the swamps and 
woods in unavailing efforts ff at flight. 

4 par tint. 



XXVII. Siege of Syracuse. — Arnold. 

Marcellus brought 1 up his ships against the sea- 
wall 6 of Achradina, and endeavored by a constant 
discharge ff of stones and arrows to clear the walls of 
their defenders, so that his men might apply their 
ladders, and mount to the assault. These ladders 
rested cc on two ships, lashed 2 together broadside to 
broadside, 3 and s worked as one by their outside oars. 
But Archimedes had supplied the ramparts with an 
artillery so powerful, k that it overwhelmed 3 " the Ro- 
mans before they could get within the range 4 which 
their missiles 11 could reach : u and qq when they came 
closer, they found j that all the lower part of the wall 
was loopholed 1 ; and their men were struck 7 down 
with fatal aim 5 by an enemy whom they could not see, 
and who shot 11 his arrows 11 in perfect security. ff If 
they still persevered, and attempted 11 to fix their lad- 
ders, on a sudden enormous stones or huge masses 6 of 
lead were dropped upon them, by which their ladders 
were crushed to pieces, and their ships were almost 
sunk. At other times, machines like cranes were 

1 Lesson 22, 3. b. 2 jungere. 3 Result-clause with applicare. 

4 teli conjectus. 5 Lit. "aimed at from a hidden [place}." 6 pondus. 



Exercises in Translation. 163 

thrust 8 out over the wall ; and the end 11 of the lever, 
with 8 an iron grapple affixed to it, q was p lowered upon 
the ships. As soon as the grapple q had taken hold, 
the other end of the lever was lowered s by heavy 
weights, and the ship raised 8 out of the water, till 11 it 
was made y almost to stand upon its stern ; then the 
grapple was suddenly let go, and the ship dropped 7 
into the sea with a violence which either upset y it, 
or filled 7 it with water. With equal* 1 power was the 
assault on the land side 11 repelled, till Marcellus in 
despair ff put v a stop ff to his attacks ; and it was resolved 
merely to blockade the town, and to wait for the effect 
of famine upon the crowded population 1 within. 11 

7 affligo (y). 



XXVIII. Battle of Metaurus. — Arnold. 

1. From the moment j that Nero's march ff from the 
south 11 had been heard cc of at Rome, 1 intense 1 anxiety 
possessed the whole city. Every day the senate sat dd 
from sunrise ff to sunset ; and -not a senator was absent : 
every 11 day the forum was crowded from morning 11 till 
evening, as each hour might bring some great tidings ; u 
and every man 2 wished to be among the first to hear 
them. A doubtful rumor arose, j that a great battle 
had been fought, 11 and a great victory 1 won 3 only two 
days before : two horsemen of Narnia had ridden 11 off 
from the field to carry the news to their home ; it qq had 
been heard and published in the camp of the reserve 4 
army, which was lying at Narnia to cover the ap- 
proach 11 to Rome. But men dared not lightly believe 
what they so much wished to be true ; and how, they 

1 Lesson 17, h. 2 pro se quisque (h). 

3 Compress the two clauses, making battle a modifier. 4 in subsidiis. 



164 Latin Composition. 

said, u could a battle fought 1 in the extremity ff of Umbria 
be heard of only two days after at Rome? Soon, 
however, it was known that a letter had arrived 1 from 
L. Manlius Acidinus himself, who commanded the 
army at Narnia : the horsemen had certainly arrived 
there from the field of battle, and brought tidings ff of 
a glorious victory. ff The letter was read first in the 
senate, and then in the forum dd from the rostra ; dd but 
some still refused-* to believe : 5 fugitives from a battle- 
field might carry idle tales of victory to hide their own 
shame ; till the account came directly from the con- 
suls, it was° rash to credit it. 

2. At last, word 11 was brought that officers 6 of high 
rank in the consul's army were on their way 11 to Rome ; 
that they bore s a despatch from Livius m and Nero. 
Then the whole city poured y out of the walls to meet 
them, eager to anticipate the moment j which was to 
confirm all their hopes. For two miles, as far as the 
Milvian bridge over the Tiber, the crowd formed an 
uninterrupted mass ; l and when the officers appeared, 
they could scarcely make their way to the city, 11 the p 
multitude thronging around them, and overwhelming 3 ' 
them and their attendants with eager questions. ff As 
each man learned the joyful* answers, 11 he made haste 
to tell them 11 to others : w The enemy's army is de- 
stroyed ; c the general slain ; c our 7 own legions and both 
the consuls are safe." So the crowd 11 re-entered the 
city ; and the three officers, all men of noble names, 11 
L. Veturius Philo, P. Licinius Varus, and Q^Metellus, 
still followed 3 " by the thronging 11 multitude, at last 
reached the senate-house. 

5 With /<&$•. 
6 It is more strictly Latin to name the office (legati); but here it may 
be paraphrased. 7 Romajtas ; on account of indir. discourse. 



Exercises in Translation. 165 

3. The people pressed after 1 them into the senate- 
house itself: but even at such a moment 3 the senate 
forgot not its accustomed order ; 8 the crowd was 8 forced 
back; and the consul's despatch was first read to the 
senators alone. Immediately afterwards the officers 
came out into the forum : there L. Veturius again read 
the despatch ; and, as its contents 11 were short, he him- 
self related the particulars- 1 of what he had seen 7 and 
done. The interest 00 of his hearers grew more in- 
tense with every word ; 9 till at last the whole multi- 
tude 11 broke cc out in a universal 11 cheer, and then 
rushed y from the forum in all directions to carry the 
news to their wives and children at home, or 10 ran to 
the temples to pour dd out their gratitude to the gods. 
The senate ordered a thanksgiving of three days ; the 
praetor announced dd it in the forum ; and for three 
days every temple was crowded ; and the Roman 
wives and mothers, dd in their gayest dresses, took 11 
their children with them, and 8 poured forth their 
thanks to all the gods for this great deliverance. ff 

8 mos et instituta. 9 magis magisque. 10 alii . . . alii. 



XXIX. Inundations of the Tiber. — Gibbon. 

1. From her situation, 1 Rome 11 is exposed to the 
danger 11 of frequent inundations. Without s excepting 11 
the Tiber, the rivers w that descend 1 from either side of 
the Apennines have iz a short and irregular course : a p 
shallow stream 1 in the summer heats ; an p irregular 
torrent, 1 when it is swollen in the spring or winter, by 
the fall of the rain, or the melting ff of the snows. 
When 8 the current is repelled from the sea by adverse 2 

1 This clause requires a verb in Latin to express precisely the picture 
alluded to (cf. h). 2 Lesson 22, 3. b. 



1 66 Latin Composition. 

winds, when the ordinary bed is inadequate 11 to the 
height of the waters, they rise above the banks, and 
overspread, without limit or control, the plains and 
cities of the adjacent country. Soon 11 after the tri- 
umph ff of the first Punic war, the Tiber was increased 
by unusual rains; and p the inundation, surpassing all 
former measure-of-time-and-place, 3 destroyed 13 all the 
buildings that were situate- 1 below the hills of Rome. 
According to the variety 1 of the ground, the same q 
mischief d was produced 7 by different means ; and the 
edifices were either swept 7 away by the sudden im- 
pulse, 4 or dissolved 7 and undermined by the long con- 
tinuance 5 of the flood. 

2. Under the reign 11 of Augustus, the same calamity 
was renewed ; the lawless 6 river overturned the palaces 
and temples on 1 its banks ; and, Q after 7 the labors of 
the emperor in cleansing and widening the bed, that 
was encumbered with ruins, the 7 vigilance j of his suc- 
cessors was exercised by similar dangers and designs. 8 
The project of diverting into new channels the Tiber 
itself, or some of the dependent 1 streams, was long 
opposed by superstition and by local 9 interests ; cc nor 
did the use compensate 1 the toil and cost of the tardy 
and imperfect execution/ The Q servitude 10 of rivers 
is the noblest and most important victory which man 
has obtained over the licentiousness of nature ; and if q 
such were the ravages 11 of the Tiber under a firm and 

3 By memoria. 4 Insert "the river," as the actual agent (h). 

6 Insert "stagnant water," as the actual agent (h). 

6 Personify more directly : " spurning the curb." 

7 Co-ordinate clauses with et . . . et (compare h). 

8 Lit. "as much care as possible was taken against a similar danger." 

9 privatus. 

10 Divide the clause for greater precision : "as in other . . . so," &c. 
(see dd,ff). u Make precise with a verb, and append the 

result in an adverbial phrase. 



Exercises in Translation. 167 

active government,* what could oppose/ or who can 
enumerate, the injuries 5 of 12 the city after the fall of 
the Western empire? A remedy ff was produced 7 by 
the evil itself: the accumulation of rubbish and the 
earth that has been washed down from the hills is 
supposed 7 to have elevated the plain of Rome, four- 
teen or fifteen feet perhaps, above the ancient level ; 
and the modern 13 city is less accessible 14 to the attacks 
of the river. 

12 Lesson 15, a. ™ with adverb (e). " Lit. "sufficiently safe " (cc). 

XXX. First Acting at Rome. 

1. The pestilence continuing during both this and 
the following year, in which 1 Caius Sulpicius Paeticus 
and Caius Licinius Stolo were consuls, nothing memo- 
rable 1 was transacted ; only 2 that, for the purpose of 
soliciting 2 the favor b of the gods, the lectisternium was 
performed 3 the third time since the building of the city. 
But as the disorder received 1 no alleviation/ either 
from human wisdom g or divine aid, the strength d of 
the people's minds became s almost overpowered by 
superstition, and p it is said that, on this occasion, 11 
among other devices d for appeasing the wrath of 
heaven, scenic plays were introduced, 3 a new thing 
to a warlike people ; for hitherto there had been only 
the shows of the circus. However, this kind 1 of per- 
formance 1 was, as in general all beginnings are, but a 
trifling matter, and even that 4 borrowed 1 from abroad. 

2. Actors were s sent for from Etruria, who, though 
without any poetical language/ or any gestures cor- 
respondent 8 to such language, yet regulating 5 their 

1 Lesson 22, 3. b. 2 exposcere 3 instittiere. 4 is ipse. 

5 i77iitari (with relative). 



i68 Latin Composition. 

motions by 6 the measures of the music, 7 exhibited, dd in 
the Tuscan manner, something 8 far from h ungraceful. 
The younger citizens 11 soon began to imitate x these ; 
throwing out, at the same time, among each other, 
ludicrous expressions 1 in coarse verses, and with r ges- 
tures adapted cc to the words : this kind of performance j 
then being r received with approbation, 11 in the courseJ 
of frequent practice gained much improvement. 9 The 
native performers were called 10 Histriones^ from 11 the 
Tuscan word Hister, signifying a player ; and q they did 
not, as formerly, pronounce 1 in dialogue, 12 without re- 
gard to order, 13 verses like the Fescennine, artless 14 
and unpolished, but represented comic 11 medleys, com- 
posed 15 in regular 11 metre, with the several 16 parts of 
the performance properly adjusted to the music ; the 
delivery of the words and the gesticulation being per- 
formed in concert with the music. 

3. Several years after this, 11 Livius, who was the 
first that ventured to lay aside 17 medleys, and to weave 
a story into a regular 11 plot, being also, as all were at 
that time, the actor of his own pieces; and, having 
broken his voice by 18 being obliged to repeat 11 them too 
often, after requesting the indulgence of the public, 11 
placed s a boy before the musician to chant, while he 
himself performed 19 the gesticulations. And p this 11 he 
executed 11 with much freer 20 action, because disen- 
gaged from attention to the management of his voice. 21 

6 saltare ad. 7 tibicen (cc). 

8 motus : as the verb is a general one, the color is put in the noun. 

9 excitari. 10 nomen indere (dd). 

11 Lit. "because a player was called by a Tuscan word " (h). 

12 alternis. 13 temere. 14 incompositum. 15 impletus (cc). 

16 Lit. "the song being adjusted (describere) to the musician, and the 

movement corresponding " (i ). 17 Simple abl. with ab. 

18 Lesson 22, 2. 19 Lit. " acted the song." 2U vigens. 

21 Lit. "because the use of the voice did not hinder" (cc, //, /). 



Exercises in Translation. 169 

Hence originated 1 the practice 1 of the chanting being 
performed by another to the gesticulation of the actors, 
whose voices were eased cc of all but cc the dialogue. 
When, by this regulation, the scenic 11 business was 
directed 22 to other 11 objects 11 than laughter and intem- 
perate mirth, and the amusement 1 was by degrees 
converted into an art, the younger citizens leaving to 
professed 11 actors the exhibition 1 of plays began, ac- 
cording to the ancient practice, to throw out alter- 
nately ludicrous jests, 1 comprised 23 in verse, which 
thence 11 got y the name of exodia, or interludes, and 
were collected 24 principally out of the Atellan 1 farces. 

22 avocare (cc). 2S intexo, 2 * conserere. 

XXXI. The Fire of London. 
1. While the war ff continued 11 without 1 any decisive 
success on either side, a calamity happened in Lon- 
don, which threw cc the people into great consterna- 
tion. Fire, breaking out in a baker's house near the 
bridge, spread 2 itself on all sides with such rapidity, 
that no efforts, could extinguish 7 it, till it laid in ashes j 
a considerable part of the city. The inhabitants, 
without 3 being able to provide 4 effectually j for their 
relief, were reduced- 1 to be spectators ff of their own 
ruin ; b and s were pursued 7 from street to street by the 
flames, which 5 unexpectedly gathered 7 round them. 
Three days and nights did the fire advance ; and p it 
was only 11 by the blowing-up of houses that it was at 
last extinguished. The king and duke used their 
utmost endeavors ff to stop the progress of the flames ; 
but all their industry 11 was unsuccessful. About four 
hundred streets and thirteen thousand houses were 
reduced to ashes. 1 

1 Lesson 23, 2. c. 2 pervagari. 3 ut qui. 4 adhibere (ace). 

5 Lesson 22, 3. b (v). 



1 70 Latin Composition. 

2. The causes of this calamity were evident. The 
narrow streets of London, 11 the houses built entirely 
of wood, the dry season, and a violent k east wind 
which blew, — these were so many concurring 11 cir- 
cumstances, which rendered it easy to assign the 
reason of the destruction that ensued. j But the 
people were y not satisfied with this obvious account.- 1 
Prompted by blind rage, some ascribed the guilt to 
the republicans, 6 others to the catholics, 6 though it is 
not easy to conceive the burning f of London could 
serve the purposes- 1 ' of either party, 

3. The conflagration was so universale and r the 
people so astonished, that from the beginning they 
hardly stirred 6 to quench it ; so that there was nothing 
heard or seen but crying g out and lamentation/ run- 
ning 7 about like distracted creatures, without at all 
attempting to save even their goods. Such a strange 
consternation there was 8 upon them, as it burned, cc 
both in breadth ff and length, the churches, public 
halls, hospitals, monuments, and ornaments, leaping v 
after a prodigious manner from house to house, and 
street to street, at great distances one from the other ; 
for the heat, with a long set j of fair and warm 
weather, had even ignited the air, and prepared the 
materials to conceive the fire, which devoured, after 
an incredible manner, houses, furniture, and every 
thing. 

4. Oh the miserable and calamitous spectacle ! such 
as haply the world j had not seen j since the foundation 
of it. God grant dd my eyes may never behold the 
like. x The noise and cracking ff of the impetuous 
flames, the shrieking of women and children, the 
hurry ff of people, the fall ff of houses and churches, 

6 manum verier e (cc), 7 Lesson 22, 2. 8 Pluperfect. 



Exercises in Translation. 171 

was like 9 a hideous storm, and the air all about so hot 
and inflamed, that at last one was not able to approach 
it : so that they were forced 10 to stand still and let the 
flames burn on, which they did 11 for near two miles in 
length and one in breadth. The clouds 11 of smoke 
were 8 dismal, and reached, upon computation , ff near 
fifty miles in length. Thus I left it this afternoon 
burning, a resemblance of Sodom, or the last day. 
London was, but is 11 no more. 11 

9 speciein praebere. 10 Part, in dus, ll in nubes tristes volutus (/). 



XXXII. The Earthquake at Lisbon. 

1. It was on the morning 11 of this fatal day, 
between the hours 1 of nine and ten, that I was set 
down in my apartment, just 2 finishing a letter, when 
the papers and 3 table I was writing on began to trem- 
ble with a gentle motion, which 4 rather surprised 00 me, 
as I could 11 not perceive a breath of wind d stirring. 
Whilst I was reflecting with myself what this could 11 
be owing cc to, the house I was in 11 shook y with such 
violence, that the upper stories immediately fell, and 
though qq my apartment (which was on the first floor) 
did not then share cc the same fate, j yet every thing 
was thrown x out of its place, in such a manner that it 
was with no small h difficulty I kept my feet, and p 
expected nothing less than to be soon crushed to 
death, 11 as the walls continued 11 rocking to and fro in a 
frightful manner, opening in several places; large 
stones falling down on every side from the cracks, 
and the ends 5 of most of the rafters starting out from 
the roof. To add 6 to this terrifying scene, the sky in 

1 Lesson 17, <?. 2 jam. 3 ami. * quod ' quidem. 

5 Lesson 5, 1. 6 accedit . . . quod. 



172 Latin Cojnfosition. 

a moment became so gloomy that I could now distin- 
guish no particular object ; j it was an Egyptian 7 dark- 
ness indeed, such 8 as might be felt ; owing, no doubt, 
to the prodigious j clouds j of dust and lime raised from 
so violent a concussion/ and, as some reported, to 
sulphureous exhalations, but qq this I cannot affirm ; 
however, it is certain I found j myself almost choked 9 
for near ten minutes.® 

2. I had still presence d of mind enough left 11 to put 
on a pair of shoes d and a coat, 1 the first that came in 
my way, which 10 was every thing cc I saved, and in this 
dress I hurried down stairs, and made j directly to that 
end of the street which opens 11 to the Tagus. 

3. In the midst of our devotions, ff the second great j 
shock came on, little less violent than the first, and 
completed the ruin ff of those buildings which had been 
already much shattered. You may judge of the force ff 
of the shock, when I inform 12 you it was so violent that 
I could scarce keep on my knees ; but it was attended 13 
with some circumstances still more dreadful than the 
former. On a sudden I heard a general outcry , ff " The 
sea is 14 coming in, we shall be all lost." Upon this, 
turning my eyes towards the river, which in that place 
is near four miles broad, I could perceive it heaving 
and swelling in a most unaccountable 15 manner, as no 
wing was stirring. In an instant there appeared, at 
some h distance, a large body of water, rising as it 
were like a mountain. It p came on foaming and roar- 
ing, and rushed 7 towards the shore with such impetu- 
osity, that we all immediately ran for our lives J as fast 
as possible ; many were p actually 16 swept away, and 

7 Use cimmerius. 8 Express by mood. 9 animam intercludere. 

lu quae quidem. n specto. 12 ex eo quod. 13 habeo (j). 

14 Indir. disc. 15 mirabilis. 16 quidem. 



Exercises in Translation. 173 

the rest above their waist in water at a good distance 
from the banks. For my own part, 2 1 had the narrow- 
est escape, ff and q should certainly have been lost, had 
I not grasped a large beam that lay on the ground, 
till the water returned to its channel, which it did y 
almost at the same instant, with equal rapidity. As 
there now appeared 00 at least as much danger from the 
sea cc as the land, and I scarce knew 17 whither to retire 
for shelter/ I took a sudden resolution of returning 
back, with my clothes all dripping, to the area of St. 
Paul's. 

4. The new scenes of horror d I met with here 
exceed 18 all description ; nothing could be heard but 
sighs and groans; I did not meet with a soul j in the 
passage who was not 19 bewailing the death ff of his 
nearest relations and dearest friends, or the loss ff of 
all his substance ; I could 11 hardly take a single step, 
without 19 treading on the dead or the dying : in some 
places d lay coaches, with their masters, horses, and 
riders, almost crushed in pieces ; here mothers, with 
infants in their arms ; there ladies richly dressed, 
priests, friars, gentlemen, mechanics, either in the 
same 20 condition, or just expiring; some had 21 their 
backs or thighs broken, others vast stones on their 
breasts ; some lay almost buried in the rubbish, and, 
crying out in vain to the passengers for succour, were 
left to perish with the rest. 

5. As soon as it grew dark, another scene pre- 
sented j itself little less shocking than those already 
described : u the whole city appeared 11 in a blaze, 22 
which was so bright that I could easily see to read by 
it. 23 It may be said without exaggeration 24 it was on 

17 habeo. 18 verba deficere, 19 quin. ,2 ° Explain particulars. 

- l esse. 22 flamma. 23 With lux (/). 24 rem augere. 



1 74 Latin Composition. 

fire at least in a hundred j different places at once, and 
thus continued- 1 burning for six days together, without 
intermission, or 25 the least attempt being made to stop 
its progress. j 

6. It went j on consuming every thing the earthquake 
had spared, 1 and 26 the people were so dejected and 
terrified, that few or none had 11 courage 11 enough to 
venture down to save any part of their substance ; j 
every one had his eyes turned towards the flames, 
and p stood 11 looking on with silent grief, which was 
only interrupted 7 by the cries and shrieks of women 
and children calling on the saints and angels for 
succour. 

2 5 dum (p). 26 Lesson 22, 3. b. 

XXXIII. Character of Trajan. — Gibbon. 

1. Trajan 1 was ambitious of fame; and, 2 as long 
as mankind shall continue- 1 to bestow 3 more liberal 
applause upon their 4 destroyers than upon their bene- 
factors, the thirst of military glory will ever be the 5 
vice of the most exalted 6 characters. 3 The praises of 
Alexander, transmitted by a succession of poets and 
historians, had kindled a dangerous emulation in the 
mind of Trajan. 7 Like 8 him, the Roman emperor 
undertook an expedition ff against the nations of the 
East; but 9 he lamented, 10 with a sigh, that his ad- 
vanced age scarcely left y him any hopes of equalling 
the renown of the son m of Philip. 

1 The proper name should in strictness be omitted, unless opposed to 
some other person, when it would be introduced by autem, 

2 etenim (qq). 3 prosequi (I). 

4 With homo, because it is not the same persons who are destroyed. 

5 proprium. 6 eximius quisque, to specialize the expression. 

7 With hie: "had kindled him to." 

8 With clause : introduce with et vero. 9 Lesson 22, 3. a. 10 querL 



Exercises in Translation. 175 

2. Yet the success 00 of Trajan, m however transient, 
was 11 rapid cc and specious. The qq degenerate Partis- 
ans, broken by intestine discord, fled 1 before his 
arms. He descended 12 the river Tigris in triumph, ff 
from the mountains of Armenia to the Persian Gulf. 
He enjoyed the honor 13 of being the first, as qq he was 
the last, of the Roman generals who ever navigated 
that remote sea. His fleets ravaged 7 the coasts of 
Arabia ; and Trajan vainly flattered himself 14 that he 
was approaching towards the confines of India. 
Every 15 day the astonished senate received the intelli- 
gence of new names and new nations, that acknowl- 
edged his sway. They were informed that the kings 
of Bosporus, Colchis, Iberia, Albania, and even the 
Parthian monarch himself, had accepted their diadems 
from the hands of the emperor ; that the independent 
tribes of the Median and Carduchian hills had im- 
plored his protection ; and that the rich countries of 
Armenia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, were reduced 
into the state of provinces. 

11 utor (y ). 12 devehi. l8 Lit. "by a singular fortune," &c. 

14 Lit. "rejoiced, being deceived by a false hope." 15 identidem. 



XXXIV. Character of Cato. — Middleton. 

In his private 1 life 1 he was severe, morose, inexor- 
able, banishing all the softer affections as natural 1 
enemies ff to justice, and as suggesting false motives* 
from favor, clemency, and compassion. In public 
affairs he was the same ; had but one rule of policy, 11 
— to adhere 2 to what was right, without 3 regard to 
times or circumstances, or 4 even to force 1 that could 

1 With natura. 2 amplecti. 3 Lesson 23, 2. c\ 

* New clause with adeo ut. 



1 76 Latin Composition . 

control him : for instead 5 of managing the power dd of 
the great *so as to mitigate the 6 ill, or extract any good 
from it, he was always urging it x to acts ff of violence 
by a perpetual defiance ; g so that, with the best inten- 
tion in the world, 3 he often did great harm to the 
republic. This was his general behavior : ff yet from 
some particular- 1 facts explained 7 above, it appears 
that his strength 7 of mind was not impregnable, but 
had its .weak places 8 of pride, ambition, and party 
zeal, which, when encouraged 11 and flattered to a 
certain point, 9 would betray 10 him sometimes into 
measures 11 contrary to his ordinary rule of right and 
truth. The last act ff of his life was agreeable to his 
nature and philosophy. 1 When he could not longer 
be what 1 he had been, and when the ills of life o'err- 
balanced y the good (which, by the principles 1 of his 
sect, 1 was a just cause for dying), he put an end to 
his life with 11 a spirit and resolution which would 
make one imagine that he was glad to have found an 
occasion of dying in his proper character.* 1 On the 
whole, 12 his life 13 was rather admirable than amiable, 
fit to be praised rather than imitated. 14 

5 Rel. clause with decere. 6 Clause with si (h). 1 constantia. 

8 With aditus (/). 9 finis, 10 abducere, with personal subject. 

11 usus. 12 Clause with ut. 13 With verb. 

14 With exemplum proponere. 



XXXV. Of Studies. — Bacon. 

1. Studies serve for delight, for ornament, and 
for ability. Their q chief use ff for delight is in pri- 
vateness and retiring ; for ornament, is in discourse ; 
and for ability, is in the judgment and disposition dd of 
business ; for expert men can execute, and perhaps 



Exercises in Translation. 177 

judge of particulars one by one ; but the general 
counsels, and the plots 1 and marshalling 2 of affairs, 
come best from those that are learned. To spend too 
much time in studies, is sloth ; to use them too much 
for ornament, is affectation ; to make judgment wholly 
by their rules, is the humor 11 of a scholar. They per- 
fect nature, and are 3 perfected by experience ; for 
natural abilities 4 are like natural plants, 4 that need 
pruning by study ; and studies themselves do give 
forth directions too much at large, 5 except they be 
bounded in by experience. Crafty men contemn 
studies, simple men admire them, and wise men use 
them ; for they 6 teach not their own use ; but 7 that is 8 
a wisdom without them and above them, won by ob- 
servation^ 

2. Read not to contradict and confute, nor to believe 
and take for granted, nor to find 11 talk and discourse, 
but to weigh and consider. Some books are to be 
tasted, others to be swallowed, and some few to be 
chewed and digested ; that is, 9 some books are to 
be read only in parts ; 10 others to be read, but not 
curiously ; and some few to be read wholly, 11 but with 
dilligence and attention. Some books also may be 
read by deputy, and extracts made of them by others ; 
but that would be 11 only in the less important argu- 
ments 12 and the meaner sort 11 of books ; else distilled 6 
books are like common distilled waters, flashy 13 
things. 11 

3. Reading maketh y a full man; 11 conference a 
ready man ; and writing an exact man ; and, q there- 

1 ratio. 2 ordo. 3 Insert ipse for the antithesis. 

4 Use vitis or some particular word ( /). 5 remissus ac solutus. 

6 ut qui. 1 qui quid em. 8 nascor ex. 9 quod dicit. 

10 percurrere. ll per in comp. 12 loci. 13 vapidus. • 



178 Latin Composition. 

fore, if a man write little, he had need have a great 
memory ; if he confer little, he had need have a 
present wit ; and if he read little, he had need have 
much cunning, to seem to know that he doth not. 
Histories 1 make men wise ; poetry, witty ; the mathe- 
matics, 1 subtile; natural philosophy, deep; moral, 
grave ; logic and rhetoric, able to contend : Abeunt 
studia in mores ; u nay, there is no stand or impedi- 
ment in the wit, but may be wrought out by fit 
studies. 

14 Insert ut aiunt to show the proverb. 



XXXVI. Antony in Defeat.- — North's Plutarch. 

1. Antonius, flying upon this overthrow, fell 1 into 
great misery all at once ; but the chiefest want of all 
other, and that pinched him most, was famine. How- 
beit, he was cc of such a strong nature, that by patience 
he would a overcome 8 any adversity : and v the heavier 
fortune lay upon him, the more constant shewed he 
himself. Every man that feeleth want or adversity 
knoweth by virtue and discretion what he should 2 do ; 
but when indeed they are overlaid 3 with extremity, 
and be sore oppressed, few have the hearts 1 to follow 
that which they praise and commend, and much less 3 
to avoid that they reprove and mislike ; but rather 3 
to the contrary, 2 they yield to their accustomed easy 
life, and, through faint heart and lack ff of courage, do 
change their first mind and purpose. And therefore 
it was a wonderful example x to the soldiers, to see 11 
Antonius, v that was brought up in all fineness and 
superfluity, so easily to drink puddle-water, and to 

1 excipere (cc). 2 optimum factu. 3 non modo . . . sed etiam. 



Exercises in Translation. 179 

eat wild fruits and roots. And moreover it is re- 
ported, that even as they passed the Alps, they did 
eat the barks of trees, and such beasts as never man 
tasted of their flesh before. 

2. Now their intent was to join with the legions 
that were on the other side 4 of the mountains, under 
Lepidus' charge ; u whom Antonius took to be his 
friend, because he had holpen him to many things at 
Caesar's hand, through his means. When he was 
come to the place where Lepidus was, 1 he camped 
hard by him ; and when he saw that no man came 
to him to put 5 him in any hope, he determined to ven- 
ture himself, and to go unto Lepidus. Since the 
overthrow he had s at Modena, he suffered 5 his beard to 
grow at length, and never dipt it, that it was mar- 
vellous long, and the hair of his head also without 
combing ; and besides all this, he went in a mourning dd 
gown, and after this 6 sort came hard to the trenches 
of Lepidus' camp. Then he began to speak s unto the 
soldiers, and many of them their hearts yearned 7 for 
pity to see him so poorly arrayed, and some also 
through his words began to pity 1 him : insomuch that 
Lepidus began to be afraid, and therefore commanded 
all the trumpets to sound together to stop the soldiers' 
ears, that they should not hearken 1 to Antonius. 

3. This notwithstanding, 2 the soldiers took s the more 
pity of him, and spake secretly with him by Clodius' 
and Lselius' means, whom they sent unto him dis- 
guised in women's apparel, and gave him- counsel 
that he should not be afraid to enter into their camp, 
for there were a great number of soldiers that would 
receive him, and kill Lepidus, if he would say the 

4 With transgredi. 5 confirmare. 6 miser (/, v, x). • 

1 commovere (/, s). 



180 Latin Composition. 

word. Antonius would not suffer them to hurt him, 
but the next morning he went with his army to wade 
a ford, at a little river that ran between them ; and 
himself was the foremost man that took the river to 
get over, seeing a number of Lepidus' camp, 1 that 
gave him their hands, plucked up the stakes, and laid 
flat 8 the bank of their trench to let him into their camp. 
When he was come into their camp, 1 and that he had 
all the army at his commandment, he used Lepidus 
very courteously, embraced him, and called him 
father: and p though indeed Antonius m did all, and 
ruled the whole army, yet he always gave Lepidus 
the name and honor of the captain. 

8 complanare. 

XXXVII. Speech of Antony. — Shakespeare. 

Friends, Romans, countrymen, lend me your ears : 

I come to bury Caesar, not to praise him. 

The evil that men do lives after them ; 

The good is oft interred with their bones : 

So let it be with Caesar. The noble Brutus 

Hath told you Caesar was ambitious : 

If it were so, it was a grievous fault ; 

And grievously hath Caesar answer'd it. 

Here, under leave of Brutus and the rest, — 

For Brutus is an honourable man ; 

So are they all, all honourable men, — 

Come I to speak in Caesars funeral. 

He was my friend, faithful and just to me : 
But Brutus says he was ambitious ; 
And Brutus is an honourable man. 
He hath brought many captives home to Rome, 
Whose ransoms did the general coffers fill : 
Did this in Caesar seem ambitious ? 
When that the poor have cried, Caesar hath wept : 



Exercises in Translation. 181 

Ambition should be made of sterner stuff : 

Yet Brutus says he was ambitious ; 

And Brutus is an honourable man. 

You all did see that on the Lupercal 

I thrice presented him a kingly crown, 

Which he did thrice refuse. Was this ambition ? 

Yet Brutus says he was ambitious ; 

And, sure, he is an honourable man. 

I speak not to disprove what Brutus spoke, 

But here I am, to speak what I do know. 

You all did love him once, — not without cause : 
What cause withholds you, then, to mourn for him ? — 

judgment, thou art fled to brutish beasts, 

And men have lost their reason ! — Bear with me ; 
My heart is in the coffin there with Caesar, 
And I must pause till it come back to me. 

i Cit. Methinks there is much reason in his sayings. 

2 Cit. If thou consider rightly of the matter, 
Caesar has had great wrong. 

3 Cit. Has he not, masters ? 

1 fear there will a worse come in his place. 

4 Cit. Mark'd ye his words ? He would not take the crown ; 
Therefore 'tis certain he was not ambitious. 

i Cit. If it be found so, some will dear abide it. 

2 Cit. Poor soul ! his eyes are red as fire with weeping. 

3 Cit. There's not a nobler man in Rome than Antony. 

4 Cit. Now mark him ; he begins again to speak. 
Ant. But yesterday the word of Caesar might 

Have stood against the world : now lies he there, 
And none so poor to do him reverence. 

masters, if I were dispos'd to stir 
Your hearts and minds to mutiny and rage, 

1 should do Brutus wrong, and Cassius wrong, 
Who, you all know, are honourable men. 

I will not do them wrong: I rather choose 
To wrong the dead, to wrong myself, and you, 
Than I will wrong such honourable men. 



1 8 2 Latin Composition . 

But here's a parchment with the seal of Caesar, — ■ 
I found it in his closet, — 'tis his will : 
Let but the commons hear this testament, 
(Which, pardon me, I do not mean to read,) 
And they would go and kiss dead Caesar's wounds, 
And dip their napkins in his sacred blood ; 
Yea, beg a hair of him for memory, 
And, dying, mention it within their wills, 
Bequeathing it as a rich legacy 
Unto their issue. 

4 Cit We'll hear the will : read it, Mark Antony. 

Citizens. The will, the will ! we will hear Caesar's will. 

Ant. Have patience, gentle friends ; I must not read it : 
It is not meet you know how Caesar lov'd you. 
You are not wood, you are not stones, but men ; 
And, being men, hearing the will of Caesar, 
It will inflame you, it will make you mad. 
'Tis good you know not that you are his heirs ; 
For, if you should, O, what would come of it ! 

4 Cit. Read the will ! we'll hear it, Antony ; 
You shall read us the will, — Caesar's will ! 

Ant. W T ill you be patient? will you stay awhile ? 
I have o'ershot myself, to tell you of it. 
I fear I wrong the honourable men 
Whose daggers have stabb'd Caesar ; I do fear it. 

4 Cit. They were traitors : honourable men ! 

Citizens. The will ! the testament ! 

2 Cit. They were villains, murderers. The will ! read the 
will! 

Ant. You will compel me, then, to read the will ? 
Then make a ring about the corpse of Caesar, 
And let me show you him that made the will. 
Shall I descend ? and will you give me leave ? 

Citizens. Come down. 

2 Cit. Descend. \He comes down. 

3 Cit. You shall have leave. 

4 Cit. A ring ! stand round. 



Exercises in Translation. 183 

1 Cit. Stand from the hearse ; stand from the body. 

2 Cit Room for Antony ! — most noble Antony ! 
Ant. Nay, press not so upon me ; stand far off. 
Citizens. Stand back ; room ! bear back. 

Ant. If you have tears, prepare to shed them now. 
You all do know this mantle : I remember 
The first time ever Caesar put it on ; 
'Twas on a Summer's evening, in his tent, 
That day he overcame the Nervii. 
Look, in this place ran Cassius' dagger through : 
See what a rent the envious Casca made : 
Through this the well-beloved Brutus stabb'd ; 
And, as he pluck'd his cursed steel away, 
Mark how the blood of Caesar follow'd it, — 
As rushing out of doors, to be resolv'd 
If Brutus so unkindly knock'd, or no ; 
For Brutus, as you know, was Caesar's angel .: 
Judge, O you gods, how dearly Caesar lov'd him ! 
This was the most unkindest cut of all ; 
For, when the noble Caesar saw him stab, 
Ingratitude, more strong than traitors' arms, 
Quite vanquish'd him : then burst his mighty heart ; 
And, in his mantle muffling up his face, 
Even at the base of Pompey's statua, 
Which all the while ran blood, great Caesar fell. 
O, what a fall was there, my countrymen ! 
Then I, and you, and all of us fell down, 
Whilst bloody treason flourish'd over us. 

O, now you weep ; and, I perceive, you feel 
The dint of pity : these are gracious drops. 
Kind souls, what, weep you, when you but behold 
Our Caesar's vesture wounded ? Look you here, 
Here is himself, marr'd, as you see, with traitors. 

1 at O piteous spectacle ! 

2 Cit. O noble Caesar ! 

3 Cit. O woeful day ! 

4 Cit O traitors, villains ! 



1 84 L at in Composition. 

1 Cit. O most bloody sight ! 

2 Cit. We will be reveng'd. 

Citizens. Revenge, — about," — seek, — burn, — fire, — kill, 
— slay, — let not a traitor live ! 
Ant. Stay, countrymen. 

1 Cit. Peace there ! hear the noble Antony. 

2 Cit. We'll hear him, we'll follow him, we'll die with him. 
Ant. Good friends, sweet friends, let me not stir you up 

To such a sudden flood of mutiny. 

They that have done this deed are honourable : 

What private griefs they have, alas, I know not, 

That made them do't ; they're wise and honourable, 

And will, no doubt, with reasons answer you. 

I come not, friends, to steal away your hearts : 

I am no orator, as Brutus is ; 

But, as you know me all, a plain blunt man, 

That love my friend ; and that they know full well 

That gave me public leave to speak of him. 

For I have neither wit, nor words, nor worth, 

Action, nor utterance, nor the -power of speech, 

To stir men's blood : I only speak right on ; 

I tell you that which you yourselves do know ; 

Show you sweet Caesar's wounds, poor, poor dumb mouths, 

And bid them speak for me : but were I Brutus, 

And Brutus Antony, there were an Antony 

Would ruffle up your spirits, and put a tongue 

In every wound of Caesar, that should move 

The stones of Rome to rise in mutiny. 



INDEX. 



A or an (indefinite article), 18. 

Ablative as Object, 21 ; of Separa- 
tion, 32 ; with Comparatives, 32 ; 
of Time, 39 ; Ablative Absolute, 
use of, 58. 

Abstract term, expressed by sub- 
stantive clause, 75; use of, 
avoided in Latin, 121, 122. 

Accusative as Object, 21. 

Adjective, position of, 2 ; agree- 
ment, 6 ; special uses, 8 ; used 
as noun, 8 ; as abstract, 9 ; for 
the possessive, 9 ; with Cases, 
23 ; for genitive, 35. 

A FEW, or SEVERAL, l8. 

Allusive expressions (in English), 
often omitted in Latin, 125. 

Antecedent noun in relative clause, 
preceding the demonstrative, 15. 

Any (" any one who "), 18. 

Apposition, examples of its use, 3. 

As (correlative), 16. 

Cases, constructions of, 20-44; a s 
objects of Verbs, 20; as modify- 
ing Adjectives, 23 ; indirect re- 
lations, 25 ; expressing Cause, 
Means, and Quality, 28 ; Separa- 
tion and Comparison, 32 ; the 
Genitive, 34 ; use of Two Cases, 
27 ; of Time and Place, 39 ; with 
Prepositions, 43. 

Cause and Occasion, 29 ; clauses 
of, 69. 

Characteristic, clauses of, 70. 

Compound Verbs, regimen of, 43, 44. 

Concessive expressions, 73. 

Concrete terms preferred in Latin, 
122. 

Conditional Sentences, 72. 



Cum or dum, clause with, used in- 
stead of participle, 57, 58. 

Dates, how expressed, 40. 

Dative of indirect object, 21 ; vari- 
ous uses of, 25-27. 

Depriving, expressions of, 32. 

£)um, clause with, used instead of 
participle, 57, 58. 

Each, 19; Either, 18; Every, 19. 

Exclamation, forms of, 86. 

Far from " (with participial noun), 
how to be expressed, 83. 

"From" (with participial noun), ex- 
pressed by quominus or quin, 84. 

General Precepts, how expressed 
in Latin, 64. 

Genitive, its position, 2 ; as object, 
21 ; of value, 30; special uses of, 
34; partitive uses, 35. 

Gerundive constructions (English 
participial noun), 60. 

Have, its uses as auxiliary, 84. 

Hendiadys, in Latin use, 5, 123. 

Historical Infinitive, 46. 

Historical Present, 45. 

Hour of the day, 40. 

Imperative forms of expression, 63. 

Indirect Discourse, 80. 

Indirect Questions, 81. 

Infinitive, its uses, 53-56 ; historical, 
46 ; as abstract noun, 53 ; forms 
in Indirect Discourse, 54. 

"In respect to " (specification), 24. 

Intermediate Clauses, 77, 78. 

Jam, to express beginning of an 
action, 46. 

" Law," expressions for, in Latin, 
120. 

Literal forms of speech, 123. 



1 86 



Index. 



Main Word, position of, 2, 129. 

" Manage to," &c, how expressed 
in Latin, 83. 

Modifying word, position of, 2. 

Months, names of, 40. 

Must, &c, expressed by Gerundive 
(always passive), 49. 

Object Cases, 20, 21,; indirect, 26, 
37 ; after compound verbs, 43, 44. 

Ojftrium, equivalent to " sense of 
duty," 121. 

Order of Words, 1-3. 

Ought, &c. (Gerundive), 49. 

Parenthetical expressions, " to be 
brief," "so to speak," &c, 84. 

Participial Noun (-ing), how ex- 
pressed in Latin, 60 ; Construc- 
tions, 57. 

Participles : agreement of, in com- 
pound tenses, 7 ; substituted by 
temporal clause, 57 ; as modi- 
fiers, 58. 

Passive Voice, uses of, 49, 50 ; use 
of cases with, 51. 

Periodical structure, 126. 

Place, names of, and their con- 
struction, 41. 

Point of View in Latin often differs 
from that in English, 43, 121. 

Position expressed by ab, 43. 

Possessives, 11, 12. 

Potential Mood (English), how ex- 
pressed in Latin, 63. 

Prepositions (Latin), use of, 42; in 
Compounds, 43, 44. 

Price and Value, how expressed, 30. 

Pronoun, use of, 5, 10; Reflexive, 
11; Demonstrative, 13; Rela- 
tive, 14; Interrogative, 17; In- 
definite, 18. 

Purpose, with Gerundive, 61 ; 
Clause of, 69, 70., 

Quality, how expressed, 29. 

Quiii or quominus, clause with, 84. 

Reflexive Pronoun, 11. 



Relative Clause, its position, 2, 15; 
the relative not to be omitted, 15 ; 
used for other constructions, 
15; as* Connective, 16; caution 
as to its use, 126 (0), 128 (v). 

Result, Clause of, 69. 

Saying, &c, Verbs of, followed by 
. Indirect Discourse, 54, 80. 

Sentence, form of, 126-129. 

Separation, &c., 32. 

Several, 18. 

Societas (the Latin word), 121. 

Subject, to be expressed in indirect 
discourse, 80 ; is a person rather 
than a thing, a thing rather than 
an abstraction, 121. 

Subjunctive (English), how ren- 
dered in Latin, 63. 

Substantive Clauses, 74-76 ; for 
abstract noun, 75. 

Tenses, narrative, use of, 45, 46; 
perfect and imperfect, 45 ; present 
as perfect, 46 ; sequence of, in 
indirect discourse, 81 ; with as 
if, and similar phrases, y^- 

That, as preventing repetition, 12; 
as introducing indirect discourse, 
54, 80 ; various clauses with, 75. 

Time, expressions of, 40 ; relations 
of, 66. 

To or for, 24, 25, 26. 

" To be brief," "so to speak," and 
similar phrases, 84. 

Too ... to, expressed by com- 
parative with quam ut, 70, 71. 

Two Cases following a verb, ^y. 

Value, expressions of, 30. 

Verb, agreement of, 4, 5 ; uses of, 
45-64. 

When, expressions signifying, 66 ; 
meaning whenevei', 6y ; meaning 
since, 6y. 

Without, followed by Participial 
Noun, how expressed in Latin, 61. 

Word or Phrase, choice of, 1 10-126. 



INDEX 

TO THE SYNTAX OF ALLEN AND GREENOUGH'S LATIN GRAMMAR, WITH 
PARALLEL REFERENCES TO GILDERSLEEVE'S GRAMMAR. 



A. &G. 
45 i 



46 



47 



48 



G. 

192 

» 
284, 326 

474 
475. 612 

201, 202 R X 

202, 319 

i97> 3M 
319 

412 R 2 
319 R 2 

359 
202, 285 

324 

281 

286 

281 Exc. 3 

282 

M 

202 R X 
202 R 5 
616 R 3 
202 R 2 

195 R * 



293 R 2 
284 R 
440 

195 R 2 

202 R 4 
423 

535 
195 R 4 

360 R I 

363 
„ R f 

324 R6 
314 



287 R 

306 

6l6 

6x6 

». R3 
619 

618 R 3 



A. &G. 
48 2 



49 



50 



R I 
R2 
R3 

M 
3 
a 
b 
c 

R 
d 
R 

4 
a 

R 
b 
R 



G. 



617 

618, 622 
622 
618 

616 R 2 

612 R X 

613 R I 
202 

319 R « 

281 & R 2 
283 

„ R2 
202 R I 

281 Exc. I 

194 
198 

199 R3 

688, 200 

357 

360 

„ RI 

„ R3 
365 

„ R I 

*> R2, 3 

367 R 
359 
364 

„ R 

379 
372 
366 
369 
368 

37i 

„ R2 
37i 

» R7 

» R5 
370 R2 

368 R 2 
361 R 2 
36l 

357 R * 
373, 374 
374 R 2 
» R3 
356 RX 
361 R x 

375 

» R ii 2 
377 & R 1 

» R 2 



A. &G. 
50 t 



51 



R 

R 2 

R3 

b 

c 

d 

R I 

R2 



52 



376 
» R 

381, 382 

389 R 2 

4°5 R 3 
418 end 
343 

t, R I 
344 

n 

„ RI 
348 

345 

fi 

„ RI 
347 

345 

346, 344 
»» 
33o 

346 

344 R2 

208 

345 R3 

344 R 3 

388 R 1 

349 

*> R 2 
346 
322 
206 
353 
352 

» R 

35o 

356 & R 6 
», R 3 

,, R 2 

» R 1 



355 
343 
11 

354 
ff K 
35* 

344*1 
327 



Parallel References. 



a. & G, 



R 


G. 

207 


I 


329 


R 


207 


a 


329 R 1 


b 


33i 


c 


3 2 9 Rl 


d 


33o 


e 


696 


f 




2 


333 


a 


334 


b 


33o R 1 


c 


333 


R 


„ R 2 


d 


„ & R 2 


3 


33i R 2 


a 


?> »> 


b 


'J >» 


c 


332 


R 


„ Rl 


4 







340 


£ 


527 


£ 


335-8 




194 « 3 


tf 


„ 


b 


324 R 1 




338 


N 


5) 


I 


388-9 


<£ 


388 


£ 


»J 


C 


»» 


d 


390 


R 


it 


£ 


389 R 2 


R 


373 R6 


2 


394 


i£ 


395 


R 


» 


* 




£ 


396 & R 2 


d 


„ R I 


% 


406-7 


N 


383 





398 R 2 


£ 


407 R I 


£ 


372 & R 


4 


403 


tf 


205 R I 


£ 


403 


5 


399 


N 


397 


<£ 


311 R x 


R 


,, R 2 


£ 


399 R » 


£ 


311 R4 


N 


399 R 1 


6 


401, 403 


a, 


391, 401, 403 


R 


346 R 2, 348 


£ 




€ 


389 & R I 


R 


373 R 6 


4 


405 


* 


400 


K 




7 


402 


a 1 


„ RI 



A. &G. 
54 



55 



56 



57 



401 & R 
404 

379 

380 

379 

397 

387 

4°7> 373 R 1 

403 R3 

408-9 

408 R 

438 R 2 

384, 392 

392, 337 

392 R 2 

335 

328 

364 R 

335 

342, 384, 388 

4i3 

411 

410 

436 

412 

39 R 

412 R I 

» R3 

385-6, 384 R 2 

410 R 3, 4 

411 R I 

387 
413 

J> 
417 
418 
419 

384 R 1 
419 

Appendix 
418 
,, end 

416 R 
App'x; 356 r 4 

418 R 

417 R 
416 R 
566, 576 
403 

>» 
414 R 
245 R 
246 
247 
250-258 

597-599 
509, 469, 562 

256 

266 Rl 
266-7 
266 R 2 

575 

266 R 3 
253, 255 
253 
254 



A. &G. 
57 a 



/ 



58 



254 R I 
,, R2 
257, 608, 6lO 

251. 258 
259 

264, 266 
267 

262 

260 R 

265, 268 
420 

34i R 
423, 535 
535 
424 

» R*, 3 
271, 4 

527 
276 

535 R* 
197 R 1 
527 RJ 
34i R 
424 R 4 



z 


34i 


N 


534, 560 1 


h 


650 




213 


X 


270 


2 


218 


a 


221 


b 


2l8 R 2 


c 


219 


d 


220 


e 


„ R X 


f 


511 R x 


3 


222 


a 


It 


b 


225 


c 


224 


d 


»» R3 


e 


246 R 2 


4 


234 


5 


226 


a 


228 


b 


569 


c 


228 R 2 


d 


224 


R 


227 R 2 


6 


233 


7 


236 


R 


tt R2-4 


8 


244 


9 


271 


20 


510, 216 


a 


511 R 2 


b 


5IO R 


c 


513 


R 


ft 


d 




e 


511 R I 


/ 


599 * 5 


i 


517 R 2 
519 & R 


IX 


276 


a 


246 



Parallel References. 



a. &g. 
58 « 



59 



60 



61 



62 



G. 

277 & R 
530 

274 
275 



240 
59o 

591 & R 3 
628 

59° 

596* 

»♦ 

568-9 
596* 
596 
597 

599 
it 
„ *i 

„ R2 

246 R 3 
599 R 3, 5 
597-8 
597 
598 

236 R 2 
•597-8 

195 R 6 

59 8 R x 
596* 
597 R 3 

569 R 2 
246 R 4 

594 



600 



2 


602 


R 


613 R2 


a 


602 


b 


252 R I 


c 


246 R 1-3 


R 


»» 


d 






604 foil. 


I 


604 


R 


ft 


2 


606 foil. 


3 


575 


4 


592 


a 


592 R 2, 5 


b 


n R4 


c 


597 R 4 




499 


d 


606-10 




6l2 R 2 




56l 


1 


563 




568-9 


2 


522, 2 


N 


582 R I, 6 


a 


563 


1 


564-5 


2 


563 R 


4 


582 



A. &G. 
62 N 

R I 

R 2 

R3 



63 



64 



65 



66 



67 



582 

$1 R 

582 

579, 574 R 

577-9 

574-5 
587 &R 

589 

538 

539, 587 R 

54i 

636 

587 

544 

545 

545»2 
688 R 
484 R 2 

546 

544 R I & 2 

553, 554 
543, 558 R 4 
547t 549 
55o, 551 
633 

634 ■ 

633 

3i3 

629 R 
637 

556 R 2 

509, 3, 4 
5°9» 2 
509, 3 

54i 
539 R 
54i R X 

»» 
666 
665 
651 

„ R X 

653 

424 R 3 

527 R 2 

644 

630 R I, 2 
638, 644 
659 

„ R 2 
654 R I 

„ R 2 
469, 654 
454 

5i4, 5i5 R3 
654 R 2 
470 
469 r 3 

» R 1 

tt 

tt R2 

462, 603 

655 

664 



A &G. 
68 i 



69 



71 



70 



253-4 

254 Rl 

256 

266 

264 

546 R I 

655 

626 

628 

632 
633 
634 

636, 637 
582 

5<>9 



R 


507 

526 


I 


507 


2 


527, 532 


a 


528 


b 


„ R 


c 


652 R 2 


d 


527 R 3 


3 


546 


a 


„ &RI 


b 


532 


c 


t» 


R 


608 


d 


424 




546 & R 2 




200 


e 


547t 549 


f 


552 


R 


546 R 3 




547 R 2 


g 


532 R 4 


4 


557 


a 


558 


b 


647 R4 


c 


560 


R 


t, R 


d 


558 R I 


e 


557 


/ 


559 


Z 


55it x 


R 


ti 2 


k 


546 R 2 


N 


M 


5 


525 


a 


„ R 2 


b 


542, 533 


R 






451 foil. 


I 


456-8 


R 


455 


a 


462 


b 


469 


R 


454 


C 


460 


d 


459 R 


2 


460 


R 


46! 


a 


460 


b 


459 


c 


461 R 



Parallel References. 



A. &g. 
71 



72 



d 


460, 463 


3 


473 


a 
b 


t> 


i 


278 


a 
b 


«i 373 R 

278 R 


€ 
2 


572 R, 586 
438 


a 

b 


439 
» R 


c 
d 

3 


242 
♦» R 

667 


R 


„ R I 


M 


„ R2 



A. &G. 
72 



73 



G. 

390 
230 

537 

comp. 275, 2 

536, 524 R I 

279 

239. 673 
599 R 3 
243 
439 
243 
» R 
428 R3 

431 
427 

„ R I, 426 



A.&G. 
73 



74 



R 
N 
3 
a 

R 



428 

„ R3 

427 R I 
429 fell. 

429 & R 

430 & R 

433 

43 ?» 434 



435 

436 

437 



Publishers, 

13 Tremont Place, . BOSTON. 



Terms : Cash in Thirty Days. Wholesale and Retail Prices. 



ENGLISH. 

Wholesale. Retail. 

A MANUAL OF ENGLISH LITERATURE, Histori- 

cal and Critical : With an Appendix on English Metres. By Thomas Ar- 
nold, M. A., of University College, Oxford. American Edition. Revised. 12mo. 
Cloth. 549 pages $ 1.60 $2.00 

This manual presents in a small compass an accurate and interesting view of Eng- 
lish literature. It is divided into two sections. The first of these, treating of the 
history of the subject, gives a complete list of the various English authors and their 
works, from the earliest times down to the year 1850. This is no dull, dry record, 
which shall be a burden to the memory ; the author has added references to foreign 
literature and such explanations and anecdotes as serve to enlighten the reader about 
the different writers and to give him a fair comprehension of the merits and charac- 
teristics of their different works. This is done more by careful accounts of the vari- 
ous books composing English literature than by making long, disconnected quota- 
tions, or by the mere heaping together of more or less appropriate adjectives. The 
different threads into which the subject naturally divides itself are all kept distinctly 
apart, and the comments, though brief, are apt. In the record, or critical part, the 
author's fuller remarks and illustrations serve to supplement the occasional brevity 
of the first p rt. A great merit of the book is that it treats English literature as a 
connected whole ; another, that the meagre list of facts is made palatable by discreet 
elucidation, which nowhere assumes to take the place of original study, but rather 
tends to lead the student on to independent work. It will be found useful by begin- 
ners, and even advanced scholars will not disdain a book that is so full of useful and 
accurate information. The subject is a vast one, but no department of it has been 
neglected by Mr. Arnold. The appendix on Metres will be found to be of value. In 
short, this is a scholarly volume. 

CARPENTER'S INTRODUCTION TO ANGLO- 

SAXON. An Introduction to the study of the Anglo-Saxon Language, Com- 
prising an Elementary Grammar, Selections for Reading with Notes, and a 
Vocabulary. By Stephen H. Carpenter, Professor of Logic and English Litera- 
ture in the University of Wisconsin, and Author of " English of the XIV. Cen- 
tury." 12mo. Cloth. 212 pages .... ... 1.00 1.25 

CRAIK'S ENGLISH OP SHAKESPEARE. Illustrated 

in a Philological Commentary on his Julius Caesar, by George L. Craik, Queen's 
College, Belfast. Edited by W. J. Rolfe, Cambridge. 16mo. Cloth. 402 
pages 1.40 1.75 

ELEMENTS OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. An 

Introduction to the study of Grammar and Composition. By Bernard Bigsby, 
Univ. Oxon., Superintendent of Public Schools, Port Huron; Authorof k ' The 
History of the English Language." 18mo. 169 pages 40 .50 

ENGLISH OF THE XIV. CENTURY. Illustrated by 

Notes, Grammatical and Etymological, on Chaucer's Prologue and Knight's 
Tale. Designed to serve as an Introduction to the Critical Study of English. 
By Stephen H. Carpenter, A. M. , Professor of Rhetoric and English Literature 
in the State University of Wisconsin. 12m\o. Cloth. 327 pages . . 1.40 1.75 

l 



Wholesale. Retail. 

FITZ'S TERRESTRIAL GLOBE. Mounted and Operated 

by an entirely new Method, with a Manual designed to accompany the Globe, the 
whole forming an easy and practical introduction to the study of Astronomy 

and Physical Geography $ 15.00 

The Globe is six inches in diameter, and is mounted in an ingenious and original 
way, for which patents have been taken out in this and in foreign countries. The 
Globe, as mounted, makes such phenomena as the seasons, the changes in the lemrth 
of day and night, etc., etc., at once clear to the apprehension of an ordinary child. 
For the usual verbal explanations which overtask the untrained imagination , it sub- 
stitutes material surfaces and lines and real motions, and thus aids the mind of the 
learner in the highest possible degree in forming correct and lasting impressions 
of phenomena which, however interesting, are in the abstract not easily under- 
stood. 

FITZ'S MANUAL. 12mo 80 1.00 

The Manual which accompanies the above Globe contains every direction for 
its use, with an explanation of the subjects which it is specially designed to illustrate, 
such as the changes in the length of day and night, the seasons, twilight, etc. 

A collection of more than forty problems is also given, with full directions for 
working them, and numerous practical exercises to be worked out by the learner on 
the Globe. Questions for examination and miscellaneous exercises are added at the 
end. 12mo. 

HUDSON'S FAMILY SHAKESPEARE : Plays selected 

and prepared, with Notes and Introductions, for Use in Families. 
Volume I., containing As You Like Ifc, The Merchant of Venice, Twelfth Night, 
First and Second of King Henry the Fourth, Julius Csssar, and Hamlet. 

Volume II., containing The Tempest, The Winter's Tale, King Henry the Fifth, 
King Richard the Third, King Lear, Macbeth, and Antony and Cleopatra. 

Volume III , containing A Midsummer Night's Dream, Much Ado about Nothing, 
King Henry the Eighth, Komeo and Juliet, Oymbeline, (Joriolanus, and Othello. 
And Hudson's Life, Art, and Characters of Shakespeare. 2 vols. 

5 vols. Cloth 8.00 10.00 

Half morocco 12.00 15 00 

Full calf 16.00 20.00 

HUDSON'S LIFE, ART, AND CHARACTERS OF 

SHAKESPEARE. Including an Historical Sketch of the Origin and Growth 
of the Drama in England, with Studies in the Poet's Dramatic Architecture, 
Delineation of Character, Humor, Style, and Moral Spirit, also wirh Critical 
Discourses on the following plays, — A Midsummer Night's Dream, The Mer- 
chant of Venice, The Merry Wives of Windsor, Much Ado about Nothing, As 
You Like It, Twelfth Night, All 's Well that Ends Well, Measure for Measure, 
The Tempest, The Winter's Tale, King John, King Riohard the Second, King 
Henry the Fourth, King Henry the Fifth, King Richard the Third, King Henry 
the Eighth, Romeo and Juliet, Julius Caesar, Hamlet, Macbeth, King Lear, 
Antony and Cleopatra, Othello, Cymbeline, and Coriolanus. In Two Volumes. 
12mo. Cloth. 969 pages 3.20 4.00 

HUDSON'S SERMONS. 16mo. Cloth .... 1.20 1.50 
HUDSON'S SCHOOL SHAKESPEARE. 1st Series. 

Containing As You Like It, The Two Parts of Henry IV., 

The Merchant op Venice, Julius Caesar, 

Twelfth Night, Hamlet. 

Selected and prepared for Use in Schools, Clubs, Classes, and Families. With In- 
troductions and Notes. By the Rev. Henry N. Hudson. 12mo. Cloth. 636 pages 1.60 2. 00 

HUDSON'S SCHOOL SHAKESPEARE. 2d Series. 

Containing The Tempest, King Richard the Third, 

The Winter's Tale, King Lear, 

King Henry the ^ifth, Macbeth, Antony, and Cleopatra. 
12mo. Cloth. 678 pages ' 1.60 2.00 

HUDSON'S SCHOOL SHAKESPEARE. 3d Series. 

Containing A Midsummer Night's Dream, Romeo and Juliet, 

Much Ado about Nothing, Cymbeline, 

King Henry VIII., Othello. Coriolanus, 

12mo. Cloth. 655 pages . 1.00 2.00 

2 



Wholesale. Retail. 

HUDSON'S SEPARATE PLAYS OF SHAKESPEARE. 

THE MERCHANT OF VENICE. In Paper Cover .... $0.32 $0.40 

JULIUS CESAR. In Paper Cover . . 32 .40 

HAMLET. In Paper Cover 32 .40 

THE TEMPEST. In Paper Cover 32 .40 

MACBETH. In Paper Cover 32 .40 

HENRY THE EIGHTH. In Paper Cover 32 .40 

AS YOU LIKE IT 32 .40 

HKNRY THE FOURTH. Part 1 32 .40 

KING LEAR 32 .40 

MUCH ADO ABOUT NOTHING 32 .40 

ROMEO AND JULIET 32 .40 

OTHELLO 32 .40 

A MIDSUMMER NIGHT'S DREAM 32 .40 

HUDSON'S PAMPHLET SECTIONS OP TEXT- 
BOOKS OF PROSE AND POETRY. 

BURKE. Section I. Preface, Contents, and pages 113-218 . . . .32 .40 

BURKE. Section II. Life, Contents, and pages 219 - 325 ... .32 .40 

"WEBSTER. Section I. Preface, Contents, and pages 335- 421 . . .32 .40 

WEBSTEK. Section II. Life, Contents, and pages 421 -552 . . .32 .40 

BACON. Preface, Life, Contents, and pages 553 -636 32 .40 

WORDSWORTH. Section II. Preface and pages 129 - 251 . . . .32 .40 

COLERIDGE AND BURNS. Preface and Contents 504 - 614 ... .32 .40 

HUDSON'S TEXT-BOOK OP POETRY. From Words- 
worth, Coleridge, Burns, Beattie, Goldsmith, and Thomson. With Sketches 
of the Author's Lives For use in Schools and Classes. By the Rev. H. N. 

Hudson. 12nio. Cloth. 704 pages 1.60 2.00 

The aim of this work is, to do something towards an early setting and forming of 
right intellectual and literary tastes ; so that the pupil's mind on leaving school 
may he attempered to the reading of good hooks. And it proceeds upon the principle 
that the right way to do this is by makiDg the student thoroughly at home with a 
few standard authors instead of dispersing him over a multitude of brief selections, 
where he cannot stay with any one author long enough to find his virtue or feel his 
power. Two thirds of the volume is filled with Wordsworth 5 who has now made 
pood his position as one of the five great chiefs of English poetry, and whose works 
embody, in the highest form, whatever is noblest and best in the English poetical 
literature of the last hundred years. The whole of The Excursion, the first two 
books of the Prelude, Michael, The Brothers, Tivtern Abbey, Lasdamia On the Power 
of Sound, Ode on Immortality, and a large number of smaller pieces are included. 
The selections from Coleridge are The Ancient Mariner, Christabel, Fears in Solitude, 
and eighteen other pieces. From Burns, The Cotter's Saturday Night, The Twa 
Dugs, Tarn O'Shanter, The Vision, and twenty-six other poems, and also twenty- 
nine of the songs. From Beattie, The Minstrel ; from Goldsmith, The Deserted 
Village; and from Thomson, The Castle of Indolence : these being generally regarded 
as the best poems of those authors. In all cases, except a few pieces of Words- 
worth's, the poems are given entire, as the authors wrote them. 

HUDSON'S TEXT-BOOK OP PROSE. From Burke, 

Webster, and Bacon. With Notes and Sketches of the Author's Lives. By the 
Rev. H. N. Hudson. 12mo. Cloth. 648 pages 1 60. 2.00 

This work is intended as a sort of companion volume to the preceding. It is made 
up on the same general principle, the contents being selected with a view to unite, 
as far as may be, the culture of high and pure literary tastes with the attainment 
of liberal and useful knowledge. The selections from Burke are Letter to the Sher- 
iffs °f Bristol, Speech on Economical Reform, Speech to the Electors of Bristol, and A 
Letter to a Noble Lord, all given entire } also twenty-nine other pieces gathered, as 
seemed best, from the author's various works. From Webster, Speech in Reply to 
Hayne, Speech on the Presidential Protest, and discourse on The Character of Wash- 
ington ; also thirty -two shorter pieces from other speeches. From Bacon thirty 
of the fifty -eight Essays, all given entire, and several choice selections from Advance- 
ment of Learning, 

3 



"Wholesale. Retail. 

HALSEY'S GENEALOGICAL AND CHRONOLOGI- 
CAL CHART of the Rulers of England, Scotland, France, Germany, and 
Soain. By C. S. Ha-LSey. Mounted, 33 X 48 inches. Folded and Bound in 4to, 

10x12 inches $1.20 $1.50 

Unbound .50 

HALSEY'S BIBLE CHART OP GENEALOGY AND 

C SRONOLOGY, from the Creation to A. D. 100. Prepared by C. S 

Halsey 1.00 1.25 

Unbound .50 

This Chart is designed to illustrate Bible History by showing on a clear and simple 
plan the genealogy and chronology of the principal persons mentioned in the Scrip- 
tures. 

HARVARD EXAMINATION PAPERS. Collected and 

arranged by R. F. Leighton, A. M., Master of Melrose High School. Second 
Edition, containing papers of June and September, 1874. 12mo. Cloth. 248 

pages 1-25 1.53 

These are all the questions (except on the subject of Geometry), in the form of 
papers, which have been used in the examinations for admission to Harvard College 
siuce 1860- They will furnish an excellent series of Questions in Modern, Physical, 
and Ancient Geography ; Grecian and Roman History ; Arithmetic and Algebra ; 
Plane and Solid Geometry ; Logarithms and Trigonometry ; Latin and Greek Gram- 
mar and Composition ; Physics and Mechanics. They have been published in this 
form for the convenience of Teachers, classes in High Schools, and especially for 
pupils preparing for college. 

OUR WORLD, No. I. ; or, First Lessons in Geography. 

Revised edition, with new Maps, by Mary L. Hall. Small quarto. 119 pages .75 .94 
Designed to give children clear and lasting impressions of the different countries and 
inhabitants of the earth rather than to tax the memory with mere names and details. 

OUR WORLD, No. II. ; or, Second Series of Lessons 

in Geography. By Mary L Hall. With fine illustrations of the various coun- 
tries, the inhabitants and their occupations, and two distinct series of Maps, 
5 pages physical, and 19 pages of finely engraved copperplates political. Quarto. 

181 pages 1.60 2.00 

This book is intended, if used in connection with the First Lessons, to cover the 
usual course of geographical study. It is based upon the principle that it is more 
useful to give vivid conceptions of the physical features and political associations of 
different regions than to make pupils familiar with long lists of places and a great 
array of statistics. 

OUTLINES OF THE ART OP EXPRESSION. By J. 

H. Gilmore, Professor of Logic, Rhetoric, and English in the University of 
Rochester. 12mo. Cloth, pp 1.00 1.25 

This little book was not manufactured to meet a demand, though it is believed 
that a demand for such a work has long existed. It grew, in the author's class- 
room, out of an attempt to remedy the defective training in English of students who 
were, in other respects, qualified to pursue to advantage a college course With a 
cursory survey of English Grammar (from the logical and historical point of view) 
it combines brief practical suggestions with reference to Composition and Rhetoric, 
together with examples for criticism and topics for practice in the construction of 
sentences. 

The book was privately printed, for the use of the author's classes, a year ago, and 
is given to the public, at the request of many teachers, in the hope that it may be 
useful to college professors who desire some brief, but comprehensive manual of 
English on which to condition candidates for admission to college. The lack of such 
a manual has compelled many a college professor either to give instruction, during 
the Freshman year, which should devolve on the preliminary training school, or 
to approach his proper work in Rhetoric and English at a very great disadvantage. 

The attention of teachers of rhetoric in our colleges — and also in our academies 
and high schools — is especially called to the work as likely to meet a felt necessity. 
They will find it intensely direct and practical ; yet resting, it is hoped, upon a sound 
theoretical basis which will facilitate the work of further and more systematic in- 
struction . 

While Professor Gilmore's Art of Expression has this special adaptation, the pub- 
lishers believe that it cannot wisely be overlooked wherever, for any reason, an 
intelligent review of English Grammar is desired. 

4 



Wholesale. Retail. 

PEIRCE'S TABLES OF LOGARITHMIC and TRIG- 

ONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS TO THREE AND FOUR PLACES OF 
DECIMALS. By James Mills Peirce, University Professor of Mathematics at 
Harvard University. Quarto. Cloth ...... $0.60 $0.75 

PEIRCE'S ELEMENTS OP LOGARITHMS; with an 

Explanation of the Author's THREE AND FOUlt PLACE TABLES. By James 
Mills Peirce, University Professor of Mathematics at Harvard University. 

12mo. Cloth. 92 pages 80 1.00 

This Work is a Companion to THREE AND FOUR PLACE TABLES OF LOGA- 
RITHMIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS, by the same Authors. 

STEWART'S ELEMENTARY PHYSICS. American 

Edition. With QUESTIONS and EXERCISES. By Peof. G. A. Hill, of Har- 
vard University. 18mo. Cloth. 580 pages 1.40 1.75 

The Questions will be direct and exhaustive upon the text of Mr. Stewart's work. 
After the Questions will be given a series of easy Exercises and Problems, designed, 
in the hands of a good teacher, to arouse and strengthen in the student's mind the 
power of reasoning in accordance with sound scientific methods. 

SEARLE'S OUTLINES OP ASTRONOMY. By An- 

thur Searle, of Harvard College Observatory. 16mo. Cloth. 433 pages . 1.60 2.00 
This work is intended to give such elementary instruction in the principal branches 
of Astronomy as is required in High Schools or by any students not far advanced in 
mathematics. It is illustrated by carefully prepared engravings, and contains some 
information on each of the following subjects : — 

1. The chief results of astronomical inquiry up to the present time with regard to 
the general constitution of the universe, and, in particular, with regard to the stars, 
planets, nebulae, comets, and meteors. 

2. The methods of astronomical research, and their application to the arts. 

3. The general principles of theoretical astronomy. 

4. The history of astronomy. 

5. Astronomical statistics. 

ATLANTIC PRIMARY ARITHMETIC. Simple Num- 
bers. By G. L. Demarest. 18mo. 256 pages 40 .50 

THE CHANDLER DRAWING-ROOK. By the late 

John S Woodman, of Dartmouth College. 12mo. 134 pages . . . .80 1.00 

THE LIVING WORD ; or, Bible Truths and Lessons. 12mo. 

Cloth. 153 pages 80 1.00 

The distinguishing feature of this book is the arrangement by subjects of the spir- 
itual and moral truths of the Bible, so that all its most expressive utterances upon a 
given subject may be read in unbroken succession. It is believed that this will fur- 
nish what has been long needed for public and private reading in the home, the 
6chool, and the cifurch. 

THE NATIONAL MUSIC COURSE. In Four Books. 

For Public Schools. By Julius Eichberg, J. B. Sharland, L. W. Mason, II. E. 
Holt, Supervisors of Music in Public Schools of Boston, Mass. 

PRIMARY OR FIRST MUSIC READER. 16mo. 96 pases . . .24 .30 
A course of exercises in the elements of Vocal Music and Sight-Singing, with 
choice rote songs for the use of youngest pupils. 

INTERMEDIATE MUSIC READER. 16mo. 192 pages ... .56 .70 
Including the Second and Third Music Readers. A course of instruction in the 

elements of Vocal Music and Sight-Singing, with choice rote songs, in two and three 

parts, based on the elements of harmony. 

THE FOURTH MUSIC READER. 8vo. 336 pages 1.20 1.50 

This work, prepared to follow the Third Music Reader, is also adapted, under a 
competent instructor, to be used in High Schools where no previous systematic in- 
struction has been given To this end a brief but thorough elementary course is 
given, with musical theory, original solfeggios, a complete system of triad practice, 
and sacred music and song, with accompaniment for the piano. The music intro- 
duced is of a high order, and by the best masters, and is calculated to cultivate the 
taste, as well as to extend the knowledge and skill of the pupils. 

5 



"Wholesale. Retail, 

THE FIFTH, or HIGH SCHOOL MUSIC READER 

IrOB. MIXi^i> VOICES. Containing a full Course of Advanced Solfeggios for 
One and Two Voices, and a carefully selected number of easy Four-Part Songs, 
taken from the works of the best composers. This work has been especially 
compiled to meet the growing wants of our High Schools for a higher grade of 
music than is contained in works now used in such schools. 8vo. 299 pages $ 1.00 $ 1.25 

N. B. — The Tenor Part in many of the songs may be either omitted or sung by 
the altos (boys). 

THE ABRIDGED FOURTH MUSIC READER. 8vo. 

288 pages 1.00 1.25 

SECOND MUSIC READER. 16mo. 96 pages . .32 .40 

THIRD MUSIC READER. 16mo. 96 pages . . .32 .40 
THE NATIONAL MUSIC CHARTS. By Luther 

Whiting Mason. An invaluable aid to Teachers of Common Schools in imparting 
a practical knowledge of Music, and teaching Children to sing at sight. In Four 
Series. Forty Charts each, size 25 X 36 inches. 

FIRST SERIES 10.00 

SECOND SERIES 10 00 

THIRD SERIES 10.00 

FOURTH SERIES, by L. W. Mason and J. B Sharland 10.00 

EASEL 1.25 

THE NATIONAL MUSIC TEACHER. A Practical 

Guide for Teaching Vocal Music to Young Children. By L. W. Mason. 8vo. 

72 pages 60 

6 



GREEK. 

9 Wholesale. Retail. 

GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR. By William W. 

Goodwin, Ph. D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University. 

12mo. Half morocco. 262 pages $1.25 51.66 

The object of this Grammar is to state general principles clearly and distinctly, 
with special regard to those who are preparing for college. In the sections on the 
Moods are stated, for the first time in an elementary form, the principles which are 
elaborated in detail in the author's " Syntax of the Greek Moods and Tenses." 

GREEK MOODS AND TENSES. The Sixth Edition. 

By William W. Goodwin, Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard Uni- 
versity. 1vol. 12mo. Cloth. 264 pages 1.40 1.75 

This work was first published in 1860, and it appeared in a new form — much en- 
larged and in great part rewritten — in 1865. In the present edition the whole has 
been again revised ; some sections and notes have been rewritten, and a few notes 
have been added. The object of the work is to give a plain statement of the princi- 
ples which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, — the most im- 
portant and the most difficult part of Greek Syntax. 

GOODWIN'S GREEK READER. Consisting of Extracts 

from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Thucydides •, being a full equivalent for 
the seven books of the Anabasis, now required for admission at Harvard. With 
Maps, Notes, References to GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR, and parallel Ref- 
erences to CROSBY'S and HADLEY'S GRAMMARS. Edited by Professor 
W. W. Goodwin, of Harvard College, and J. H. Allen, Cambridge. 12mo. 

Half morocco. 340 pages 1.60 2.00 

This book contains the third and fourth books of the Anabasis (entire), the greater 
part of the second book of the Hellenica, and the first chapter of the Memorabilia, of 
Xenophon ; the last part of the Apology, and the beginning and end of the Phaedo, 
of Plato j selections from the sixth, seventh, and eighth books of Herodotus, and 
from the fourth book of Thucydides. 

LEIGHTON'S GREEK LESSONS. Prepared to accompany 
Goodwin's Greek Grammar. By R. F. Leighton, Master of Melrose High School. 

12mo. Half morocco. 264 pages 1.25 1.56 

This work contains about one hundred lessons, with a progressive series of exer- 
cises (both Greek and English), mainly selected from the first book of Xenophon's 
Anabasis. The exercises, on the Moods are sufficient, it is believed, to develop the 
general principles as stated in the Grammar. The text of four chapters of the 
Anabasis is given entire, with, notes and references. Full vocabularies accompany 
the book. 

LIDDELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI- 

CONT. Abridged from the new Oxford Edition. New Edition. With Appendix 
of Proper and Geographical Names, by J. M. Whiton. Square 12mo. 835 pages. 

Morocco back 2 40 3 00 

Sheep binding 2*80 3.50 

LIDDELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI- 
CON. The sixth Oxford Edition unabridged. 4to. 1,881 pages. 

Morocco back 9.60 12.00 

Sheep binding 10-40 13.00 

We have made arrangements with Messrs. Macmillan & Co. to publish in this 
country their new edition of Liddell & Scott's Greek Lexicons, and are ready to 
supply the trade. 

The English editions of Liddell & Scott are not stereotyped ; but each has bpen 
thoroughly revised, enlarged, and printed anew. The sixth edition, published in 1869, 
is larger by one eighth than the fifth, and contains 1,865 pages. It is an entirely dif- 
ferent work from the first edition, the whole department of etymology having been 
rewritten in the light of modern investigations, and the forms of the irregular verbs 
being given in greater detail by the aid of Veitclrs Catalogue. No student of Greek 
can afford to dispense with this invaluable Lexicon, the price of which is now for the 
first time brought within the means of the great body of American scholars. 

7 



"Wholesale. ReML 

PLATO'S APOLOGY OP SOCRATES AND CRITO. 

Edited, for the Use of Schools, by John Williams White, A. M. 
The basis of this work will be the German edition of Dr. Christian Oron. (Platons 
Vertheidigungsrede des Sokrates und Kriton. Sechste Aufiage. Leipzig, Teubrier„ 
1875.) To tbe matter contained in Dr. Cron's edition there will be added notes by 
the Editor and from other sources, analyses, and extended references tc> GoodfWirg 
and Hadley. The book will be for the class-room, and all matter not ©f direct nalue 
to the student will be rigidly excluded. 

THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS OP SOPHOCLES. Ea- 

ited, with an Introduction, Notes, and full explanation of the metres, by John 
W. White, A. M., Professor of the Greek Language and Literature in Baldwin 
University. 12mo. Cloth. 219 pages $ 1.20 $1.50 

THE MEDEA OP EURIPIDES. Edited, with Notes and 
an Introduction, by Frederic D. Allen, Ph. D., Professor in the University of 
Cincinnati. 

WILKIN'S MANUAL OP GREEK PROSE COM- 

POSITION. 1vol. 12mo. Cloth 2M Z5Q 

WHITE'S FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. Prepared 

to accompany Goodwin's Greek Grammar, and designed as an Introduction t& 
his Greek Reader. By John Williams White, A. M., Tutor in Greek in Harvard 
College. 12mo. Half morocco 1.20 1.50 

A series of eighty lessons with progressive Greek-English and English-Greek exer- 
cises. Followed by selected passages from the first two books of Xenophon's Ana- 
basis, and vocabularies. 

WHITON'S SELECT ORATIONS OP LYSIAS. Com- 

prising the Defence of Mantitheus, the Oration against Eratosthenes, the 
Reply to " The Overthrow of the Democracy," and the Areopagitic Oration 
concerning the Sacred Olive-Trunk. Edited by James Morris Whiton, Ph. D. 
12mo. 151 pages 1.20 X§@ 

These orations illustrate a period of peculiar interest in Athenian history, and 
its main incidents and characters have received special attention in the Introductions 
and Notes. Students who have not at hand the larger works of reference will here 
find in condensed form all that is essential for the illustration of the text. A peculiar 
feature of the work is its compendious treatment in topical notes of those points of 
the Athenian constitution which are touched upon in the orations. Each oration is 
accompanied with a complete logical Analysis. The grammatical notes deal almost 
wholly with the syntax, — as befits a work of this grade, — and have been prepared 
with a special aim to elucidate the usage of the verb. References are made, for the 
most part, to Goodwin's Greek Moods and Tenses, and Goodwin's and Hadley's 
Grammars. 

While this edition is deigned for use in Colleges, yet the style of Lysias, on ac- 
count both of its purity and simplicity, is such that the advanced classes in Acad- 
emies will find these orations within their capacity, while also finding the subject- 
matter quite as attractive as in the authors hitherto more familiar. The quantity of 
Greek text is about fifty pages, containing about the same amount of reading-matter 
as the fiflst book of Xenophon's Anabasis, 

8 



LATIN. 



Wholesale. Retail. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S LATIN GRAMMAR: 

a Latin Grammar for schools and colleges, founded on Comparative Grammar. 
12mo. Half morocco. 290 pages (iucluding supplementary Outlines of Syntax, 

with new and greatly enlarged Index) S 1 25 S 1.56 

The features of this grammar to which we invite attention, are : 1. The scientific 
form of statement in the Etymology, corresponding to the most advanced views of 
comparative philologists ; 2. The comparison with kindred languages suggested 
throughout, especially in numerous brief philological notes, and in references to the 
syntax of Goodwin's Greek Grammar *, 3. Grouping and subordination of topics in 
the Syntax, — which contains nearly 200 cross-ieferences, with upwards of 1,000 
citations from classic authors, — so that unusual brevity is attained without sacri- 
fice of completeness. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S LATIN METHOD: a 

Method of Instruction in Latin ; being a companion and guide in the study of 
Latin Grammar. With elementary instruction in Heading at Sight, Exercises 
in Translation and Writing, Notes, and Vocabularies ; also " Outlines of Syn- 
tax," taken from the Latin Grammar. To the new edition a series of Parallel 
Exercises have been added, with enlarged Vocabulary, giving very full prac- 
tice on the forms contained in the Lessons, and on the Constructions of Syn- 
tax as grouped in the later portion of the book; making, in all, a volume of 
about 175 pages. 12mb. Cloth 1.00 1.25 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S LATIN COMPOSITION: 

an Elementary Guide to Writing in Latin. Part I. Constructions of Syr tax; 

Part II. Exercises in Translation. 12mo. Cloth 120 1.50 

Part First (which is published separately) consists of thirty progressive Lessons, 
with full instructions, exercises, and vocabulary ; and is designed " to furnish a 
sufficient amount of study and practice in Latin com portion during the last year 
of preparation for college, or the first of a college course'* Part Second consists of 
about forty exercises in translation, chiefly narrative, adapted to the use of advanced 
or college classes •, with annotated references to the Lessons of Part I., and to the 
sections of a special Introduction on the Choice of Words, the Form of the Sentence, 
and Idiomatic Usages. Making, in all , a volume of about 200 pages. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S C^SSAR : Caesar's Gallic 

War: Four Books. With Historical Introduction, Notes, and a Copperplate 
Map of Gaul. [With or without afull Vocabulary by R. F. Pennell, ot Phillips 
Exeter Academv.] 12mo. 154 pages. 

Without Vocabulary 1.00 125 

With " 1.20 1.50 

The text of this edition is that of Nipperdey, important variations being noticed. 
The rotes are unusually full in historical illustration, derived largely from Momm- 
sen, Long, Merivale, the "History of Julius Ca?sar ? ' by Napoleon III., and the 
excellent school edition of Moberlv. In the earlier portions they are especially de- 
signed to guide in a systematic and careful study of Latin syntax. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S SALLUST: The Conspiracy 

of Catiline as related by Sallusr. With Introduction and Notes explanatory 

and historical. 12mo. Cloth. 84 pages 80 1.00 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S CICERO: Select Orations of 

< Vero, chronologically arranged, covering the entire period of his public life. 
From the text of Baiter and Kay?er. With Life, general and special Introduc- 
tions, and Index of topics discussed. 12mo. Half morocco. 394 pages . 1.40 1.75 

The text without notes .80 1 00 

It is the design of this edition to give a full view of Cicero's public career, as ora- 
tor and statesman, extending through about forty of the most eventful years of the 
later Republic. With this view, the selection includes the earliest and the latest 
of his public orations, while the special Introductions cover very folly the inter- 
vening political history. Ee.»ides the orations more commonly read in schools, are 
given the Roscius and Sestius (abridged), with the first against Verres and the last 

9 



Wholesale. Retail. 
Philippic, — thirteen in all, — with one or two short passages of special celebrity, for 
practice in reading at sight. Especial care has been takea in the department of 
Antiquities, which has been treated in numerous notes (in smaller type), some of 
them — as that on the Roman Aristocracy — being brief essays on the several topics. 
The Introduction contains a classified list of all the works of Cicero, with the 
occasions and topics of all of his orations. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S CATO MAJOR: Cicero 

De Senectute, a Dialogue on Old Age. With Introduction (on the adoption in 
Rome of the Greek philosophy) and Notes. 12mo. Cloth. 57 pages $ 0.60 $0.75 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S OVID : Selections from the 

Poems of Ovid, chiefly the Metamorphoses. With special Introductions, Notes, 

and Index of Proper Names. 12mo. Half morocco. 283 pages . . 1.20 1.50 

The introductions to the passages from the Metamorphoses (23 in number) give 
the entire argument of the poem, that of omitted portions bracketed. The other 
selections include those of special interest as illustrating the poet's life ; and a list 
i< given of all his writings, with their topics and occasions. The Notes contain 
brief instructions on scanning at sight. 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S VIRGIL : The Poems of 

Virgil ; Vol. I. containing the Pastoral Poems (Bucolics) and Six Books of the 
iEneid. Chiefly from the text of Ribbeck, with select various Readings, Intro- 
ductions, Notes, and Index of Plants (compiled chiefly from Fee's Flore de 

Virgile, contained in Lemaire's " Bibliotheca Classica Latina"). 12mo. Half 

morocco. 372 pages 1.40 1.75 

The text without notes 80 1.00 

The Notes of this edition (which are brief and very numerous) are particularly 
indebted to Conington, and are designed "to give not only what may serve the 
learner in the bare understanding of the text ; but, along with it, some hint of that 
wealth of traditional interpretation which is more important, perhaps, in the study 
of Virgil than in that of any other ancient poet." 

The following are published in single volumes : — 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S Course No. I. A Full Pre- 

paratory Course of Latin Prose ; consisting of Four Books of Caesar's Gallic 
War, Sallust's Conspiracy of Catiline, Eight Orations of Cicero, and De Senec- 
tute ( Cato Major). 12mo. Half morocco. 582 pages .... 2.00 2.50 

ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S Course No. II. Second 

Preparatory Course of Latia Prose ; containing Four Books of Caesar's Gallic War, 
and Eight Orations of Cicero. With Vocabulary by R. F. Pennell. 12mo. 
Half morocco. 518 pages 2.00 2.50 

N. B. Course No. I. is identical with the First Course prescribed for admission to 
Harvard College. Course No. II. includes the usual amount required at other col- 
leges. 

ALLEN'S LATIN GRAMMAR: Manual Latin Grammar. 

With Tables of Inflection, and Supplement on the Method of teaching Latin, 
the Principles of Inflection and Classification, and on some Peculiar Construc- 
tions. 12mo. Cloth. 182 pages 1.00 1.25 

Approved by Harvard Colhge as indicating the amount required for admission. 
ALLEN'S LATIN LESSONS. Prepared to accompnny the 

Manual Grammar, and designed especially to furnish a direct and rapid intro- 
duction to the study of Caesar. Consisting of sixty Lessons, with the narrative 
of the Helvetian War from the First Book of Caesar, and exercises in Prosody. 
12mo. Cloth. 146 pages 1.00 1.25 

10 



Wholesale. Retail. 

ALLEN'S LATIN READER: Consisting of Selections from 

Csesar (the invasion of Britain and account of the Gallic and German popula- 
tions), Curtius (Anecdotes of Alexander), Nepos (Life of Hannibal), Sallust 
(Jugurtha, abridged), Ovid, Virgil, Plautus, and Terence (single scenes), Cicero 
and Pliny (Letters), and Tacitus (the Conflagration of Rome). With Notes and 
a General Vocabulary. The Notes have been adapted to Allen & Greenough's 
Grammar. 12mo. Half morocco. 532 pages $2.00 $2.50 

ALLEN'S LATIN SELECTIONS. The same as the above, 

without Vocabulary. 12mo. Half morocco. 326 pages .... 1.25 1.56 
ALLEN'S LATIN COMPOSITION. An Introduction to 

Latin Composition. (By W. F. Allen.) New edition, adapted to Allen & Green- 
ough's Grammar. 12mo. Cloth. 118 pages . 1.00 1.25 

This book includes a careful review of the principles of Syntax (beginning with 

Indirect Discourse), with exercises in various styles of composition selected from 

classical authors. Also short exercises for oral practice. 

ALLEN'S SHORTER COURSE OF LATIN PROSE. 

Consisting chiefly of the Prose Selections of Allen's Latin Reader (to p. 134), 
the Notes being wholly rewritten, enlarged, and adapted to Allen & Green- 
ough's Grammar ; accompanied by Six Orations of Cicero, — the Manilian, the 
four Catilines, and Archias. With Vocabulary. 12mo. Half morocco. 543 
pages 2.00 2.50 

ALLEN'S LATIN PRIMER. A First Book of Latin for 

Boys and Girls. (By J. H. Allen.) 12mo. Cloth. 182 pages . . 1.00 1.25 
This is designed for the use of scholars of a younger class, and consists of thirty 
Lessons arranged so as to give a full outline of the grammar, with brief Rules of Syn- 
tax, Tables of Inflection, and interlined exercises for practice in reading, compiled 
from HistoricB Sacr<z. The reading selections which follow include Dialogues from 
Corderius and Erasmus (with translation), narratives, nursery songs, mediaeval 
hymns, etc., being made up in great part from modern Latin writers. 

ALLEN'S LATIN LEXICON : a General Vocabulary of 

Latin, with Supplementary Tables of Dates, Antiquities, etc. By J. H. Allen. 

12mo. Cloth. 214 pages 1.00 . 1.25 

This little dictionary contains " about 15,000 words of common use, besides more 
than 1,300 proper names or adjectives, and about 200 dates (exclusive of the Tables), 
covering the more important points of classical history and mythology." It is be- 
lieved to be complete for the entire introductory course of Latin authors, including 
Ovid and Virgil. 

LEIGHTON'S LATIN LESSONS. Prepared to accompany 

Allen & Greenough's Latin Grammar. By R. F.Leighton, former Master of 
Melrose High School. 12mo. Half morocco. 332 pages . . . . 1.25 1.56 
This work presents a progressive series of exercises (both Latin and English) in 
about eighty Lessons, illustrating the grammatical forms and the simpler principles 
of syntax. Synonymes and Rules of Quantity are introduced from the first. The 
amount of illustrative matter in exercises for reading and writing or oral practice 
is very large, including portions of Vim Rom^e, and Woodford's Epitome of the First 
Book of Csesar. Full Vocabularies (prepared by R. F. Pennell) accompany the 
book, with questions for examination and review of the grammar. 

MADVIG'S LATIN GRAMMAR. Carefully revised by 

Thomas A. Thacher, Yale College. 12mo. Half morocco. 517 pages . 2.40 8.00 
A book of the very highest authority in Latin Syntax, and admirably adapted to 
the wants of Teachers and College Classes. 

THE LATIN VERB. Illustrated by the Sanskrit. By C H. 

Parkhurst. 12mo. Cloth. 55 pages 40 .50 

n 



"Wholesale. Retail. 

WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S LATIN-ENGLISH 

LEXICON. Square 12mo. 662 pages. Morocco back . . . $240 $3.00 

Sheep . . . 2.80 3.50 

WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S LATIN-ENGLISH 

AND ENGLISH-LATIN LEXICON. By the Rev. J. T. White, D.B., of 
C. C. C. Oxford, Rector of St. Martin, Ludgate, London. Revised Edition. 

Square 12mo. 1058 pages. Sheep 3.60 4 50 

"The present work aims at furnishing in both its parts a sufficiently extensive 
vocabulary for all practical purposes. The Latin words and phrases are in all cases 
followed by the name of some standard Latin writer, as a guaranty of their author- 
ity ; and as the work is of a strictly elementary character, the conjugation of the 
verbs and the genders and genitive cases of the substantives are uniformly added. 
In the preparation of this portion of the book, Dr. White has had the assistance of 
6ome of the best scholars both of Oxford and Cambridge." — Guardian. 

WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S ENGLISH-LATIN 

LEXICON. Square 12mo. Sheep. 392 pages 2.00 2.50 

We have contracted with Messrs. Longmans, Green, & Co., of London, for the 
sole agency in this country for the above Latin Lexicons, and shall endeavor to meet 
the demands of the trade. 

12 



LATIN. 



I— ALLEN & GREENOUGH'S LATIN SERIES. 

N. B. The volumes of this series have undergone constant revision in the 
class-room; and all corrections or improvements suggested by experience 
have been and will continue to be introduced in the successive editions. 

A. Elementary Course. 

By J. H. Allen and J. B. Greenough. 

1. LATIN GRAMMAR: a Latin Grammar for schools and 

colleges, founded on Comparative Grammar, pp. 274 (including supple- 
mentary Outlines of Syntax, with new and greatly enlarged Index) . $ 1.25 $ 1.56 

The features of this grammar to which we invite attention, are : 1. The scientific 
form of statement in the Etymology, corresponding to the most advanced views of 
comparative philologists ; 2. The comparison with kindred languages suggested 
throughout, especially in numerous brief philological notes, and in references to the 
syntax of Goodwin's Greek Grammar ; 3. Grouping and subordination of topics in 
the Syntax, — which contains nearly 200 cross-references, with upwards of 1,000 
citations from classic authors, — so that unusual brevity is attained without sacri- 
fice of completeness. 

The arrangement of Sections is throughout by general topics rather than minuter 
subdivisions *, the sub-sections in larger type containing of themselves a sufficient 
outline of grammar for elementary study, while the details in smaller type are de- 
signed to be studied only as they occur in reading or composition. Several portions 
— as of the sections on the Alphabet, Inflection, Verb-Forms, and Derivation of 
Words — are not designed for school study, but are prepared with a view to lay a 
foundation for the later scientific study of Philology, through suggestions by the 
teacher. 

2. LATIN METHOD : a Method of Instruction in Latin ; 

being a companion and guide in the study of Latin Grammar. With element- 
ary instruction in Reading at Sight, Exercises in Translation and Writing, 
Notes, and Vocabularies ; also u Outlines of Syntax," taken from the Latin 
Grammar. By the authors of the Grammar 1.00 1.25 

The " Method " was originally prepared with a view to abridge to the utmost (with- 
out sacrifice of rigid accuracy) the previous study of the grammar, as introductory to 
a course of reading j in answer to the demand of some of our friends for " a thin 
book " with which "to put a class into Csesar within three months." With this 
view, the study of forms and of the simpler constructions is included in twenty- 
eight progressive lessons, pointing out in detail the portions of the grammar to be 
studied, illustrated by considerable detailed instruction, and by exercises in Latin 
and English, the former being taken (almost exclusively) from a considerable range 
of classical authors. These are designed to be followed directly by the reading of 
Caesar, or some other easy author ; the remaining portions — Constructions of Syn- 
tax, Derivation of Words, Reading at Sight, and Reading Selections — to be used 
as occasional exercises parallel with a course of reading. 

For those who desire thus to pursue a rapid course of study, the Method will be 
retained in its present form. Rut, by advice of several experienced teachers, a series 
of Parallel Exercises will be added, with enlarged Vocabulary, giving very full prac- 
tice on the forms contained in the Lessons, and on the Constructions of Syntax as 
grouped in the later portion of the book; making, in all, a volume of about 175 
pages (to be published early in the summer). 

l 



3. LATIN COMPOSITION : an Elementary Guide to Writ- 

ing in Latin. Part I. Constructions of Syntax; Part II. Exercises in Trans- 
lation. By the authors of the Grammar $1.25 $1.56 

Part First (which is published separately) consists of thirty progressive Lessons, 
with full instructions, exercises, and vocabulary ; and is designed " to furnish a 
sufficient amount of study and practice in Latin composition during the last year 
of preparation tor college, or the first of a college course." Part Second consists of 
about forty exercises in translation, chiefly narrative, adapted to the use of advanced 
or college classes ; with annotated references to the Lessons of Part I., and to the 
sections of a special Introduction on the Choice of Words, the Form of the Sentence, 
and Idiomatic Usages. Making, in all, a volume of about 200 pages (to be published 
in the spring). 

The special feature of the "Composition" is, that its instructions are given 
throughout from the 'English point of view. The " Constructions of Syntax " are 
not a reproduction of the Latin Grammar, with illustrations from Latin authors to 
be retranslated to the original form, but are an attempt to meet the question, How 
may good common English be best expressed in Latin? The Exercises, with very 
few exceptions, are taken wholly from English authors; and, after the first few 
lessons, consist chiefly of " continuous paragraphs or narratives, which, we believe, 
are not only more interesting in themselves, but will be found easier in practice 
than detached sentences, besides the advantage of exhibiting the rarer constructions 
in situ i and not as mere isolated puzzles." 

B. Classical Course. 

Edited by J. H. and W. F. Allen, and J. B. Greenough. 

This series has been prepared especially to meet the present conditions for 
admission to Harvard College (see Catalogue). The grammatical refer- 
ences are to Allen & Greenough's, and Gildersleeve's Latin Grammars. 

1. C JGSAR : Caesar's Gallic War : Four Books. With Historical 

Introduction, Notes, and a Copperplate Map of Gaul. [With or without a full 
"Vocabulary by R. F. Pennell, of Phillips Exeter Academy.] pp. 154. 

Without Vocabulary 1.00 1.25 

With " 1.25 1.50 

The text of this edition is that of Nipperdey, important variations being noticed. 
The rotes are unusually full in historical illustration, derived largely from Momm- 
sen, Long, Merivale, the "History of Julius Caesar-' by Napoleon III., and the 
excellent school edition of Moberly. In the earlier portions they are especially de- 
signed to guide in a systematic and careful study of Latin syntax. 

2. SALLUST \ The Conspiracy of Catiline as related hy Sallust. 

With Introduction and Notes explanatory and historical, pp. 84 . .80 1.00 

8. CICERO ' Select Orations of Cicero, chronologically arranged, 
covering the entire period of his public life. From the text of Baiter and 
Kayeer. With Life, general and special Introductions, and Index of topics 
discussed, pp. 394 1.40 1.75 

It is the design of this edition to give a full view of Cicero's public career, as ora- 
tor and statesman, extending through about forty of the most eventful years of the 
later Republic. With this view, the selection includes the earliest and the latest 
of his public orations, while the special Introductions cover very fully the inter- 
vening political history. Besides the orations more commonly read in schools, are 
given the Roscius and Sestius (abridged), with the first against Verres and the last 
Philippic, — thirteen in all, — with one or two short passages of special celebrity, for 
practice in reading at sight. Especial care has been taken in the department of 
Antiquities, which has been treated in numerous notes (in smaller type), some of 
them — as that on the Roman Aristocracy — being brief essays on the several topics. 

The Introduction contains a classified list of all the works of Cicero, with the 
occasions and topics of all of his orations. 

4. CATO MAJOR: Cicero Be Senectute, a Dialogue on Old 

Age. With Introduction (on the adoption in Rome of the Greek philosophy) 

and Notes, pp. 57 . 60 .75 

2 



5. OVID : Selections from the Poems of Ovid, chiefly the Meta- 

morphoses. With special Introductions, Notes, and Index of Proper Names. 
pp.283 $1.20 $1.50 

The introductions to the passages from the Metamorphoses (23 in number) give 
the entire argument of the poem, that of omitted portions bracketed. Tne other 
selections include those of special interest as illustrating the poet's life ; and a list 
is given of all his writings, with their topics and occasions. The Notes contain 
brief instructions on scanning at sight. 

6. VIRGIL : The Poems of Virgil ; Vol. I. containing the Pas- 

toral Poems (Bucolics) and Six Books of the iEneid Chiefly from the text of 
Ribbeck, with select various Readings, Introductions, Notes, and Index of 
Plants (compiled chiefly from Fee's Flore de Virgile, contained in Lemaire's 

"BibhothecaClassicaLatina"). pp.372 1.40 1.75 

The Notes of this edition (which are brief and very numerous) are particularly 
indebted to Conington, and are designed " to give not only what may serve the 
learner in the bare understanding of the text ; but, along with it, some hint of that 
wealth of traditional interpretation which is more important, perhaps, in the study 
of Virgil than in that of any other ancient poet." 

The following are published in single volumes : — 

Course Wo. I. A Full Preparatory Course of Latin Prose ; con- 
sisting of Four Books of Caesar's Gallic War, Sallust's Conspiracy of Catiline, 
Eight Orations of Cicero, and De Senectute ( Cato Major) . . . 2.00 2.50 

Course No. II. Second Preparatory Course of Latin Prose ; 

containing Four Books of Caesar's Gallic War, and Eight Orations of Cicero. 

With Vocabulary by R. F Pennell 2.00 2.50 

N. B. Course No. I. is identical with the First Course prescribed for admission to 
Harvard College. Course No. II includes the usual amount required at other col- 
leges. 

TEXTS. — The Texts of the ahove editions will be issued without 
Notes, for the use of the Recitation-Room. 



n.— ALLEN'S LATIN SERIES. 

By J. H. and W. F. Allen. 

1. LATIN" GRAMMAR: Manual Latin Grammar. With 

Tables of Inflection, and Supplement on the Method of teaching Latin, the 
Principles of Inflection and Classification, and on some Peculiar Construc- 
tions pp. 161 1.00 1.25 

2. LATIN LESSONS. Prepared to accompany the Manual 

Grammar, and designed especially to furnish a direct and rapid introduction 
to the study of Caesar. Consisting of sixty Lessons, with the narrative of the 
Helvetian War from the First Book of Caesar, and exercises in Prosodv. 
PP.134 1.00 1.25 

3. LATIN READER : Consisting of Selections from Ca?sar 

(the invasion of Britain and account of the Gallic and German populations), 
Curtius (Anecdotes of Alexander), Nepos (Life of Hannibal), Sallust (.Tugur- 
tha, abridged), Ovid, Virgil, Plautus, and Terence (single scenes), Cicero and 
Pliny (Letters), and Tacitus (the Conflagration of Rome). With Notes and a 
General Vocabulary The Notes have been adapted to Allen & Greenough's 
Grammar, pp. 532 2.00 2.50 

4. LATIN SELECTIONS. The same as the above, without 

Vocabulary, pp.326 1.25 1.56 

5. LATIN COMPOSITION. An Introduction to Latin 

Composition. (By W. F. Allen.) New edition, adapted to Allen & Green- 

ough's Grammar pp.107 1.00 1.25 

This book includes a careful review of the principles of Syntax (beginning with 

Indirect Discourse), with exercises in various styles of composition selected from 

classical authors. Also short exercises for oral practice. 

3 



6. LATIN PRIMER. A First Book of Latin for Boys and" 

Girls. (ByJ H.Allen.) pp.155. 81.00 $1.25 

This is designed for the use of scholars of a younger class, and consists of thirty 
Lessons arranged so as to give a full outline of the grammar, with brief Rules of Syn- 
tax, Tables of Inflection, and interlined exercises for practice in reading, compiled 
from Historic^ Sacrcz. The reading selections which follow include Dialogues from 
Corderius and Erasmus (with translation), narratives, nursery songs, mediaeval 
hymns, etc., being made up in great part from modern Latin writers. 



Ill— LATIN DICTIONARIES. 

1. ALLEN'S LATIN LEXICON : a General Vocabulary 

of Latin, with Supplementary Tables of Dates, Antiquities, etc. By J. H. 

Allen, pp.214 1.00 1.25 

This little dictionary contains " about 15,000 words of common use, besides more 
than 1,300 proper names or adjectives, and about 200 dates (exclusive of the Tables), 
covering the more important points of classical history and mythology." It is be- 
lieved to be complete for the entire introductory course of Latin authors, including 
Ovid and Virgil. 

2. WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S LATIN-ENG- 

LISH LEXICON. Morocco back 2.40 3.00 

Sheep 2.80 3.50 

3. WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S LATIN-ENG- 

LISH AND ENGLISH-LATIN LEXICON. By the Rev. J. T. White, 
D.D., of C. C. C. Oxford, Rector of St. Martin, Ludgate, London. Revised 
Edition. Square 12mo. pp. 1058. Sheep 3.60 4.50 

" The present work aims at furnishing in both its parts a sufficiently extensive 
vocabulary for all practical purposes. The Latin words and phrases are in all cases 
followed by the name of some standard Latin writer, as a guaranty of their author- 
ity ; and as the work is of a strictly elementary character, the conjugation of the 
verbs and the genders and genitive cases of the substantives are uniformly added. 
In the preparation of this portion of the book, Dr. White has had the assistance of 
some of the best scholars both of Oxford and Cambridge." — Guardian. 

4. WHITE'S JUNIOR STUDENT'S ENGLISH- 

LATIN LEXICON. Sheep, p. 386 2.00 250 

We have contracted with Messrs. Longmans, Green, & Co., of London, for the 
sole agency in this country for the above Latin Lexicons, and shall endeavor to meet 
the demands of the trade. 



IV. — MISCELLANEOUS. 

1. LEIGHTON'S LATIN LESSON'S. Prepared to accom- 

pany Allen & Greenough's Latin Grammar. By R. F. Leighton, former Mas- 
ter of Melrose High School, pp. 275 1.25 1.56 

This work presents a progressive series of exercises (both Latin and English) in 
about eighty Lessons, illustrating the grammatical forms and the simpler principles 
of syntax. Synonymes and Rules of Quantity are introduced from the first. The 
amount of illustrative matter in exercises for reading and writing or oral practice 
is very large, including portions of Vim Roivle, and Woodford's Epitome of the First 
Book of Caesar. Full Vocabularies (prepared by R. F. Pennell) accompany the 
book, with questions for examination and review of the grammar. 

2. MADVIG'S LATIN GRAMMAR. Carefully revised 

by Thomas A. Thacher, Yale College. Half morocco .... 2.40 300 

A book of the very highest authority in Latin Syntax, and admirably adapted to 
the wants of Teachers and- College Classes. 

3. THE LATIN VERB. Illustrated by the Sanskrit. By 

C. H. Parkhurst. Cloth 40 .50 

4 



GREEK. 



I— PREPARATORY TO COLLEGE. 

FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. Prepared to accompany 

Goodwin's Greek Grammar, and designed as an Introduction either to his Greek 
Reader or to his Selections from Xenophon and Herodotus, or to the Anabasis 
of Xenophon. By John Williams White, A. M., Tutor in Greek in Harvard 
College. 

A series of seventy-fire Lessons with progressive Greek-English and English-Greek - 
Exercises, taken mainly from the first four books of Xenophon s Anabasis. Followed 
by a series of Additional Exercises on Forms, and complete Vocabularies. These 
Lessons are carefully graded, and do not follow the order of arrangement of the 
Grammar, but begin the study of the verb with the second Lesson, and then pursue 
it alternately with that of the remaining parts of speech. 

LEIGHTON'S GREEK LESSONS. Prepared to accompany 

Goodwin's Greek Grammar. By R. F. Leighton, Master of Melrose High School. 
Half morocco $1.56 

This work contains about one hundred lessons, with a progressive series of exer- 
cises (both Greek and English), mainly selected from the first book of Xenophon's 
Anabasis. The exercises on the Moods are sufficient, it is believed, to develop the 
general principles as stated in the Grammar. The text of four chapters of the 
Anabasis is given entire, with notes and references. Full vocabularies accompany 
the book. 

GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMAR. By William W. 

Goodwin, Ph. D., Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard University. 
Half morocco 1.56 

The object of this Grammar is to state general principles clearly and distinctly, 
with special regard to those who are preparing for college. The plan has been to 
exclude all detail which belongs to a book of reference, and to admit whatever will 
aid a pupil in mastering the great principles of Greek Grammar. The Syntax has 
been allowed more space, proportionally, than the statement of the forms : this has 
been done from a conviction of the author that the chief principles of Syntax are a 
more profitable study for a pupil in the earlier years of his classical course than the 
details of vowel-changes and exceptional forms which are often thought to be more 
seasonable. The sections on the Syntax of the Verb are generally condensed from 
the author's larger work on the Greek Moods and Tenses, to which advanced students, 
and especially teachers, are referred for a fuller exposition of many matters which 
are merely hinted at in the elementary grammar. The latter contains a brief state- 
ment of the author's new classification of conditional sentences, with its application 
to relative and temporal sentences, which is contained in full in the larger work, and 
which appears now for the first time in an elementary form. A catalogue of irregular 
verbs is added, which has been constructed entirely with reference to the wants of 
beginners. All forms are excluded (with a few exceptions) which are not found in 
the strictly classic Greek before Aristotle j and all forms which are not used by Attic 
writers are enclosed in brackets. 

1 



GOODWIN'S GREEK READER. Consisting of Extracts 

from Xenophon, Plato, Herodotus, and Tiiue> dides j being the full amount of 
Greek Prose required for admission at Harvard. With Maps, Notes, References 
to GOODWIN'S GREEK GRAMMA II, and parallel References to CROSBY'S and 
HADLEY'S GKAMMARS. Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin, of Harvard 
Coilege, and J. H. Allen, Cambridge. Half morocco $2.00 

A revised edition, to be published during the present year, will contain the first 
and second books of the Anabasis (in place of the third and fourth books of former 
editions) with copious notes, the greater part of the second book and an extract 
from the seventh of the Hellenica, with the first chapter of the Memorabilia, of 
. Xeuophon 5 the last part of the Apology, and the beginning and end of the Phaedo, 
of flato ; selections from the sixth, seventh, and eighth books of Herodotus, and 
from the fourth book of Thucydides. 

GOODWIN'S SELECTIONS PROM XENOPHON 

AND HERODOTUS. Edited by Professor W. W. Goodwin and John 
Williams White, of Harvard Callege. 

This book will contain the first four books of the Anabasis, and the greater part 
of the second book of the Hellenica, of Xenophon ; and extracts from the sixth, 
seventh, and eighth books of Herodotus. It has been prepared for the use of 
those who from want of time or for other reasons are unable to read the greater vari- 
ety of selections in Greek Prose which are contained in Goodwin's Greek Reader. 

THE FIRST POUR BOOKS OP THE ANABASIS 

OF XENOPHON. Edited, with copious Notes and References to Goodwin's 
Greek Grammar, by Professor W. W. Goodwin and John Williams White, 
of Harvard College. 

LIDDELL & SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXI- 

CON. Abridged from the new Oxford Edition. New Edition. With Appendix 

of Proper and Geographical Names, by J. M. Whiton. 

.Morocco back . . 3 00 

Sheep binding 3.50 



IN PREPARATION. 
THE PIRST THREE BOOKS OP HOMER'S ILIAD. 

By Professor F. E. Anderson and John Williams White, of Harvard College. 

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE WRITING OP 

GREEK PROSE. 



II— COLLEGE TEXT-BOOKS. 

SYNTAX OP THE MOODS AND TENSES OP THE 

GREEK VERB. By William W. Goodwin, Eliot Professor of Greek Litera- 
ture in Harvard University. Fifth Edition. 1 vol. 12mo. Cloth, pp. 264 . 1.75 

This work was first published in 1860, and it appeared in a new form — much en- 
larged and in great part rewritten — in 1865. In the present edition the whole has 
been again revised 5 some sections and notes have been rewritten, and a few notes 
have been added. The object of the work is to give a plain statement of the princi- 
ples which govern the construction of the Greek Moods and Tenses, — the most im- 
portant and the most difficult part of Greek Syntax. Scholars are referred to the 
Preface for a fuller account of the principles on which the work is based, and of its 
object and scope. The index to the classic examples (more than twenty -three hun- 
dred in number) by which the work is illustrated, arranged according to authors, is 
of great value to teachers who use the book for reference in their classes. 



ilB ^R YoF 



C ONGR Ess 



003 039 954 



